Operation/Reference Guide

TPDesign4
Touch Panel Design Program
(v2.11 or higher)

S of t w ar e

Last Revised: 9/22/2009

Software License and Warranty Agreement
• LICENSE GRANT. AMX grants to Licensee the non-exclusive right to use the AMX Software in the manner described in this License. The AMX Software is licensed, not sold. This license does not grant Licensee the right to create derivative works of the AMX Software. The AMX Software consists of generally available programming and development software, product documentation, sample applications, tools and utilities, and miscellaneous technical information. Please refer to the README.TXT file on the compact disc or download for further information regarding the components of the AMX Software. The AMX Software is subject to restrictions on distribution described in this License Agreement. AMX Dealer, Distributor, VIP or other AMX authorized entity shall not, and shall not permit any other person to, disclose, display, loan, publish, transfer (whether by sale, assignment, exchange, gift, operation of law or otherwise), license, sublicense, copy, or otherwise disseminate the AMX Software. Licensee may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the AMX Software. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT. You hereby acknowledge that you are an authorized AMX dealer, distributor, VIP or other AMX authorized entity in good standing and have the right to enter into and be bound by the terms of this Agreement. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY. The AMX Software is owned by AMX and is protected by United States copyright laws, patent laws, international treaty provisions, and/or state of Texas trade secret laws. Licensee may make copies of the AMX Software solely for backup or archival purposes. Licensee may not copy the written materials accompanying the AMX Software. TERMINATION. AMX RESERVES THE RIGHT, IN ITS SOLE DISCRETION, TO TERMINATE THIS LICENSE FOR ANY REASON UPON WRITTEN NOTICE TO LICENSEE. In the event that AMX terminates this License, the Licensee shall return or destroy all originals and copies of the AMX Software to AMX and certify in writing that all originals and copies have been returned or destroyed. PRE-RELEASE CODE. Portions of the AMX Software may, from time to time, as identified in the AMX Software, include PRERELEASE CODE and such code may not be at the level of performance, compatibility and functionality of the GA code. The PRE-RELEASE CODE may not operate correctly and may be substantially modified prior to final release or certain features may not be generally released. AMX is not obligated to make or support any PRE-RELEASE CODE. ALL PRE-RELEASE CODE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITH NO WARRANTIES. LIMITED WARRANTY. AMX warrants that the AMX Software (other than pre-release code) will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt. AMX DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH REGARD TO THE AMX SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES LICENSEE SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. Any supplements or updates to the AMX SOFTWARE, including without limitation, any (if any) service packs or hot fixes provided to Licensee after the expiration of the ninety (90) day Limited Warranty period are not covered by any warranty or condition, express, implied or statutory. LICENSEE REMEDIES. AMX's entire liability and Licensee's exclusive remedy shall be repair or replacement of the AMX Software that does not meet AMX's Limited Warranty and which is returned to AMX in accordance with AMX's current return policy. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the AMX Software has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement AMX Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Outside the United States, these remedies may not available. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL AMX BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS AMX SOFTWARE, EVEN IF AMX HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO LICENSEE. U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The AMX Software is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph ©(1)(ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs ©(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. SOFTWARE AND OTHER MATERIALS FROM AMX.COM MAY BE SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL. The United States Export Control laws prohibit the export of certain technical data and software to certain territories. No software from this Site may be downloaded or exported (i) into (or to a national or resident of) Cuba, Iraq, Libya, North Korea, Iran, Syria, or any other country to which the United States has embargoed goods; or (ii) anyone on the United States Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S. Commerce Department's Table of Deny Orders. AMX does not authorize the downloading or exporting of any software or technical data from this site to any jurisdiction prohibited by the United States Export Laws.

• •

This Agreement replaces and supersedes all previous AMX Software License Agreements and is governed by the laws of the State of Texas, and all disputes will be resolved in the courts in Collin County, Texas, USA. For any questions concerning this Agreement, or to contact AMX for any reason, please write: AMX License and Warranty Department, 3000 Research Drive, Richardson, TX 75082.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) ...............................................................................1
Overview .................................................................................................................. 1 What's New in Version 2.11...................................................................................... 1 Supported Windows Platforms and PC Requirements .............................................. 1
Supported Operating Systems ........................................................................................ 1 Supported Operating System Languages ...................................................................... 1 PC Requirements/Recommendations .............................................................................. 2

Supported Touch Panels/Screen Resolutions............................................................ 2
Supported Panel Types ................................................................................................... 2 Supported Screen Resolutions ........................................................................................ 3 Supported Screen Resolutions - NXI-TPI/4 ...................................................................... 4 Supported Screen Resolutions - TPI-PRO ........................................................................ 4 Supported Screen Resolutions - TPI-PRO-DVI ................................................................. 5 Video Capabilities for Modero Panels ............................................................................. 5 Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels ............................................................ 5 Intercom Capabilities for Modero Panels ........................................................................ 5 AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images ........................................... 6

True Type Font Support............................................................................................ 6 Supported Image File Types ..................................................................................... 6 Related Software Applications.................................................................................. 6
NetLinx Studio ................................................................................................................ 6 AMX WebUpdate ............................................................................................................ 7 G4 PanelBuilder .............................................................................................................. 7 G4 PanelPreview ............................................................................................................. 7

The TPDesign4 Work Area .................................................................................9
Overview .................................................................................................................. 9 Design View Windows ............................................................................................ 10
Design View Window tab controls ................................................................................ 11 Using the Zoom Controls .............................................................................................. 11 Magnifier Window......................................................................................................... 12

Workspace Window ................................................................................................ 12
Workspace Navigator - Pages Tab ................................................................................ 13 Workspace Window- Function Maps Tab ...................................................................... 14

Properties Window ................................................................................................. 14
Properties Control - General Tab .................................................................................. 15 Properties Control - Programming Tab ......................................................................... 16 Properties Control - States Tab..................................................................................... 17

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

i

Table of Contents

Using the Apply To All option ....................................................................................... 18 Using the Prev and Next buttons .................................................................................. 18

State Manager window........................................................................................... 19
State Manager Drag-and-Drop Menu ............................................................................ 20

Transfer Status Window.......................................................................................... 20 Status Bar ............................................................................................................... 21 Button Preview Window ......................................................................................... 22 Print Preview Window ............................................................................................ 23 Working With Dockable Windows .......................................................................... 23
Moving, Docking and Resizing Dockable Windows ....................................................... 23 Toggling the Windows .................................................................................................. 23

Using the New Project Wizard ..........................................................................25
Overview ................................................................................................................ 25 New Project Wizard dialogs.................................................................................... 26
New Project Wizard - Step 1 dialog .............................................................................. 26 New Project Wizard - Step Two dialog.......................................................................... 27 New Project Wizard - Final Step dialog......................................................................... 28

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4) .................................................................................29
Overview ................................................................................................................ 29 Inappropriate File Name Characters ....................................................................... 29 Creating a New Project........................................................................................... 29 System-Generated Project File Names ................................................................... 30 Edit Focus ............................................................................................................... 31 Quick Input ............................................................................................................. 31 Undo/Redo ............................................................................................................. 32 Cutting, Copying and Pasting ................................................................................. 32 Using the Selection Tool ......................................................................................... 33 Working With Video Fills ........................................................................................ 33 Drag and Drop Support .......................................................................................... 34 Using G4 PanelPreview ........................................................................................... 34 Setting Project Properties ...................................................................................... 34
Project Properties dialog - Project Information tab....................................................... 35 Project Properties dialog - Panel Setup Information tab ............................................... 37 Project Properties dialog - Sensors tab ......................................................................... 38 Project Properties dialog - IR Emitters and Receivers tab ............................................. 39

Applying Password Protection to Your Project File ................................................ 40 Setting a Power Up Page........................................................................................ 41 Setting Power Up Popup Pages.............................................................................. 41

ii

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Setting an Inactive Page Flip .................................................................................. 42 Using the Workspace Window ................................................................................ 43
Workspace Window - Pages Tab ................................................................................... 43 Workspace Window- Function Maps Tab ...................................................................... 44 Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window ........................................... 44

Using the Properties Window ................................................................................. 45
Properties Window - General Tab ................................................................................. 45 Properties Control - Programming Tab ......................................................................... 46 Properties Control - States Tab..................................................................................... 46

Working With Multiple Projects .............................................................................. 46
Opening Multiple Projects Simultaneously.................................................................... 46 Copying/Pasting Across Projects................................................................................... 46

Project Migration (From Previous Versions of TPDesign4)...................................... 47
Converting TPD3 files to TPD4 ..................................................................................... 47

R-4 Remote Controller Projects .............................................................................. 48
Creating a TPD4 Project for R-4 Remote Controllers .................................................... 48 R-4 Remote Devices - Unsupported Button Types ........................................................ 49

R-4 Setup Codes ..................................................................................................... 49
Levels: .......................................................................................................................... 49 Addresses ..................................................................................................................... 49 External Button Options ............................................................................................... 50 R-4 External Buttons - Default Channel Codes .............................................................. 50

Working With The Resource Manager ..............................................................51
Overview ................................................................................................................ 51 Working With Images ............................................................................................. 53
Resource Manager dialog - Images tab ......................................................................... 53 Static Image Files .......................................................................................................... 53 Supported Image File Types ......................................................................................... 54 Importing Image Files Into Your Project ....................................................................... 54

Working With Dynamic Images............................................................................... 56
Resource Manager dialog - Dynamic Images tab .......................................................... 56 Dynamic Images ............................................................................................................ 57 Adding Dynamic Image Files To Your Project ............................................................... 57 Dynamic Image Example - Adding a Dynamic Image .................................................... 58

DynaMo™ Dynamic Images .................................................................................... 60
Creating a DynaMo Image ............................................................................................ 60 Adding an Dynamo Resource Image to the Resource Manager .................................... 61 Scaling and Cropping of Dynamo Resource Images ...................................................... 62 Copy/Paste Operations on Dynamo Resource Images .................................................. 62

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

iii

Table of Contents

Cameras and Servers With M-JPEG Streaming Output........................................... 63
Network Path Information............................................................................................. 63 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 1: Axis.................................................................... 64 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 2: Panasonic .......................................................... 64 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 3: Vivotek ............................................................. 65 Working With Trendnet IP Cameras .............................................................................. 65 DynaMo Dynamic Image Example - Adding a Streaming Webcam Image..................... 65

Working With Slots ................................................................................................. 68
Resource Manager dialog - Slots tab............................................................................. 68 Assigning Images and Sounds to Slot Positions ............................................................ 69

Working With Icons................................................................................................. 70
Bitmaps vs. Icons ........................................................................................................... 70

Working With Sounds ............................................................................................. 71
Resource Manager dialog - Sounds tab......................................................................... 71 Supported Sound File Types ......................................................................................... 72 Importing Sound Files To Your Project.......................................................................... 72

Exporting Image and Sound Files From Your Project To a Specified Directory ...... 72 Editing Image and Sound Files Using External Programs ....................................... 73
Editing Image Files ........................................................................................................ 73 Editing Sound Files........................................................................................................ 73

Working With Pages .........................................................................................75
Overview ................................................................................................................ 75 Creating a New Page .............................................................................................. 75 Setting Page Properties.......................................................................................... 76
Setting General Properties: Pages ................................................................................ 76 Setting Programming Properties: Pages ....................................................................... 76 Setting States Properties: Pages ................................................................................... 76

Renaming a Page .................................................................................................... 77 Adding a Fill Color to a Page.................................................................................. 77 Adding a Bitmap to a Page..................................................................................... 78 Adding an Icon to a Page ....................................................................................... 79 Adding Text to a Page............................................................................................ 79 Displaying a Video Source on a Page ..................................................................... 81 Copying/Pasting Pages ........................................................................................... 81
Copying Pages .............................................................................................................. 81 Pasting Pages ................................................................................................................ 81

Deleting Pages From a Project ............................................................................... 81 Exporting Pages as Image Files .............................................................................. 82 Printing Pages......................................................................................................... 83

iv

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

............................................. 88 Setting General Properties: Popup Pages......................................................................... 92 Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page ................................................................................................................................................ 102 Adding a Bitmap to a Button ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 94 Show/Hide Popup Pages .... 104 Working With Transparent Backgrounds............................................................................................................................................................................ 107 TPDesign4 (v2............... 91 Adding an Icon to a Popup Page ........................... 98 Generated Button Names .................................................................. 89 Setting States Properties: Popup Pages ......... 89 Drawing Assist Support for Popup Pages ............................................................................................................................... 90 Adding a Fill Color To a Popup Page.......... 87 Setting Popup Page Properties ............ 85 Creating a Popup Page....................................................................................... 99 Specifying the Button Type ....................... 85 Using the Popup Draw Tool....................................................................... 93 Copying/Pasting Popup Pages... 95 Working With Buttons ..... 100 Specifying a Button Border.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 100 Adding Text to a Button .....................85 Overview ................................................................................ 94 Deleting Popup Pages From a Project ... 94 Copying Popup Pages .................................................................................... 101 Adding a Fill Color To a Button ................................................................................ 107 Adding Text Effects ............................................................................................................................................... 90 Renaming a Popup Page.............Table of Contents Working With Popup Pages ........................................................ 94 Pasting Popup Pages......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 106 Displaying a Video Source on a Button.....................................................................................................11 or higher) v ............... 90 Adding a Bitmap to a Popup Page ........................ 103 Adding an Icon to a Button............................... 97 Button Draw Tools ............................................................................................................................................................ 91 Adding Text to a Popup Page ............................................................................... 97 Drawing a Button............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 88 Setting Programming Properties: Popup Pages......................... 93 Creating Popup Page Groups ..................... 100 Foreign Language Support for Text ................................................................................................................... 107 Page Flips ................................................................... 102 Changing the Button Fill Color..97 Overview ................................................................................................................

. 124 TakeNote Buttons............... 109 Copying/Pasting Buttons ........................................................................................ 125 Setting Properties: TakeNote Buttons ........................................................................................................................................... 112 Setting Properties: General Buttons ................................................................................................................................................................................. 110 Copying Buttons................................... 130 Creating a Date Button.......................... 114 Bargraph Buttons...................................................... 123 Computer Control Buttons .............................................................................................................................. 127 Order Assist toolbar ......................... 124 Setting Properties: Computer Control Buttons ........................................... 113 Setting Properties: Multi-State General Buttons .............................................. 121 Text Input Buttons ............................................................ 125 Setting Default New Button Parameters ................................................ 118 Working With Touch Maps ......... 123 Input Mask Operators . 111 General Buttons ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 115 Multi-State Bargraph Buttons .......................................................... 121 Setting Properties: Joystick Buttons ................................ 111 Editing Multiple Selections.......................................................... 128 Using the Alignment & Sizing dialog ... 129 Previewing a Button ............................... 108 Drag & Drop To Set Page Flips .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 116 Slider Types..................................................................................... 109 Page Flip Actions............................................................................................................................................................................................... 127 Size Assist toolbar ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 126 Using the Drawing Assist Features ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 120 Joystick Buttons............................................................................................................................................... 113 Level Control Parameters ................................................................ 112 Multi-State General Buttons ...................................... 117 Creating a Custom Slider .................................................................................................................................... 110 Editing Button Properties .............. 127 Position Assist toolbar......... 122 Input Mask Characters.......................................................................................11 or higher) ................................. 110 Pasting Buttons ....................................... 123 Input Mask Ranges .................................................................................................... 123 Input Mask Next Field Characters ................................................................................................................................... 131 vi TPDesign4 (v2.. 117 Formatting Codes ...........................Table of Contents Creating a Page Flip ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 116 Setting Properties: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons...........................................................

........................................................................................ 145 Setting List Box Container Button Properties ....................................................................................... 148 Setting Properties: List Box Columns ........................................... 148 List Box Buttons ........................Z-Order ............................................................................................................................................................. 148 Setting List Box Button Column Properties............. 141 Creating List Box Buttons (Managed Mode) ..........................................................................................Table of Contents Creating a Time Button........................................... 144 List Box Buttons .................................Container Button............Resizing......................... 147 Subordinate Button Placement ....................................... 132 Working With External Controls ....... 137 Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External Pushbuttons......... 136 Setting Global Properties for External LEDs ......................... 143 Cutting.........................................................................Columns........................ 151 Creating List Box Buttons (Unmanaged Mode) ................................................................................................................................................ 150 Rules for Unmanaged List Box Buttons ................................................................................................ 137 Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External LEDs ............................................................... 141 Adding Rows ..................... 136 Setting Global Properties for External Pushbuttons .................................................... 135 Global Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs .. 153 List Box Buttons ........................................... 136 Page-Specific Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs ...................................139 Overview .................................................. 135 External Button Options ................................................... 140 List Box Buttons: Managed Mode........................ 152 List Box Buttons ................................................................. 154 TPDesign4 (v2................................................. 144 List Box Container Properties vs.................. 138 Working With List Box Buttons ............................. 145 Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons.............................................................................................135 Overview .................................................................................... 143 Deleting Columns................................................................Subordinate Buttons ..................................................................... 146 List Box Buttons ................................................................................................. 142 Adding Columns................. 147 Subordinate Buttons ........... Column Properties........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 154 Using the Drawing Toolbar With List Box Buttons .................................. Copying and Pasting a List Box ................................... 135 Copying/Converting External Controls Between Panels .................................................................................................................................. 143 Deleting Rows .............................................................. 140 List Box Toolbar............. 149 List Box Buttons: Unmanaged Mode ................................................................................Drag and Drop Capability......................11 or higher) vii ...... 139 G4 Devices That Support List Box Buttons ..................................................................................................................................................................... 140 List Box Buttons: Managed / Unmanaged Mode .......................................

... 159 Static List Box Data ................Navigation Buttons ......................................................... 179 Auto-Repeat ............. 175 Using the Apply To All option ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 178 General Properties.... 160 Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button .......................................................................................... 179 Column Sort Order .................................................................................... 157 Navigation Buttons ............................. 179 Animate Time Up.................................. 179 Animate Time Down ............................... 179 Above Popups .................... 179 Border Style ............ 177 Saving a Properties Set ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 179 Column Display Order .............................................................175 Overview .. 179 Color Depth............................................. 180 Compression............................................................................... 175 Drag and Drop Support .................................................................................................... 163 Deleting a List Data Table .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 180 viii TPDesign4 (v2........................................................ 171 Changing Port and Address Assignments for a List Data Table .................... 157 Scroll Bar Components ..........................................................................................................................11 or higher) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 164 Data List Command Rules..........................................................................Table of Contents List Box Buttons ........................................................... 159 Attaching a List Data Table to a List Box Button......................... 164 Data List Commands ......................................................................................................................... 176 Working With The Property Painter.................................... 159 Dynamic List Box Data...Channel Code Values ........... 154 Creating List Box Navigation Buttons ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 160 Creating a Static List Data Table................................................................................................................................................................. 169 Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button .................................................................................................................................................................................. 180 Cursor Color .............................................................................................. 156 Creating a List Box Feedback Scroll Bar................ 167 Dynamic List box Table Example .................................................................................................... 164 Creating a Dynamic List Data Table ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 166 Command Structure List View .......... 176 Using the Prev and Next buttons ........................................................................................................... 172 Working With Properties ..................... 158 List Data Table Properties ............................................................................... 158 List Data Table ............ 180 Cursor Name ................................... 155 Creating a List Box Navigation Scroll Bar.....................................

................................................................................................................................................................................................... 183 List Filter Column ................................................................................................................................................................................ 181 Hide Effect .. 182 List Column Padding ........................Table of Contents Description...................................................................................... 185 Remote Host ........................... 185 Page Flip .................................................................................................................... 184 List Row..................................................................................................... 186 TPDesign4 (v2....................................... 182 List Column .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 184 List Preferred Row Height... 183 List Managed................................................................................................ 181 Hide Effect Time ................................................................................................... 185 Modal .......................................................................................... 183 List Table Wrap ........................................................ 180 Disabled ...................................... 184 List Selectable ................................................................. 186 Show Effect Time ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 182 List Table Address........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 181 Left......... 185 Password .............................................. 182 List Display ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 185 Remote Port................................................................................................................................11 or higher) ix .............................................................. 180 Group ....................... 184 List Row Height ................................................................................................................................................................................ 186 Show Effect ..................................... On Show ........... 182 List Table Port .................................................. 181 Hide Effect X/Y Pos............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 181 Hidden ......................... 185 Name...................... 185 Password Protection ................................................................................................... 180 Display Type.................................................................................................. 186 Scale To Fit....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 183 List Offset Enabled............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 180 Height ............ 185 Max Text Length ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 185 Password Character ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 185 Reset Pos..................................................................................................................... 181 Input Mask ............... 184 List Row Padding............................................................................ 184 Lock Button Name............ 183 List Preferred Row ............................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 191 Range High.............................................................................................................................................................. 191 Range Time Up ......... 189 Channel Code ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 190 Level Control Repeat Time ......................................................................................................................................................................................................Table of Contents Show Effect X/Y Pos................................................................................................................................................................................................... 191 State Properties....................................................... 189 Command Port .............................................................................................................................. 187 Touch Style....................... 186 TakeNote Enabled.......................................................... 191 String Output Port ......................................... 191 String Output ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 188 Programing Properties........................ 192 Bitmap........................... 189 Level Code .......................................................... 190 Level Control Type ..................................................................................................................... 188 Width............................................................... 186 State Count ............. 189 Command Output .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 190 Range Drag Increment ...................................................................... 187 Top ....................................................................................................... 187 Type ...................... 191 Range Time Down ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 190 Level Port ....... 187 Touch Map............................................................................................................................ 190 Level Function .............................................................................................................................. 190 Level Control Value ............................................................................................ 187 TakeNote Port..................... 192 x TPDesign4 (v2.................................................................. 191 Range Inverted ........................................... 186 Slider Name.............................................................................................. 188 Value Direction................................................ 189 Channel Port........................................................................................... 189 Address Port .............................................................. 186 Slider Color .....................................11 or higher) ................................................................................................. 187 Timeout .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 189 Feedback.................................................................................................................................................................... 190 Range Aux Inverted...... 191 Range Low............................................................................................................................................... 189 Level Aux...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 189 Address Code....................... 187 TakeNote Host .............................................................................................................

.............. 194 Sound ........ 193 Icon Y Offset ...................................................................................... 193 Icon X Offset ......................................................................................................................................... 196 Searching For Button Properties ............................... 195 Text Color ................................................................................................................. 193 Marquee Direction .......................................... 192 Bitmap X Offset ................................................................................................................................................................................Table of Contents Bitmap Justification................................................................................................................................................................................... 202 Duplicating an Existing State on the Button ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 195 Text Y Offset.............................................................................................................................. 195 Text Justification .................... 195 Text X Offset...........................................................................................................................11 or higher) xi .......................................................................................................................... 202 Adding States From the Clipboard ............................. 192 Chameleon Image .......................................................... 195 Streaming Source .......... 195 Text Effect.......................................................................................................................... 192 Border Name......................................................................... 195 Text ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 194 Overall Opacity .............................................. 192 Draw Order ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 194 Scale Bitmap To Fit ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 201 Adding States To a Button ........................ 192 Bitmap Y Offset...................... 196 Video Cropping............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 201 State Manager Context Menu ........................................ 192 Border Color .......................................................................... 198 Working With States ............................................... 196 Word Wrap..... 196 Video Touch Pass-Thru .............. 196 Using the All States Option ............ 194 Marquee Repeat ................................................................. 203 TPDesign4 (v2.............................................................................................................................. 193 Fill Color........................................................................................................................... 196 Video Fill ............................................................................................................................. 197 Searching and Replacing Button Properties ....................................................................................................................................................................................................201 Overview ....................... 201 State Manager Window ............................................................................................................................................. 193 Icon Justification .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 193 Icon Slot .................................................................................................................................................... 195 Text Effect Color .............. 193 Font..............................

.................................................................................. 205 Reordering States Through Drag-and-Drop .................11 or higher) ............................................................... 215 Working With Multiple Color Palettes.................. Popup Page or Button .............................................................................. 218 xii TPDesign4 (v2.....................................................Table of Contents Drag & Drop To Add States ....................... 210 Assign Codes. 218 Using the Microsoft® Paint Utility Program.............................................................. 217 Importing Palette Files ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 215 Creating New Palette Entries . 206 Changing the Draw Order for Selected States................................................................................................... 205 Changing the Order Of States On A Button .........Setup Port............................................................................................................ 206 Working With Function Codes .............................................. 213 Working With Palettes ................... 203 Setting the Maximum Active State For a Button ......................... 208 0........................................................................................................................................... 204 Cutting States To the Clipboard.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 211 Wrap Within Port ID (Power Assign).............. 210 Clear Channels First............................. 216 Renaming Palettes................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 217 Copying Palette Entries.................................................................................... 204 Deleting States........ 217 Copying Palettes ...............................................................................................................................207 Overview ..........213 Working With Colors.................................................................................................... 205 Draw Order (Z-Order) ......... 207 Show/Hide Function Codes................................................................. 205 Copying/Pasting States From a Page........... 205 Copying a State to the Clipboard.................................................. 211 Working With Colors and Palettes .... 208 Function Codes ..................................................... 217 Using Custom Palettes to Enable Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 215 Creating Custom Palettes........................... 205 Reordering States Through the Clipboard ............................................................................................................................. 209 Using Power Assign ....... 217 Exporting Palette Files ................................................................................................................................ 204 Removing States From A Button...... 205 Pasting a State from the Clipboard .. 210 Begin Assignment At (Power Assign) ....................................................................... 216 Changing the Active Palette...................................... 208 Function Code Map .......................................................... 211 Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment (Power Assign) ...............................................................................................................Limitations...........................................

............................................................................... 219 Displaying a Video Source on a Page..................................................................Finish (Step 6 of 6) .............................................................................. 226 Creating Animated Bitmap Effects.................................................................... 238 TPDesign4 (v2.....219 Overview .................................................................................................... 233 Working With Communications Configurations ............................. 235 Connecting to a NetLinx Master via TCP/IP .......................................................................................................... 234 Saving and Recalling Communication Configurations ...................................................................................................................... 220 Displaying a Video Source on a Button ...................Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6) .. 228 Chameleon Images ................................................................ 225 Animation Wizard ............................................. 229 Working With Chameleon Images ...................................................................................................... 219 Streaming Video Fills ........................................................... 224 Animation Wizard .... 238 Sending a Panel File To a NetLinx Master. Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder...................................... 231 File Transfer Operations ..................................................... 228 Tweeners sub-menu ......................................... 223 Animation Wizard ...........Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) ..................................................... 234 Editing the Settings on an Existing Communication Configuration...... 223 Animation Wizard ..................................................................................................Example ......................................................................................Table of Contents Working With Video Fills ................................... 227 Creating Animated Text Effects ...................................................................................... 230 Working With Chameleon Images ... 224 Animation Wizard ............... 223 Using the Animation Wizard ...........Size & Position (Step 3 of 6) ........................................................ 236 Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Modem......... 237 Transferring Touch Panel Files to/from a NetLinx Master...............................................................................................................................................................................233 Overview .................................................. 230 Chameleon Images................................ 225 Tweening .................................................................. 223 Animation Wizard .......................................................................................................Select Type (Step 1 of 6)..................................................11 or higher) xiii ...................... 219 Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page .................................................................................................. 238 Panel File Transfers via TCP/IP . 225 Creating Color Transition Effects ...................................................223 Overview ................................ 229 Requirements for Chameleon Images ..........................Appearance (Step 5 of 6) ......................... 238 Receiving a Panel File From a NetLinx Master ................ 220 Working With Animation Effects ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 233 Secure NetLinx Connections .............................................................................................................................................. 235 Connecting to a NetLinx Master .................................................................................... 235 Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Serial Port ......................

Table of Contents

Panel File Transfers via Serial Port .............................................................................. 239 Panel File Transfers via Modem................................................................................... 240 Transfer Options ......................................................................................................... 241

Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers............................................................... 241
Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers.................. 241 Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers .................................. 242 Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via TCP/IP)................................................... 242

Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection .................. 242
Sending Files To the Panel .......................................................................................... 242 Receiving Files From The Panel ................................................................................... 243

Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers................................................................... 243
Installing the AMX USB Driver for G4 Touch Panels.................................................... 243 Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers...................... 243 Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers ...................................... 244 Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via USB)....................................................... 244

Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection ...................... 244
Sending Files To the Panel .......................................................................................... 244 Receiving Files From The Panel ................................................................................... 244

MVP-5200i USB Driver .......................................................................................... 245

Working With Templates ................................................................................247
Importing Template (*.VAT or *.TPT) Files ............................................................ 247 Working With the System Page Template ............................................................ 247
Copying/Pasting Entire System Pages into a Project .................................................. 248 Copying/Pasting System Page Elements into a Project page ...................................... 249 Working with System Page Keyboards and Keypads .................................................. 249 System Page Template Reference ............................................................................... 250 System Page Template Popup Pages .......................................................................... 251

Exporting Your Project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template........................................ 252 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Required Template Elements.................................. 254
Navigation Elements ................................................................................................... 254 Placeholder Elements .................................................................................................. 255

G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Optional Template Elements .................................. 256
Mode Elements ........................................................................................................... 256 Sub-Navigation Elements ............................................................................................ 257 Splash Elements .......................................................................................................... 257 Device Elements .......................................................................................................... 258 Feature Elements ........................................................................................................ 258 Sub-Feature Elements ................................................................................................. 259

xiv

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Rules for Navigating a G4 PanelBuilder Template ................................................ 259 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Template Wide Conventions................................... 260 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - AMX Naming Conventions...................................... 261 Exporting Your Project as a VisualArchitect Template.......................................... 262
VA Templates - Navigations as Pages ......................................................................... 262 VA Templates - Logical Page Scroll Bar Elements ....................................................... 262 VA Templates - Logical Page Info Element.................................................................. 263 VA Templates - Logical Page Up and Down Elements ................................................ 263 VA Templates - List Box Page Up and Down Elements ............................................... 263

Program Preferences ......................................................................................265
Overview .............................................................................................................. 265 Preferences Dialog - Application tab .................................................................... 265
Startup ........................................................................................................................ 265 Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................. 266 Warning Messages ...................................................................................................... 266

Preferences Dialog - Appearance tab ................................................................... 267
Window ....................................................................................................................... 267 Grid ............................................................................................................................. 268 Transparency ............................................................................................................... 268

Preferences Dialog - Directories tab..................................................................... 269
Default Directories ...................................................................................................... 269

Preferences Dialog - Editor Selection tab ............................................................. 270 Preferences Dialog - Undo/Redo tab .................................................................... 271
Undo / Redo Support .................................................................................................. 271

Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files............................................ 272 Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files ........................................... 272 Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program .......................... 273 Customizing the Menus and Toolbars................................................................... 274 Customizing the Toolbars ..................................................................................... 274
Adding Buttons To Existing Toolbars.......................................................................... 274 Removing Buttons From Existing Toolbars ................................................................. 275 Associating an Icon With a New Command................................................................. 275 Creating a New Custom Toolbar ................................................................................. 276 Renaming Custom Toolbars ........................................................................................ 276 Deleting Custom Toolbars........................................................................................... 277

Customizing the Menus ........................................................................................ 277
Adding Commands To Existing Menus........................................................................ 277 Removing Commands From Existing Menus ............................................................... 277 Creating a New Custom Menu .................................................................................... 278

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

xv

Table of Contents

Adding a Shortcut To an Application In the Tools Menu ...................................... 279 Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators) ......................................................................... 280
Setting Custom Hotkeys.............................................................................................. 280

xvi

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)
Overview
The TPDesign4 (or "TPD4") Touch Panel Design program is designed to assist you in creating a state-of-theart touch panel interface for AMX's G4 Level touch panels (including the Modero line, MIO-R4 remote controllers, and the NXP-TPI/4 Touch Panel Interface). Use TPD4 to create Project Files (*.TP4) containing all of the information required to define a user-interface to be utilized on a G4 touch panel. This includes Pages, Popup Pages and associated navigation/page-flip information, as well as buttons (including function code information), and all image and sound-related files that are used in the design (including dynamic images and video feeds).

What's New in Version 2.11
Support for Dynamo Resource Images on the following panel-types: NXD-1000Vi MVP-8400i MVP-8400 MVP-5200i NXD-700Vi NXD-500i

Supported Windows Platforms and PC Requirements
Supported Operating Systems
Windows 2000® (service pack 4 or greater) Windows XP® Professional (service pack 2 or greater) Windows Vista-Business You must have Power User (or Administrator) rights to install and run all required System files.

Supported Operating System Languages
Windows XP® Professional / Windows 2000®: • English (US) • French • German • Spanish Windows Vista-Business®: • Chinese (Classic, HK) • French • Japanese • Spanish • English • Chinese (Simplified, PRC) • Arabic • German • Turkish • Greek • Italian • Portuguese • Flemish (Dutch) • Russian • Turkish

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

1

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

PC Requirements/Recommendations
Pentium III 750MHZ processor (minimum requirement); 1.5GHz or faster recommended. 700 MB of free disk space (minimum requirement) 512 MB of RAM (minimum - SQL Server 2005 Express Edition requires 512MB) Minimum (VGA) screen resolution of 800x600. Windows-compatible mouse (or other pointing device). If the mouse wheel on your Microsoft® IntelliMouse® doesn't work with VA, try downloading the latest IntelliMouse drivers from Microsoft.

Supported Touch Panels/Screen Resolutions
Supported Panel Types
TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) supports the following AMX (G4) touch panel types: Supported Panel Types
Name MVP-5100 MVP-5150 MVP-5200i MVP-7500 MVP-8400 MVP-8400i NXD-430 NXD-435 NXD-CV5 NXD-500i NXD/NXT-CV7 NXD-700vi NXD/NXT-CV10 NXT-CV10/PB NXD-1000vi NXD/NXT-CA12 NXD/NXT-CV12 NXD/NXT-1200V Description 5.2" Modero® ViewPoint® IR Touch Panel 5.2" Modero® ViewPoint® Wi-Fi Touch Panel 5.2" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom 7.5" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel 8.4" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel 8.4" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom 4.3" Modero Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 4.3" Modero Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 5" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 5" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 7" Modero Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 7" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel with Intercom 10" Modero Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 10" Modero Table Top Touch Panel with Pushbuttons 10" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel with Intercom 12" Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 12" Flush Mount & Table Top Video Touch Panels 12" Modero® Video Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels FG#(s) (FG5966-08) (FG5966-07) (FG5966-01) (FG5965-01) (FG5965-05) (FG5965-04) (FG2262-01) (FG2262-03) (FG2261-01) (FG2261-02) (FG2258-02K, FG2258-01K) (FG2258-04K) (FG2259-02K, FG2259-01K) (FG2259-03K) (FG2259-04K) (FG2251-10, FG2250) (FG2251-12K, FG2250-11K) (FG2251-60K, FG2250-60K) (FG225161RGB, FG2250-61V)

NXD/NXT-1200VG 12" Modero® VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels with RGB

2

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Supported Panel Types (Cont.)
Name NXD/NXT-CA15 NXD/NXT-CV15 Description 15" Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 15" Flush Mount & Table Top Video Touch Panels FG#(s) (FG2253-10, FG2252) (FG2253-12K, FG2252-11K) (FG2253-61V, FG2252-61V) (FG2256K, FG2257K) (FG2256-61V, FG2257-61V) (FG630-100) (FG2275-01) (FG2275-102, FG2275-104) (FG2275-112, FG2275-114) (FG148-04)

NXD/NXT-1500VG 15" Modero VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels NXD/NXT-CV17 17" Flush Mount & Table Top Color Video Touch Panels

NXD/NXT-1700VG 17" Modero VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels NXP-PLV NXP-TPI/4 TPI-PRO TPI-PRO-DVI R-4 Modero PosiTrack Pilot Camera Controller NetLinx® Touch Panel Interface Total Presentation Interface, 2/4 Source Input Total Presentation Interface with DVI, 2/4 Source Input Mio R-4 Remote

The prefix " NXT" indicates the table-top (tilt) model, and "NXD" represents the wallmount version.

Supported Screen Resolutions
While most touch panels support a single screen resolution, the NXI-TPI/4, TPI-PRO, TPI-PRO-DVI and NXV-300 support multiple resolutions, selectable in the New Project Wizard - Step 1 dialog. The screen resolution setting for these panel devices can be changed later via the Screen Size option in the Save As Different Panel Type dialog. Supported Panel Types Per Resolutions
Resolution 640x480 720x480 CEA 720x576 CEA 800x480 • MVP-7500 • NXP-TPI4 • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO-DVI • MVP-5150 • MVP-5200i • CV5 • MVP-8400i • MVP-8400 800x600 • 1200V • 1200VG • 1500VG 1024x768 • CV15 • CA15 • CV7 • CV10 • CV10/PB • CA12 • CV12 • NXP-TPI4 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • NXP-TPI4 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI Panel Type • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

3

11 or higher) Supported Panel Types Per Resolutions (Cont.Pro Edition (2/4 Source Input)): • 640x480 • 800x600 • 1024x768 • 1280x1024 • 1360x768 • 1440x900 • 1600x1200 • 1680x1050 • 1920x1080 • 1920x1200 4 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .TPDesign4 (v2. Supported Screen Resolutions .NXI-TPI/4 TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the NXI-TPI/4 (NetLinx Touch Panel Interface 4): • 640x480 • 800x600 • 1024x768 • 1280x1024 Supported Screen Resolutions .TPI-PRO TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the TPI-PRO (Total Presentation Interface .) Resolution 1280x720 VESA/CEA 1280x768 • TPI-PRO-DVI • 1700VG • CV17 • NXP-TPI4 1280x1024 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI 1360x768 1440x900 1600x1200 1680x1050 1920x1080 1920x1080 VESA/CEA 1920x1200 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI Panel Type TPD4 provides scrolling if a Design View is larger than the available visible work area.

These panels include: MVP-5200i MVP-8400i NXD-1000vi NXD-700vi TPDesign4 (v2.TPI-PRO-DVI TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the TPI-PRO (Total Presentation Interface PRO with DVI (2/4 Source Input)): • 640x480 • 720x480 CEA • 720x576 CEA • 800x600 • 1024x768 • 1280x720 VESA • 1280x720 CEA • 1280x768 • 1280x1024 • 1360x768 • 1440x900 • 1600x1200 • 1680x1050 • 1920x1080 VESA • 1920x1080 CEA • 1920x1200 Video Capabilities for Modero Panels Video Capable Modero Panels all support Composite video inputs. Intercom Capabilities for Modero Panels Intercom-equipped Modero Panels support 2-way full-duplex intercom capabilities.11 or higher) 5 . it also supports Composite video (only).11 or higher) Supported Screen Resolutions .TPDesign4 (v2. These include: NXT/NXD-CV7 NXD/NXT-CV10 NXD/NXT-CV10/PB NXT/NXD-CV12 NXT/NXD-CV15 NXT/NXD-CV17 Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels Video capable Enhanced Modero Panels all support Composite. These include: NXT/NXD-1200V (Composite only) NXT/NXD-1200VG NXT/NXD-1500VG NXT/NXD-1700VG While the NXT/NXD-1200V panel is considered to be part of the enhanced Modero family of Panels. Component/RGB and Streaming video inputs.

Unless you are actually using transparency. as well as the Button Selection/Draw toolbar and the Add Page and Add Popup Page dialogs. 6 TPDesign4 (v2. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors.11 or higher) . This list will be updated as support for Dynamo Resource Images is added to new and existing panels: NXD-1000Vi MVP-8400i MVP-8400 MVP-5200i NXD-700Vi NXD-500i True Type Font Support Since G4 panels have the ability to decode and display Windows True Type Font files (TTF). See the Working With Transparent Backgrounds section on page 106 for details. Refer to the NetLinx Studio online help and Instruction Manual for instructions.amx. Fonts are presented in the Properties Control window (States tab). Related Software Applications The related AMX software applications described in the following sections are available to download from www.com: NetLinx Studio NetLinx Studio is a full featured Integrated Development Environment (IDE) for NetLinx and Axcess Control Systems.com. The TTF files listed represent those TTF files installed in Windows with their available point sizes.11 or higher) AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images The following list indicates the AMX Touch Panels that support Dynamo Resource Images (at the time of this TPDesign4 release).TPDesign4 (v2. NetLinx Studio is available for free download from www. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4.amx. since they are usually slightly smaller in size. TPD4 directly utilizes TTF files. only one accommodates transparency as a color: PNGs. Supported Image File Types TPD4 supports the following image file types: BMP (Windows bitmap) IFF (Interchange File Format) JPG (Joint Photographic Expert Group) PCT (Macintosh Pict) PCX (PC (Zsoft) Paintbrush) PNG (Portable Network Graphic) PSD (Photoshop) TGA (TrueVision Targa) WMF (Windows Meta File) EPS (Encapsulated Post Script) FPX (FlashPix) Notes: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4. JPGs are recommended over PNGs.

launches the installation of those downloads. using either pre-fabricated templates from AMX.amx. TPD4 is required to complete the project by specifying channel mapping information. Although G4 PanelBuilder is installed separately. Refer to the WebUpdate on-line help for details and instructions. or user-designed templates. For example. determines the latest version of the selected applications. the File > New From G4 PanelBuilder option (available only if G4 PanelBuilder is installed) launches the G4 PanelBuilder application to allow you to create a new TPD4 project. where you can preview the project and simulate push and release of buttons.TPDesign4 (v2.VAT) into TPD4 as a starting point for your panel design. Click File > Import Touch Panel Template to import an existing PanelBuilder (*. and must be installed in order to activate this menu option. it is fully integrated with TPD4.com. For details on using G4 PanelBuilder to generate G4 PanelBuilder project files (*. The G4 PanelBuilder application is designed to do the bulk of the basic layout and navigational design of a touch panel design. Click File > Export G4 PanelBuilder Template to export the active TP4 project as a PanelBuilder Template file (*. (including multi-state and bar graph buttons) via the mouse and keyboard on your PC. and to generally fine-tune the project as needed. Select Help > Web Update to launch this application.TPT) or Visual Architect template file (*. Use the set of options in the File menu to access the key functions of the G4 PanelBuilder application: Click File > New From G4 Panel Builder to create a new TP4 panel project using G4 PanelBuilder. If not found.TPT). The G4 PanelPreview application is available from www.11 or higher) 7 . Refer to the G4 PanelPreview online help file for details. TPDesign4 (v2. allows a user to download the selected installation files. TPD4 will prompt you to download the application from www.PB4). returns a listing of available updates.11 or higher) AMX WebUpdate The AMX WebUpdate program is a stand-alone application that communicates with the AMX website. select Panel > Send To G4 PanelPreview (or click the toolbar button) to launch the G4 PanelPreview application.amx. G4 PanelPreview G4 PanelPreview is a stand-alone application (installed separately) from AMX that allows you to preview TPD4 projects for G4 touchpanels. To preview your panel project.com. allows a user to select from a list of available AMX Software programs to choose for updating. Note: The WebUpdate application is not installed by TPD4. and must be installed separately. G4 PanelBuilder G4 PanelBuilder is a stand-alone application (installed separately) from AMX that allows you to quickly create TPD4 projects for G4 touchpanels. and upon request. refer to the G4 PanelBuilder online help.

11 or higher) 8 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .TPDesign4 (v2.

Panel.Contains two tabs: The Pages tab contains a tree structure representing all open projects. View.Lists the name of the active Project file.The TPDesign4 Work Area The TPDesign4 Work Area Overview The TPD4 work area consists of several main components (FIG. TPDesign4 (v2. If a toolbar has a check next to it in the sub-menu. Button. Click View. Tools. Edit.You can choose which toolbars to show in the workspace via the View > Toolbars submenu. toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (right-click inside any of the tabs to open). left to right. Toolbars . These settings are saved. The Function Maps tab allows you to view/edit the function codes associated with each page. Page. from top to bottom. then click in the checkboxes to select/de-select the listed toolbars (including custom toolbars). 1 TPDesign4 Work Area In its default configuration. and their pages and popup pages. Design View Windows . 1): Title Bar Menu Bar Toolbars Workspace Window Design View Windows Properties Window State Manager Window Status Bar FIG. the main components are: Title Bar .11 or higher) 9 . a tab is displayed for each open page. Transfer. so they'll apply the next time the application is launched. Use the Pages tabs to open/edit the pages / popup pages in each project. When this option is enabled. Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs.Contains the main menu options (File. but can be moved. Window. and Help). then it is displayed. Layout. Note that a MDI tab is displayed for each opened page. States. Workspace Window . These tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area. Menu Bar .Each tabbed Design View Window represents a Touch Panel page or popup page.

Status Bar . When this option is enabled. State Manager Window .Contains three tabs: the General tab allows you to view/edit general (non-state oriented) button properties. toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (right-click inside any of the tabs to open). The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area. a tab is displayed for each open page. Feedback and Initial page file target information. Select the Toggle Information Overlay toolbar button (in the View toolbar) to display function codes associated with each button (FIG. Once the Popup is displayed on the page. and (for the button the mouse is over): Channel code.By default. you can set their size and dimensions manually by first enabling the Show Popup Page option in the Page menu. FIG. Top. Alternatively. Width or Height properties. you can click and drag to resize and position it manually. Design View Windows Design View windows (FIG. button size. the Status Bar shows the current XY cursor position. but can be moved. Use the Zoom and Magnifier Window features to control the size of the view. Level code. toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (rightclick inside any of the tabs). the Programming tab allows you view/edit programming-oriented properties. FIG. Popup pages are resizable through the Properties Window by adjusting their Left. 2) represent pages or popup pages in the panel file you are creating. and the States tab allows you to view/edit button state information. Since Design View windows represent the pages on the panel themselves. The status bar also indicates the status of your connection to the NetLinx Master. Address code. The State Manager window allows you to view/edit the various states of a selected button.11 or higher) . They provide a canvas upon which you may place buttons of any size that will fit within the confines of the windows. panel revision.The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Window . 3). 3 Toggle Information Overlay toolbar button (View toolbar) Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs.Displays each state of the selected button as a thumbnail image in this window. 10 TPDesign4 (v2. Design Views that represent pages are not resizable. 2 Design View windows The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area. but can be moved.

Zoom controls do not affect the actual size of the selected object. 4) contains shortcuts to the main Zoom Controls. only the view is closed. In TPD4. and they can be toggled on/off via the View > MDI Page Tabs option. Zoom Out/In: With a page or popup page selected. by the increments listed in the Zoom Control drop-down. If you open more than 15 pages.The TPDesign4 Work Area TPD4 will display up to a maximum of 15 page tabs. Using the Zoom Controls The Zoom toolbar (FIG. By default. only the way it is represented in the workspace area. each of these windows has its own page tab (normally appearing along the bottom edge of the Design View window area) that shows the Page name. accessible from the main menu bar. This context menu contains shortcuts to many key design tools. No data will be lost. Select Layout from the Design View context menu to access the Layout sub-menu. Fit Page: Automatically adjusts the zoom to fit inside the Design View window.5” and 20” viewable area. Use these options to control the zoom factor on the selected page or popup page. align. click the Zoom Out and Zoom In toolbar buttons to adjust the display size of the selected object. these page tabs are referred to as "MDI tabs". Right mouse click anywhere within a Design View window to open the Design View context menu. TPDesign4 (v2. Design View Window tab controls Each panel page that you open is shown in its own Design View window for editing. containing options for layout/design control (send to front/back. 4 Zoom toolbar The following Zoom Controls are available via the Zoom toolbar: Full Page: Automatically adjusts the zoom to show the entire page at 100% size. containing options that allow you to select which state of a selected button to display in the Design View. only the most recently opened 15 pages will remain open (the others will be automatically closed). the tabs automatically disappear. This menu is identical to the Layout menu. Actual Size: Automatically adjusts the zoom to represent how large a page will appear when actually displayed on the target panel type. as opposed to the monitor’s overall diagonal size. TPD4 displays up to a maximum of 10 page tabs. center. If you open more than 10 pages. Right-click inside any of the page tabs to access the MDI Page tabs context menu. Right mouse click anywhere within a Design View window to open the Design View context menu.11 or higher) 11 . FIG. To use this option. The monitor size should represent the diagonal measurement of the visible portion of the monitor or of the space occupied by a full-screen image. Select Display from the Design View context menu to access the Display sub-menu. For example. Use these tabs to easily flip from page to page. etc). This context menu contains shortcuts to many key design tools. most 21” monitors typically have between a 19. once you have several pages open. you must first specify the monitor’s visible size (in the Monitor Size field of the Appearance tab of the Preferences dialog).

The TPDesign4 Work Area Zoom Control Drop-down: Click the down-arrow to open the Zoom control options list. 200% or 400%). Magnifier Window The Magnifier window allows you to magnify a given area of a design view for temporary viewing in a separate floating window.400% (in 1-percent increments). The Workspace Window contains two tabs: Pages and Function Maps (FIG. without zooming the entire design view. 50%. Fit Height: Automatically adjusts the zoom to accommodate the height of the selected object inside the Design View window. 6): FIG. For Width or Fit Height. This floating window is resizable and dockable. where you can select a zoom factor from 2 to 8 times actual size. 6 Workspace window 12 TPDesign4 (v2. 75%. Select View > Magnifier Window (or click the toolbar button) to access the Magnifier Window. 5 Magnifier Window toolbar button (View toolbar) Right-click inside the Magnifier window to access the Magnify Control context menu. 150%.11 or higher) . and to view/edit the function codes associated with each page. or by Fit Page. Workspace Window The Workspace Window is used to open the pages / popup pages in the file (establishing edit focus). Additional Zoom options are available via the Window > Zoom submenu: Fit Width: Automatically adjusts the zoom to accommodate the width of the selected object inside the Design View window. FIG. where you can specify any zoom percentage within the range of 25 . 100%. Use this list to manually set the zoom to by incremental percentages (25%. Custom: Opens the Custom Window Zoom dialog.

or double-click on the folders to view the pages and popup pages they contain. 7 Workspace Navigator . TPDesign4 (v2. Each open Project is represented by a folder.Pages Tab Note that each Project folder contains two folders: Pages and Popup Pages.11 or higher) 13 . 7): FIG. in the Workspace Navigator. Popup Pages can belong to only one group at a time. These folders represent Popup Page Groups. Right-click anywhere within the Pages tab to access the Workspace Navigator context menu. and of course they can live outside of any group at the same level as the group folders (see Popup Pages for additional information). Inside the Popup Page folder you may also see additional folders. In the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator you will see that there are two panel level folders.The TPDesign4 Work Area Workspace Navigator . each one with a different colored panel icon (FIG. one for Pages and one for Popup Pages. Click the + symbol next to the folders. Use the Workspace Navigator to view/open and rename panel pages.Pages Tab Click the Pages tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the pages/popup pages contained within each open Project. and the presence of a Popup Page in one of these folders indicates that the particular Popup Page belongs to that group.

11 or higher) . Programming and States: 14 TPDesign4 (v2. Properties Window The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page. Click the down arrow next to this field to view a list of all buttons on the active page. 8).Function Maps Tab Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Window) to view the Function Code Map. Address codes. Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties window. displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Window (FIG. and the button type is general. the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates the number of buttons selected. 8 Workspace Window. FIG. the selected button is named "pause".Function Maps Tab This list is sorted by Port. String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file. and the Properties window reflects the properties of the newly selected button. If one or more buttons are selected in the Workspace. Note that the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates which element of the workspace is currently selected. popup page and button properties. and within Port by Code.The TPDesign4 Work Area Workspace Window. Level codes. Also note that the button name and type are displayed in the text box above the tabs (in the example below. Selecting a button from this list is the same as selecting it in a Design View window: the edit focus shifts to the selected button. The Properties Window contains three tabs: General. and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project. The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes.

9). General buttons). When you release the mouse button. and drag it to another field.The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Control . the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. FIG.General Tab Click the General tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to set/edit general properties for all button types (FIG. The General tab contains a table that lists the button properties for the selected button type (in this case. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself).11 or higher) 15 . 9 Properties Control . or both. With an item selected.General Tab To edit any of the listed button properties. TPDesign4 (v2. you can either set the item manually. Depending on the item selected. and the original value is left unchanged. select from a drop-down menu. General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. click on an item in the right column to activate that field for editing. the value is copied to the new location. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. or the Page itself). Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field.

TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. or both. the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. or the Page itself). With an item selected. similar to the General tab.Programming Tab Click the Programming tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit programming-related information for the selected button (FIG. and drag it to another field. the value is copied to the new location. you can either set the item manually. select from a drop-down menu. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. When you release the mouse button. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Control . 10). Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. 10 Properties Control . and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. This information is displayed in a table format. General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself).11 or higher) . 16 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. Depending on the item selected. and the original value is left unchanged.Programming Tab To edit any of the listed button properties.

FIG. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.11 or higher) 17 .States Tab To edit any of the listed button properties. and the original value is left unchanged. The State tab contains a table that lists the properties for each state for the selected button. select from a drop-down menu. This information is displayed in a table format. the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog.The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Control . 11 Properties Control . All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). or both. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. and drag it to another field. With an item selected. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself).States Tab Click the States tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit the state information for each state associated with the selected button (FIG. General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. the value is copied to the new location. TPDesign4 (v2. or the Page itself). meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0. and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. similar to the General tab. you can either set the item manually. 0. When you release the mouse button. Depending on the item selected. 11).

The TPDesign4 Work Area Using the Apply To All option The Apply To All toggle button is located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (FIG. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. but not on multiple states for a single button. All modifications are always on the button with the edit focus. you will see a message that states that the value was only applied to those buttons for which it was valid. select the states that you want to edit and they will appear listed in the States tab of the Properties Control window. Hold down the Shift key and click to select multiple buttons. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. the Prev or Next buttons will activate on the Properties Control window. To make changes that affect all states on a button at once. To make state-oriented changes across multiple states. FIG. and you select more than one button to act on.11 or higher) . This Apply To All button works on multiple button selections. 12). Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. All modifications are always done on the button with the edit focus. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (next to the Apply to All button) are activated only when more than one button is selected on a page. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. Using the Prev and Next buttons The Prev and Next buttons. You may also notice that one or more (if not all) of the property values in the grid are blank. Typing in or changing a value in any property box will immediately affect all selected buttons. When you have multiple buttons selected. 12 Apply To All toggle button If the Apply To All button is not depressed. the Prev or Next buttons are unavailable and every selected button has the edit focus. provided that the change can be applied to them all. In the event that a value is appropriate for one (or more) buttons but inappropriate for others. Use the Apply to All option to set button properties to edit multiple buttons simultaneously. These buttons allow you to quickly edit the selected buttons individually. If the Apply To All button is depressed and you select more than one button to act on. Also note that while you have multiple buttons selected. and the Apply To All button is not depressed (in its active state). use the All States option in the States tab (located directly above the other listed states for the selected button). 18 TPDesign4 (v2. The only values that will display in the grid while the Apply To All button is depressed are those values that are common among all selected items.

the states will be displayed in reverse order. some visual distortion may occur.The TPDesign4 Work Area State Manager window The State Manager is typically located along the bottom edge of the screen (although it is a dockable window and you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit the various states of a selected button (FIG. Anything outside of that range will not be represented by a state. Note that because the thumbnails displayed in the State Manager window are scaled versions of the button images. Insert. Popup page or button to view the state or states associated with it. For Multi-Bargraph buttons. The State Manager window allows the viewing and modification of individual states. which includes options to add single or multiple states. For buttons with multiple states. and supports full Cut. TPDesign4 (v2. which includes options to Add single or multiple states. To display the State Manager window. FIG. When the button is turned back off. The interstate time intervals are user definable in 1/10th second increments. Right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to open the State Manager context menu. the different states (up to 256) are used to animate a button from Off to On (Range Time Up in the States tab). Insert single or multiple states and Remove states. Replace and Paste as well as drag and drop capabilities. and does not represent distortion on the button itself. 13 State Manager window The State Manager interacts with the Properties Control window to allow the visual aspects of a page. The user will be able to set an allowable range within a bargraph that has states. insert single or multiple states. Use Ctrl+A to select all button states. in the Properties Control window (States tab). A zero entry will automatically advance / retreat to the ending / beginning state without displaying any intervening states. Replace states. select View > State Manager. and remove states. Each state of the selected button is displayed as a thumbnail image in this window. Use Ctrl+click to select multiple individual button states. Right mouse click on any thumbnail to open the State Manager context menu. and back again to Off (Range Time Down in the States tab). This is only a result of the scaling. the level will directly reflect the displayed state. Copy. For Multi-General buttons. 13). Use Shift+click to select a range of states (between two selections). replace states. When the button is turned on it will display all the assigned states from first to last with a specified time interval between each state's display. Delete.11 or higher) 19 . popup page or button to be set. Select a Page. Double-click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to view/edit the properties for the selected state. Send Commands can set the state number provided it is not a level type button.

A right mouse button drag-and-drop between states. A right mouse button drag-and-drop over a state presents a drag-and-drop menu with options to "Copy over…". Note that this context menu is identical to the Transfer Menu. A left mouse button drag-and-drop between states. and the overall status of the transfer. Project . Transfer Status Window The Send To Panel and Receive From Panel dialogs place the requested transfer into a queue. "Move…". "Insert copy…". Device . accessible through the main menu bar: 20 TPDesign4 (v2. or "Cancel". For all other button types: A left or right mouse button drag-and-drop over a state will execute a replace operation.The TPDesign4 Work Area State Manager Drag-and-Drop Menu To access the State Manager Drag-and-Drop menu. 14). or "Cancel". Right mouse click anywhere in the Transfer Status Window to open the Transfer Status context menu. or after the last state will present a drag-and-drop menu with options to "Insert copy…". prior to the first state. unless all states have been selected. prior to the first state. containing options for establishing a connection to the NetLinx Master and panels. 14 Transfer Status Window This window displays the following data for each transfer: Status . and for transferring TP4 files to the panels. FIG.The status bars indicate the progress of each file in the transfer. and hold the mouse button down while dragging the selected state to another location in the State Manager window. prior to the first state. select a button state (thumbnail view). which may be docked/undocked from the main application window (FIG. or after the last state executes a move operation.11 or higher) .This column indicates the name of the Project to which the files belong. or after the last state is disallowed. The contents of the Drag-and-Drop menu change depending on the type of button selected: For Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph Buttons: A left mouse button drag-and-drop over a state executes a replace operation. A left or right mouse button drag-and-drop between states. the status of which is displayed in the Transfer Status window.This column gives the Device # and a description of the target/source device. "Move…".

secondary view Cursor: Displays the current X-Y cursor position. 15 Status Bar . The default view. In the secondary view. it shows the current Cursor position. 16): FIG. Size. In the default view. FbBk: Displays the type of feedback associated with the button that the cursor is over.connection status TPDesign4 (v2. 16 Status Bar . Size: Displays the size of the button that the cursor is over. and (for the button the mouse is over): Location.11 or higher) 21 . Loc: Displays the X-Y location of the button that the cursor is over (relative to the upper-left corner of the button). Ch: Displays the Channel code (port number:channel code) associated with the button that the cursor is over. it shows the current Cursor position. and (for the button the mouse is over): Channel code. Address code and Level code (FIG. 15): FIG. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0. 0. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). The Status Bar also indicates connection status as follows (FIG. 17): not connected connected to an unsecured master connected to a secured but unencrypted master connected to a secured and encrypted master FIG. and the secondary view which is available via a double-click anywhere inside the status bar. Double-click anywhere on the status bar to view this secondary position. 17 Status Bar .default view Cursor: Displays the current X-Y cursor position. and Feedback (FIG. Lvl: Displays the Level code (port number:level code) associated with the button that the cursor is over.The TPDesign4 Work Area Status Bar There are two views available for the status bar (located along the bottom edge of the application window). Add: Displays the Address code (port number:address code) associated with the button that the cursor is over.

Disable Mute Push FIG. Button Preview is not available for Joystick or Listbox Buttons. Right-click inside the preview area of the Button Preview window to access the Button Preview context menu. 18 Button Preview window The Button Preview window displays a preview of the selected button. Like the other windows in TPD4. This window includes three command buttons: Click the Disable button to disable the button preview. Double-click inside the title bar to dock the window. Click the Push button to simulate a push on the selected button. but not close the Button Preview window.The TPDesign4 Work Area Button Preview Window Select View > Button Preview to open the Button Preview window (FIG. 22 TPDesign4 (v2. 18). but initially it opens undocked. Click again to enable the preview.11 or higher) . the Button Preview window is fully dockable. Click to Mute any sounds associated with this button. Initially the button is shown in its Off state. Click on the button in the Button Preview window to "push" the button in an identical fashion to utilizing the Push command button. This allows you to visually preview the On/Off states (and all states in between. for multi-state buttons).

or along the edges of other docked windows. Docking and Resizing Dockable Windows To move the windows. The printed output maintains a constant scaling factor across all pages.Displays the previous page of the selected file One Page/Two Page . This option is enabled only if the active file is longer than one page. Zoom In .Zooms in on the page view Zoom Out .11 or higher) 23 .Closes the Print Preview window If you don't have a printer installed on your PC. Properties Control. bottom. drag the window to reposition it next to any border or window frame and the window will automatically snap to the nearest border. double-click inside the window's title bar.Displays the next page of the selected file Prev Page . To stretch the windows. State Manager and Button Preview windows) can be toggled on/off via the options in the View menu.Prints the current page view Next Page . They automatically snap to the top. To dock these windows. as they will appear when printed.The TPDesign4 Work Area Print Preview Window Select File > Print Preview to display a preview of the pages and popup pages in the active project. Each page and popup page in the project is printed one per page. Select or de-select each window to toggle by checking or un-checking the window listings in this menu (checked = window is on/ displayed). the File > Print and File > Print Preview options invoke a message alerting you to install a printer. right or left side of the application window. Dockable windows can be re-arranged within the application window. click on the title bar and drag and drop the window into place. Dockable windows automatically snap into place once they are positioned near an available docking area (along the edges of the application window. The options in the Print Preview window toolbar include: Print . click on any border and drag the border either vertically or horizontally.Toggles the page view to one or two pages. click on the bottom-left corner of the window border in the area shaded with parallel diagonal lines and drag the corner in any direction. Toggling the Windows Each of the dockable windows (Design View. To dock/undock a window. The dockable windows in TPD4 are: Design View Properties Control Workspace Navigator State Manager Transfer Status Window Button Preview Magnifier Window Moving. Workspace Navigator. or along the edge of another dockable window. To resize the windows. TPDesign4 (v2.Zooms out from the page view Close . with the image centered on the printed page. Working With Dockable Windows All windows in TPD4 are fully dockable.

The TPDesign4 Work Area 24 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

and has the edit focus. If you choose not to populate one or more of these fields. where you can select the colors for the Page Background and Page Text. Designer: Enter the name of the project designer in this field. If the Use System Generated File Names option (in the Step 1 dialog) is not selected. PurchaseOrder: Enter the Purchase Order number in this field. To cancel the wizard at any point in the process. from a list of all available fonts on your PC. The initial page is listed under the Pages folder. The New Project Wizard is by its nature self-explanatory and intuitive. JobComments: Enter any project-related comments in this field. Job Name: Enter a name for the new project. Use the New Project Wizard as a shortcut to starting new TPD4 projects. complete with a start page. If you close the wizard after step 1. 2. note that the new project appears in the Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab). TPDesign4 (v2. 3.Using the New Project Wizard Using the New Project Wizard Overview The New Project Wizard steps you through the process of creating a new Project file (also known as a Panel file). select File > New. Resolution: Click the down-arrow to select the target resolution for the project. Name: Enter a name for the page.Step 2) contains fields for System-Generated File Names.Step 1) contains fields to allow you set up the basics of your new project. and consists of up to three dialogs: 1. Fill out this information and click Next to proceed. Click Finish to close the wizard.. FontSize: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font size. The next dialog in the wizard (New Project Wizard . You can change the target panel type for any existing panel file via the File > Save as Different Panel Type option.) to open the Colors dialog.11 or higher) 25 . Every project created will have at least one page.Final Step) contains fields for setting up the initial touch panel page in the project. Fill out this information and click Finish to exit the New Project Wizard. Colors (Page background and Text): Click the browse button (. DealerID: Enter the Dealer ID in this field. click Cancel.. they will not be included in the System Generated File Name. The first dialog to appear (New Project Wizard . Panel Type: Click the down-arrow to view a list of supported panel types. this dialog is skipped since the information entered here would not apply. To launch the New Project Wizard. SalesOrder: Enter the Sales Order number in this field. Use System Generated File Name: Click this checkbox to use a System Generated File Name for this project. FileRevision: Enter the Revision in this field. you will have created a project with a single page. Fill out this information and click Next to proceed. Font: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font. The last dialog in the wizard (New Project Wizard . You can add pages manually via the Panel > Add Page command. When you finish the New Project Wizard.

Step 1 dialog The options in this dialog include: Job Name: Enter a name for the new project.11 or higher) . To cancel the wizard at any point in the process. To launch the New Project Wizard. the extension is provided with the associated resolution (not all resolutions require an extension).Step One dialog 2. Select the desired external button layout from the drop-down list (MIO R-4 only).Step Two dialog 3. use the Save As Different Panel Type option (File Menu) 26 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. New Project Wizard . This invokes the first of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG.Step 1 dialog To launch the New Project Wizard (to create a new TPD4 Project). New Project Wizard . 19). Use System Generated File Name: Click this checkbox to use a System Generated File Name for this project. click Cancel. The External Button Options and Panel Resolution selections cannot be modified once the panel project has been created. click the down-arrow to select a target resolution for the project. If the selected panel type supports resolution extensions (VESA. complete with a start page.Using the New Project Wizard New Project Wizard dialogs The New Project Wizard steps you through the process of creating a new Project file (also known as a Panel file). The External Button Option selected here is represented in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog. Resolution: If the Panel Type selected supports multiple screen resolutions (such as the TPIs and NXV-300). The New Project Wizard consists of up to three dialogs: 1. select File > New. External Button Options: MIO-R4 remotes support multiple external button options. 19 New Project Wizard . CEA etc. to support transport and Teletext keypads. To change either of these. Use the New Project Wizard as a shortcut to starting new TPD4 projects.Final Step dialog New Project Wizard . Panel Type: Click the down-arrow to view a list of supported panel types.). select File > New. New Project Wizard .

Step 2 dialog If the "Use System Generated File Names" option (in the Step 1 dialog) is not selected. FIG. The options in this dialog include: Designer: Enter the name of the project designer in this field. 20 New Project Wizard . Dealer ID: Enter the Dealer ID in this field.Step Two dialog Select Next in the New Project Wizard . TPDesign4 (v2. 20). File Revision: Enter the File Revision identifier in this field. Sales Order: Enter the Sales Order number in this field.Step One dialog to access the second of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG.Using the New Project Wizard New Project Wizard . Purchase Order: Enter the Purchase Order number in this field. they will not be included in the System Generated File Name. Job Comments: Enter any project-related comments in this field. this dialog is skipped since the information entered here would not apply.11 or higher) 27 . If you choose not to populate one or more of these fields.

) to open the Colors dialog. Font Size: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font size. from a list of all available fonts on your PC.11 or higher) . 28 TPDesign4 (v2.Step Two dialog to access the third of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG. Colors (Page background and Text): Click the browse button (. 21). Font: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font..Final Step dialog The options in this dialog allow you to set up the initial touch panel page in the project: Name: Enter a name for the page.Final Step dialog Select Next in the New Project Wizard . 21 New Project Wizard . where you can select the colors for the Page Background and Page Text..Using the New Project Wizard New Project Wizard . FIG.

select File > New. if the selected panel type features external pushbuttons).TPD4 Project Files (*. TPD4 will automatically truncate the name to 59 characters.TP4) TPD4 Project Files (*. Each page / popup page name must be unique within their respective panel files in order to be accepted by the program. the project is created with one generic page. Inappropriate File Name Characters Avoid using the following characters when naming TPD4 project files: Inappropriate File Name Characters • Vertical Bar • Question Mark • Asterisk • Less Than Sign • Greater Than Sign • Forward Slash • Back Slash • Double Quotes • Colon • Period | ? * < > / \ " : . unless you explicitly choose to save them in another location. or click the toolbar button. At this point. The New Project Wizard is designed to be simple and intuitive. To launch the New Project Wizard. Simply fill in the fields in each New Project Wizard dialog. All name collision checks in the program are case insensitive. If you try to save with a longer name. When creating a new Project file.11 or higher) 29 . avoid using inappropriate file name characters. and all image and sound-related files that are used in the design. to quickly guide you through the process of setting up a new project. TPD4 has a limit of 59 characters for the project name/filename. Click the Finish button in the last dialog in the wizard to close the wizard. Refer to the Using the New Project Wizard section on page 25 for details. buttons including function code information. popup pages and buttons (including External Controls. TPDesign4 (v2. Project Files contain all of the information required to define the user-interface that is displayed on the touch panel. Creating a New Project TPD4 includes a New Project Wizard.TP4) Overview TP4 Project (or Panel) files are created in the folder specified in the application preferences. and is ready for you to start adding pages. and click Next to proceed to the next dialog. including pages and popup pages and associated navigation/page-flip information.

11 or higher) . and Revision). they are simply omitted from the file name. Purchase Order.5678-9876. Dealer ID. All information entered in this dialog can be viewed/edited at any time via the Panel Properties dialog. if all fields are filled in as shown in FIG. 30 TPDesign4 (v2. Sales Order. FIG.rev a. 22 New Project Wizard . For example. If you leave any of the fields blank.My TP Project.TP4" The Purchase Order field and the (optional) Job comments field are not incorporated into the generated filename. 22. Use these fields to enter this additional information for this project.TP4) System-Generated Project File Names When you are creating a new Project. If you select not to use System-Generated File Names. you are given the option to use System Generated File Names (in the New Project Wizard dialog). System-generated file names are generated automatically based on several fields that hold various types of project information (Designer.Step 2 dialog (System-Generated File Names) The resulting file name would be: "1234.TPD4 Project Files (*. These fields are all optional. the file name will match the Job Name entered in the first dialog of the New Project Wizard. the resulting filename for this project file consists of each of these entries separated by commas.Super-Dave Osborne. When you utilize System-Generated File Names.

For pages and popup pages.these errors are indicated by a TPD4 error dialog. any time you select a button in the Design View. edit focus is indicated in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) by a small arrow at the lower-left corner of the icon for the selected page or popup page. edit focus is indicated in the Design View window with small red squares (with yellow outlines) on the edges of the selected button. You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry). since it is not a valid Address Port number . The Quick Input setting determines how typing directly into a Design View or into the State Manager will be handled: Current Property .TPD4 Project Files (*. Quick Input Select Quick Input from the Edit menu or Design View context menu to access the Quick Input sub-menu. 23 shows that "Page 1" has the edit focus.11 or higher) 31 . Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element which has the current edit focus.This setting redirects keyboard input to the currently selected property on the currently visible tab of the Properties Window (assuming one is selected). For example.TP4) Edit Focus The page. FIG. and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window). or button(s) that are the target for change actions are said to have the Edit Focus. you can just type and press the Enter key to enter a new button name for the selected button. 24 Button Edit Focus as Indicated In the Design View windows Buttons that do not currently have edit focus are displayed with selection handles that are black squares (with white outlines). and you perform a "Copy". 23 Page Edit Focus as Indicated In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) For buttons. If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties window. if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port". "Page 2" has current Edit Focus FIG. then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window. For example. if you select the Name property (in the General tab of the Properties control window). The Cut. Button has Edit Focus Button does not currently have Edit Focus FIG. you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field. This means the last thing selected (not necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows) has the edit focus. TPDesign4 (v2. popup page.

Text . Once a panel file is closed. Disabled . For instance. bitmaps.11 or higher) . You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry). has the edit focus. Selecting either option will immediately undo/redo the last action. These actions are independent of any file saves. Popup Page or Button section on page 205. This means that each panel file that is open in the program maintains a separate undo/redo stack and manages this for the user. The Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element (including buttons. Undo/Redo TPD4 supports full Undo / Redo functionality at the panel level. Copying/Pasting Pages . and you perform a "Copy".see the Copying/Pasting States From a Page. text is will be applied to all states of the button selected in the Design View. Click to select one or more actions to be undone/redone. The commands alter their text dynamically to indicate which action is next in the undo/redo list.see the Copying/Pasting Pages section on page 81 Copying/Pasting Popup Pages . If no states are selected. copied or pasted in TPD4. For example. even individual button properties displayed in the Properties Control window) which has the current Edit Focus.TPD4 Project Files (*. The following actions may be undone/redone: Button Property Changes Page / Popup Page Renames Button Deletions / Cuts Button Creations / Pastes Page / Popup Page Deletions / Cuts Page / Popup Page Creations / Pastes State Deletions / Cuts State Creations / Pastes Copying/Cutting/Pasting images and sounds Cutting. and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window). which is not always necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows. You may either click the Undo or Redo toolbar icons. if you select several states on a Multi-State button (in the State Manager window).This setting redirects keyboard input to the button Text property for all selected button states (in the States tab of the Properties Control window).Disables the Quick Input option. The ability to utilize these features effectively can greatly increase your productivity. This means the last thing selected.see the Copying/Pasting Popup Pages section on page 94 Copying/Pasting Buttons .see the Copying/Pasting Buttons section on page 110 Copying/Pasting States . therefore you may undo past a save if you so desire. Click the down-arrows to view a history list that lists up to 25 of the most recent actions. you can type and press the Enter key to enter new button text for the selected states. then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window. 32 TPDesign4 (v2.TP4) The result of the keystroke will depend on the property selected. or click Edit > Undo or Edit > Redo. Copying and Pasting There are several items that can be cut. it's undo/redo stack is flushed and is no longer available. if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port".

TP4) If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties Control window. or left-click on the background of the page or popup page. either select another button. then individually select each desired button. When using the Selection Tool. since it is not a valid Address Port number (these errors are indicated by an error dialog). you can assign a "video fill" to a page. 4. as opposed to clicking on the item. you may only act on the selected buttons on one page / popup page at a time. hold down the ALT key while clicking and dragging in a Design View window to move the current selections without selecting anything new on the mouse press (useful for moving popup pages whose entire area is filled with buttons). and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill. To de-select a button. 2. or select Edit > Select All from the main menu. In the Properties Control window. 25). hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting). You may perform a marquis selection by holding down the left mouse button outside the boundaries of the desired buttons and drawing a selection box around the desired buttons. Using the Selection Tool To activate the Selection tool.11 or higher) 33 . you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field. or click the toolbar button in the Selection/Button Draw Toolbar (FIG. you may turn the Apply To All toggle button (located at the bottom of the Properties Control window) On. hold down the CTRL key while clicking and dragging to force a "lasso" selection to occur (even if the mouse was clicked over a button or Popup Page shown on the Page). FIG. To select all available buttons on a page or popup page you may either use the Ctrl+A hotkey. See the Supported Panel Types section on page 2 for details. With an item selected in a Design View window. Although you may select and retain the selection of buttons on multiple pages.TPD4 Project Files (*. Lasso selection forces you to draw a square around the outside of the item to select it. Working With Video Fills If you are designing a project targeted at a video-capable panel. Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size. 3. using any of the following techniques: 1. TPI-PRO and TPI-PRO-DVI accommodates up to four video source inputs. TPDesign4 (v2. popup page or button. The NXP-TPI/4. 25 Selection Tool Use the Selection tool to pick/select objects in the Design View window(s). Left click on the remaining desired buttons while simultaneously depressing the Shift key on your keyboard. You can also select multiple buttons. select Edit > Selection Tool. When using the Selection Tool.

Using G4 PanelPreview To preview your panel project. Purchase Order.TP4) Drag and Drop Support Project Files: Drag and drop TPD4 project files (*. Sales Order. and must be installed in order to activate this menu option. File Name.11 or higher) . Last save date. Setting Project Properties Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. Designer.amx. Dragging a Popup Page onto another Popup Page is not supported.com. Popup Pages: Popup Pages can be dragged from the Pages tab and dropped on a Design View as an alternate method of displaying the Popup Page on the full sized Page. to open the file via the TPD Conversion Wizard. Revision. Refer to the G4 PanelPreview online help file for details. the Use system generated filenames option and Protection options with Password fields. Depending upon the panel selected. This is a multi-tab dialog allowing you to view and edit the target touch panel's properties. Revision Date. select Panel > Send To G4 PanelPreview (or click the toolbar button) to launch the G4 PanelPreview application. IR Emitters and Receivers tab: Includes Channel Port information for AMX IR Emitters. Motion Sensors. Marquee Speed. (including multi-state and bar graph buttons) via the mouse and keyboard on your PC. where you can preview the project and simulate push and release of buttons. Battery Levels and Cradle Sensors. Created with Build Number.TP4) from a Windows Explorer window onto the TPD4 workspace to open the project. Power-up and Inactivity Settings and Feedback Blink Rate.TPD) project files into the workspace. Job Comments. Panel Strings (Startup.TPD4 Project Files (*. You can also drag and drop TPDesign3 (*. Wakeup and Sleep). Creation Date. AMX IR Receivers and User (non-AMX) IR Emitters. The G4 PanelPreview application is available from www. 34 TPDesign4 (v2. Panel Setup Information tab: Includes touch panel setup options including Refresh Frequency. Dealer ID. each panel will support all or part of the following properties at the panel level: Project Information tab: Includes basic project information such as Job Name. Sensors tab: Includes Channel/Level and Port settings for Light Sensors.

26).Project Information tab Use the options in the Project Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit project information associated with the active project/panel file (FIG. and the build number of the TPD4 used to create this project. Purchase Order . these fields will be blank. File Revision . Modified .Project Information tab The information in this tab was set up when the project was created. TPDesign4 (v2. The options in this tab include: Job Name . 26 Project Properties dialog .This editable field displays the current Purchase Order (identifier) associated with this project.This editable field displays the current Job Name associated with this project.TP4) Project Properties dialog .11 or higher) 35 . Sales Order . If the Use System-Generated File Names option was not selected. Dealer ID . in the New Project Wizard.This editable field displays the current Sales Order (identifier) associated with this project. Created .This editable field displays the current Dealer ID (identifier) associated with this project.This editable field displays the current Designer associated with this project. Designer ID .This read-only field displays the creation date for this project.This read-only field displays the last date on which this project was saved (and the build number of the TPD4 used to create this project). FIG. These items represent the various components of the System-Generated File Name.This editable field displays the current Revision (identifier) associated with this project.TPD4 Project Files (*.

the next time the panel file is selected to open. Password . Protection .TP4) Revision Date .Use this text field to confirm the password by re-typing the password exactly as it was entered in the Password field.TPD4 Project Files (*. a "Passwords do not match" message box is displayed.this is the default setting (no password protection). Job Comments . Use System Generated File Names for This Project . File Name .259 characters) to use if the file is set as either read-only or locked. the Enter Access Password dialog appears. To simply view the file (as read-only).This editable field displays any comments that were added in the New Project Wizard. click on the Read-Only command button (in the Enter Access Password dialog). 36 TPDesign4 (v2.This read-only field displays the full path and disc filename of the project. prompting the user to enter the correct password in order to gain write access to the file. this information will be added on the next save. locked .11 or higher) .Use this text field to enter the password (1 . the Enter Access Password dialog appears.This read-only field displays the date of the current revision of this project. and are only relevant within the context of the TPD4 application. Also. and no edits are allowed. Once the password has been typed. files opened as read-only cannot be saved to another file name.the next time this panel file is opened. read-only . Confirm . the word "[Locked]" appears immediately to the right of the project name in the Workspace Navigator. it must be re-typed in the Confirm text field. If the file opened in read-only mode. If system-generated file names were not used for the project.Click the down-arrow to select one of three levels of password protection for this project file: none .Click this option to apply system-generated filenames to this project. If the project was originally set up to use system-generated file names. then selecting this option will replace the original information with the updated information from this dialog. prompting the user to enter the correct password to open the file. These protection options are not Windows file attributes. If the passwords don't match.

Panel Setup Information tab This dialog identifies the panel for which this project is designed. Wakeup and Sleep). In the case of MIO R-4 remotes. the panel will send this string to the NetLinx Master on wakeup. Power Up/Inactivity Settings Power up page . 27). then the master will pass the strings from the device. 27 Project Properties dialog .Use these three fields to specify text strings to appear on the panel. In order to receive strings from a device.Click the down-arrow to view a drop-down list of all pages currently saved in this project.Panel Setup Information tab Use the options in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit setup information associated with the active project/panel file (FIG.Sets the speed of motion for Marquee text. the External Button Option selected is indicated as well. Panel Strings . Click to select the initial startup page for the panel. if you entered "Hello!" for the Wakeup string. The options in this tab include: Refresh Frequency . the programmer typically creates a buffer or adds a DATA_EVENT/STRING: handler for the device. Marquee Speed .Select the desired refresh frequency for the selected panel. and indicates it's screen resolution. TPDesign4 (v2. This will cause an RXON command to be sent to the device. during these three conditions (Startup.11 or higher) 37 . from the dropdown list of supported refresh frequencies (based on the selected panel/resolution). For example.TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4) Project Properties dialog . FIG.

TP4) Power up popups . When this option is selected.Sensors tab 38 TPDesign4 (v2. in 1/10th-second increments (default = 5). Project Properties dialog . use this field to specify the blink frequency. Inactivity page .The use of dynamic list tables with channel codes may require the designer to specify the ports and/or channels to be allocated on the panel. if the ports/channels utilized in the dynamic table(s) will exceed those declared in the project.select to have TPDesign4 calculate the maximum channels required (default setting). 28 Project Properties dialog .select to supply a specific channel number to be allocated to dynamic list tables. Feedback blink rate (10th of second) .select to supply a specific port number to be allocated to dynamic list tables.11 or higher) .select to have TPDesign4 calculate the maximum ports required (default setting). Battery Levels and Cradle Sensors associated with the active panel file (FIG. a text field is provided for you to manually enter the port number to be allocated.If you are using blinking button feedback in your project. These options include: Automatically calculate port allocation . Specify channel allocation .This field indicates the Power-Up popup pages that will appear over the Power up page. When this option is selected. Specify port allocation . Automatically calculate channel allocation . Device Port/Channel Allocation . Motion Sensors.Sensors tab Use the options in the Sensors tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit Channel/Level and Port settings for Light Sensors. a text field is provided for you to manually enter the channel number. 28): FIG.Click the down arrow to select which page to flip to after the specified period of inactivity (set on the touch panel).TPD4 Project Files (*.

Motion Sensor . Battery Levels .Use these fields to set the Channel port/code assignments for the Cradle Sensor on MVP panels. FIG.TPD4 Project Files (*. Cradle Sensor (MVP panels only) . and up to two user-defined ports for IR emitting using custom IR files (FIG.Use these fields to specify the Channel port/code assignments for the on-board motion sensor. 29). AMX 455KHz IR emitting and receiving. TPDesign4 (v2.IR Emitters and Receivers tab Use the options in the IR Emitters and Receivers tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit port information associated with the active panel file for AMX 38KHz IR emitting and receiving. and the MVP-7500/8400 and MVP-8400i have AMX and User-defined IR emitters as well as a cradle sensor (see below). Project Properties dialog .TP4) Light Sensor . 29 Project Properties dialog .Use these fields to specify the Level and Channel port/code assignments for the onboard light sensor.11 or higher) 39 .IR Emitters and Receivers tab The NXD/T-CV7 have AMX IR receivers.Use these fields to specify the Level port/code assignments for the on-board battery charger. The channel will be turned on when the panel is docked (either in the tabletop docking station or in the wall cradle).

FIG. Applying changes made to the grid control will set the project's "dirty" flag.TP4) The options in this tab include: AMX IR Emitters (MVPs only) . Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog .These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for user-defined IR emitting for MVP-7500 and MVP-8400 panels.These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for standard AMX IR emitting for MVP-7500 and MVP-8400 panels. Click the down-arrow next to Protection to select a level of password protection from the drop-down list (either read-only. The password is not required to open and view the file. 30 Project Properties dialog .11 or higher) .see FIG.) 3. the Enter Access Password dialog appears. locked or none . the Enter Access Password dialog appears. As with the original two user IR ports.the next time this Project file is opened. To apply password protection to the open Project file: 1. These protection options are not Windows file attributes. AMX IR Receivers (CV7 and CV10s only) . Enter the password in the Password text field. Values in the Port column cannot be edited. Note that if a read-only file is opened without using the password. or re-confirm the password. The User IR Emitters table displays a grid of user IR ports and their respective values in two columns.Project Information tab. 2. The default value for each port is zero (not used). Additional User IR Emitters (MVP-5220 & MVP-5200i) .the next time the panel file is selected to open. 30). and are only relevant within the context of the TPD4 application. in which case you'll need to re-enter the password. Locked . all port values entered will be validated against other existing IR emitter or receiver port values to ensure that all non-zero IR port values are unique. Applying Password Protection to Your Project File TPD4 supports two levels of password protection for Project (. a "Passwords do not match" message box is displayed. 5.These options allow you to use up to 8 IR Emitters with the panel. The edit field will only accept integer values ranging from zero to 100 (consistent with other port values).These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for AMX IR receiving for NXD/T-CV7 and NXD/TCV10 panels. the file will not be opened at all. prompting the user to enter the correct password to open the file. it cannot be saved under a new file name. If the password is not entered correctly.TP4) files: Read-only . 40 TPDesign4 (v2. Modifying values in the grid control will activate the Apply button as appropriate. Non-numeric values will be rejected and the value reset to zero. User IR Emitters (MVPs only) . If the passwords don't match. Click Apply to save the changes and apply the specified password to the Project file. Re-type the password in the Confirm field. or both.Password settings (Project Information tab. 4. prompting the user to enter the correct password in order to gain write access to the file. The value associated with each port can be modified in-place. Passwords can be from 1 to 259 characters in length.TPD4 Project Files (*.

TP4) Setting a Power Up Page Use the Power-up page option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify a particular page in your project to be displayed when the panel is turned on: 1. 2. 3. 31 Project Properties dialog . Select a popup page that you want to be displayed over the Power-up page from this list and click OK. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. 4. Select the page that you want to be used as the Power-up page from this list (FIG.11 or higher) 41 . 31). TPDesign4 (v2. 2. To display multiple popups over the Power up page. 32). FIG.TPD4 Project Files (*. FIG. click the green Plus sign icon below the Power up popups field to invoke the Add Power Up Popup dialog. In the Panel Setup Information tab. presenting a list of all popup pages in the active Project (FIG. repeat steps 2 and 3 to select another popup. you can specify the display order via the up/down arrow buttons below the Power up popups field. click the down arrow next to the Power up page field to display a list of all of the pages in this project.Power-up popups settings (Panel Setup Information tab) 3. 32 Project Properties dialog . If you select more than one popup page.Power-up page settings (IR Emitters and Receivers tab) Setting Power Up Popup Pages Use the Power-up popups option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify one or more popup pages in your project to be displayed over the Power up page when the panel is turned on: 1. In the Panel Setup Information tab. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. The popup at the top of the list is the first to be displayed. The selected popup page is indicated in the Power up popups field.

FIG. In the Panel Setup Information tab. 2. Click Apply to apply this change. Setting an Inactive Page Flip Use the Inactive Page Flip option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify a particular page in your project to be displayed when the panel is inactive for a specified period of time: 1.TP4) To remove a popup from the Power up popups list. Select the page that you want the panel to flip to when the panel is inactive for the amount of time specified on the panel. click the Remove Popup (X) button below the Power up popups field. click the down arrow next to the Inactivity Page field to display a list of all of the pages in this project (FIG. 42 TPDesign4 (v2. 5.Inactivity Page settings (Panel Setup Information tab) 3. You can use the Inactivity Page Flip option to create a "screen-saver" for the panel as part of your project.11 or higher) . 33). Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog.TPD4 Project Files (*. 33 Project Properties dialog .

These folders represent Popup Page Groups. Click the + symbol next to the folders. The Workspace Window contains two tabs: Pages and Function Maps (FIG. Use the Workspace Navigator to view/open and rename panel pages. and to view/edit the function codes associated with each page. 34): FIG. or double-click on the folders to view the pages and popup pages they contain. There are several actions that you can do simply by selecting an item in the tree and choosing the appropriate command or toolbar button: Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window Renaming Pages via the Workspace Window Drag and Drop Support TPDesign4 (v2.Pages Tab Click the Pages tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the pages/popup pages contained within each open Project. Popup Pages can belong to only one group at a time. one for Pages and one for Popup Pages. each one with a different colored panel icon: Note that each Project folder contains two folders: Pages and Popup Pages. Inside the Popup Page folder you may also see additional folders. in the Workspace Navigator. and of course they can live outside of any group at the same level as the group folders (see Popup Pages for additional information). Each open Project is represented by a folder. In the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator you will see that there are two panel level folders. Right-click anywhere within the Pages tab to access the Workspace Navigator context menu. and the presence of a Popup Page in one of these folders indicates that the particular Popup Page belongs to that group.all tabs Workspace Window .11 or higher) 43 .TP4) Using the Workspace Window The Workspace Window is used to open the pages / popup pages in the file (establishing edit focus). 34 Workspace Navigator .TPD4 Project Files (*.

displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Window. FIG. 35 Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window 44 TPDesign4 (v2. 35).Pages tab (FIG. Address codes.Function Maps Tab Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Window) to view the Function Code Map. The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes.TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4) Workspace Window. and within Port by Code. Level codes.11 or higher) . This list is sorted by Port. Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window You can open a page or popup page in the active Project by double-clicking on the Page or Popup Page in the Workspace Window . String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file.

the value is copied to the new location. and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. or both. 36). select from a drop-down menu. FIG. Properties Window . Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column.TP4) Using the Properties Window The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page. The Properties Window contains three tabs: General. and drag it to another field. popup page and button properties. or the Page itself). TPDesign4 (v2. When you release the mouse button. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). you can either set the item manually.General Tab Click the General tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to set/edit general properties for all button types. The General tab contains a table that lists the button properties for the selected button type .TPD4 Project Files (*. and the original value is left unchanged. Programming and States (FIG. General buttons. 36 Properties Window To edit any of the listed button properties. General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties window. Depending on the item selected. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. With an item selected.11 or higher) 45 . the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project.in this case.

only the most recently opened 15 pages will remain open (the others will be automatically closed). This can obviously be a major time saver. popup page or button you want to retain in the target project. similar to the General tab. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). Working With Multiple Projects TPD4 supports working on multiple projects simultaneously.TP4) Properties Control . You can copy/paste pages. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0. toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (rightclick inside any of the tabs). If you open more than 15 pages. This information is displayed in a table format. When this option is enabled. popup page or buttons are pasted into a separate project (FIG.Programming Tab Click the Programming tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit programming-related information for the selected button. Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs.States Tab Click the States tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit the state information for each state associated with the selected button. Give some thought to which elements of the page. 37). TPD4 will display up to a maximum of 15 page tabs. Page Flip Options. 37 Paste Controls dialog 46 TPDesign4 (v2. a tab is displayed for each open page. similar to the General tab. The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area.11 or higher) . but can be moved. including all of their various attributes across projects.TPD4 Project Files (*. popup pages and buttons. and Images/Slots/Sounds when the page. with a few limitations: Opening Multiple Projects Simultaneously Each project page has its own tab along the bottom of the Design View window (known as MDI Page Tabs). 0. Copying/Pasting Across Projects TPD4 allows you to copy and paste pages. popup pages and buttons across projects to save time and effort. FIG. Properties Control . The State tab contains a table that lists the properties for each state for the selected button. and there are a few key points to keep in mind in doing so: Use the Paste Controls dialog to specify wether to retain Function Codes (Address. Channel and Level codes). This information is displayed in a table format. This a powerful tool.

If you selected a panel that supports multiple resolutions (i. However. b. those elements are copied into the target project along with the page. A description and image of the selected panel is displayed. c. Copying/Pasting Pages. In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). The TPD Conversion Wizard steps you through the conversion process in three dialogs: 1. Pages and Popup pages are automatically pasted into the correct folders. Click Yes to continue. Project Migration (From Previous Versions of TPDesign4) If a TP4 project file created with a previous version of TPD4 is opened (File > Open). you will see a Pre-Conversion warning TPDesign4 (v2. icons and sounds that came over with the pasted buttons are available in the Resource Manager for the target project. Converting TPD3 files to TPD4 TPDesign4 is backward-compatible with TPDesign3. or select Paste from the Workspace Navigator context window). Popup Pages and Buttons Across Projects: 1. You don't have to actually open a page to copy it: simply select the desired page with a single click in the Workspace Navigator window and copy the page. if the selected pages. for use with G4 panels. click to select the target project (the one that you want to paste the page or popup page into). Click to select the source page or popup page (the one that you want to copy to another project). 2. once the conversion process is applied. 3. Step 1 of 3 (Select Source and Destination): In the TPD Conversion Wizard . the buttons are copied along with the page. Edit > Copy.11 or higher) 47 . select the TPD project file that you want to convert (use the browse button to navigate to the desired file. a. the Copy toolbar button (). then save the file.e. via the Open dialog). icons and/or sounds.TPD4 Project Files (*. NXP-TPI4. this process will not have to be performed again. TPI-PRO-DVI). Click Cancel to abort the file open command. popup pages and/or buttons contain bitmaps. If you copy/paste a page or popup page containing buttons. if the target panel/resolution differs from the original target of the TPDesign3 file. Select File > Save As Different Panel Type to launch the TPD Conversion Wizard. Step 2 of 3 (View Warnings and Substitute Fonts): The TPD Conversion Wizard . Edit > Paste. Page Flip Options. you can specify the target resolution for the project. the Paste toolbar button. prompting you to continue with the migration process. or select Copy from the Workspace Navigator context window). TPI-PRO. the bitmaps. in the Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab). and Images/Slots/Sounds when the copied buttons are pasted into a page in a separate project.TP4) When you copy/paste across projects. and Copy (use Ctrl+C.Warnings & Font Substitution (Step 2 of 3) dialog in the wizard contains two read-only text fields: The Pre-Conversion Warnings list box alerts you to any possible conflicts that will exist in the selected file.Select a Source & Destination (Step 1 of 3) dialog. the Project Migration dialog appears. Retain slot references and Retain sound references are all selected in the Paste Controls dialog). Once the migration process is complete and the project file has been saved. For example. and Paste (use Ctrl+V. Using the TPD Conversion Wizard TPDesign4 includes a TPD Conversion Wizard tool that makes it easy to convert your existing TPDesign3 files for use with TPDesign4. Channel and Level codes). Click the down arrows next to Panel Type and Resolution to specify the target G4 panel for the project file. popup page or button (assuming that Retain image references. Open the Paste Control Options dialog (Button > Paste Controls) to specify wether to retain Function Codes (Address. 2. Click Next to proceed. Once the buttons are pasted into the target project. project files that were created in TPDesign3 must be converted in order to be compatible with TPDesign4.

3. 4. Select an External Button Option from the drop-down list. Creating a TPD4 Project for R-4 Remote Controllers The process of creating a TPD4 project for R-4 remote controllers is essentially the same as for any other panel type. 2. When you convert a TPDesign3 project to a TPDesign4 project via the TPD Conversion Wizard. like minor shifts in shape and size on some buttons. with a few caveats: 1. TPDesign4 generates a report that lists errors and warnings relating to the conversion process. Select R-4 as the Panel Type. As with the panel resolution. Select Next to proceed to the New Project Wizard .Finish (Step 3 of 3) dialog lists the selected file. the pages and popup pages may appear in a different order than they occurred in TPDesign3. For each unmatched font listed. Errors are issues that result in unexpected button borders.TPD4 Project Files (*. but that are not available to TPDesign4 (i. R-4 Remote Controller Projects AMX R-4 Remote Controllers feature a color LCD touch screen that can be programmed and customized like any other touch panel type. are not currently installed on your PC). Neither errors nor warnings will prevent the file from being compiled. Click Filter Warnings to select which warning messages to display or suppress via the Filter Conversion Warnings dialog. The display area on R-4 remotes is 240 X 320 (pixels). If all fonts used in the original file are still available. The pushbuttons on R-4 remotes are treated in TPD4 the same as external pushbuttons on any other panel type. and can be customized as External Controls. Fill in the fields in this dialog as desired. Warnings are issues that represent potential visual/formatting problems. 4. The bottom text box lists all Warnings encountered during the conversion process.e. The conversion wizard handles most of these issues for you automatically. The lower list box indicates any fonts that were specified in the original TPDesign3 file.Step Two dialog. When the TPD file is converted and opened in TPD4. the original panel/resolution association. Step 3 of 3 (Finish): The TPD Conversion Wizard . 48 TPDesign4 (v2. 3. and the target panel/resolution. usually because there are button or buttons in the project that are smaller than the minimum size of the selected border. you can select a substitute font to use instead. Select File > New to launch the New Project Wizard (New Project Wizard .Step 1) dialog. the message "No unmatched fonts" is displayed. 5. The Errors and Warnings reports are displayed in the Errors and Warnings Report dialog. but will probably require that the issues be resolved in order to have buttons and pages that look and function as expected. this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created. Fill in the fields in this dialog as desired. since TPD4 sorts the page and popup pages alphabetically.Final Step dialog. Select Next to proceed to the New Project Wizard . Click Finish to launch the conversion process and open the Errors and Warnings Report dialog where you can view/fix the resulting warnings.11 or higher) .TP4) message indicating that scaling will occur.

Levels • Mesh: • Mesh: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: Current TX Link Quality Current RX Link Quality Signal Strength Row 1 Signal Strength Row 2 Signal Strength Row 3 Signal Strength Row 4 Signal Strength Row 5 Signal Strength Row 6 Addresses R-4 Setup Codes . Select Finish to close the New Project Wizard. and Text Input buttons are not supported by R-4 remote controllers. the initial page is opened in the Design View.11 or higher) 49 . and are not displayed in the Properties Window (when an R-4 project is active). TPDesign4 (v2. TPD4 will display an error message if you attempt to add an unsupported button type in an R-4 project. TakeNote.Addresses • Time Display: • Date Display: Selected Format Selected Format These setup codes apply to R-4 firmware versions beginning with version 2. At this point.Unsupported Button Types Computer Control.61. Programming and States properties for Buttons Pages Popup Pages (keep in mind that R-4 projects work just like any other panel type) Configure the external pushbuttons. ready for you to: Set Page Properties and add Pages (note that the display area on R-4 remotes is 240x320 pixels).TP4) 6. All button types continue to be available in the Drawing Toolbar.TPD4 Project Files (*.10. Add Buttons and Popup Pages Set General. R-4 Setup Codes Levels: R-4 Setup Codes . However. R-4 Remote Devices .

Keypad with Transport Functions . Teletext keypad . These defaults will not affect any existing R-4 projects. As with the panel resolution.for use with a standard MIO R-4. R-4 External Buttons . Teletext Keypad with Transport Functions . If you have selected any touch panel that is equipped with external pushbuttons.for use with a Teletext MIO R-4.axi): R-4 External Buttons .TP4) External Button Options The first dialog in the New Project Wizard includes an option for selecting External Button Options.11 or higher) . this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created. The choices available depend on the type of panel selected in the Panel Type drop-down: If you have selected a panel without external pushbuttons. This option allows you to select from multiple external button layouts. i. the only available option is "Default Configuration" (and cannot be changed). 50 TPDesign4 (v2. the External Button Options list is empty.for use with a MIO R-4 with transport keys.e. If you have selected the MIO R-4 remote. the options include: Default Configuration .Default Channel Codes Button MENU Up Down Left Right Select EXIT INFO GUIDE LAST G4 API CONSTANT BTN_MENU_FUNC BTN_MENU_UP BTN_MENU_DN BTN_MENU_LT BTN_MENU_RT BTN_MENU_SELECT BTN_MENU_EXIT BTN_MENU_INFO BTN_MENU_GUIDE BTN_TUNER_PREV Code 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 101 105 235 The default values are read in when a new project is created.for use with a Teletext MIO R-4 with transport keys. "<none>".TPD4 Project Files (*.Default Channel Codes The default channel codes for R-4 external buttons match the corresponding G4 API values (defined in G4API.

39 Resource Manager dialog . Slots and Sounds for your project.Toolbar Depending on what you are doing with the listed Image.MP3) to be used in your project. Dynamic Images: The Dynamic Images tab allows you to manage images that exist on an HTTP server or FTP server. FIG. external to the panel. Sounds: The Sounds tab provides a convenient way to import and preview all sound files (. Slots: The Slots tab allows you to manage slot assignments for images and icons. The Resource Manager contains its own toolbar. Dynamic Image or Sound files. above the tabs (FIG.11 or higher) 51 . 39). TPD4 supports most popular image formats.Working With The Resource Manager Working With The Resource Manager Overview Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog (FIG.WAV or . Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option. one or more of the following options will be available: TPDesign4 (v2. 38 Resource Manager dialog This dialog contains features and options that allow you to easily organize and manage Images. 38). organized into four tabs: Images: The Images tab provides a convenient way to import and preview all image files to be used in your project. FIG.

You can also cut/copy/paste within any of the tabs. The files are not deleted from the hard drive. Click to open the Create Dynamic Image dialog. Details . containing two fields: Old Name (read-only. the files are automatically converted to JPGs. which allows you to add dynamic images to your project. Thumbnails . New: This option is available only on the Dynamic Images tab (and replaces the Import button that is on the other tabs). Rename: Select an image file and click Rename to open the Rename dialog. If you only select one slot.11 or higher) .lists the files in a single column. Import: Click to invoke the Open dialog. However.Working With The Resource Manager Cut/Copy/Paste: Use these controls primarily to move images files to and from the Slots tab. and New Name (enter the new file name in this field). with small file icons. when you paste the multiple images. just from this project. By default. PNGs are not converted because they are already sufficiently compressed. with small file icons.lists the files in columns. List . Export: Use this option to export one or more files to a specified directory. displays the current file name). When images of any (supported) file type except PNG are imported into a project. you'll only see the first one that you selected. TPD4 automatically adds the "copy of" prefix to the file. or by selecting "When deleting resources in use" in the Application tab of the Preference dialog. List Style: Click the down-arrow to open a drop-down list of the available display options for this tab: Small Icons . and support selected multiple files. Use the Choose Directory dialog to pick the target directory. Delete: Select one or more files and click Delete to delete them from the collection. as well as the Page(s) on which each file is used. For this reason. If any of the files selected for deletion are used by the active project. 52 TPDesign4 (v2. with a listing of all files targeted for deletion. They work in the typical way. the Resource(s) In Use dialog is set to display any time a used resource is deleted. you can toggle the display of this dialog either by selecting the "Don't show me again" checkbox in the dialog. Undo/Redo: All actions in the Resource Manager can be undone and/or redone.displays a thumbnail image of each file. if you import (or paste) a file that has the same name as a previously imported file (even if it has a different extension). you must select at least the same number of slots (in the Slots tab) in order to paste all of the files. Use this dialog to locate and select image and sound files to import into this tab.lists the files with file size and image dimension descriptions. the Resource(s) In Use dialog is displayed. Note that if you copy or cut multiple files to clipboard memory. Click OK to rename the file.

popup pages. Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected image file(s) to slot(s). it is available for selection to be applied to Pages. so that you can maintain an organized profile of all images in the project. TPDesign4 (v2. Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item.e. FIG. buttons and icons). the image and sound files must first be imported into the Project via the Resource Manager dialog. Static Image Files Before you can apply images to buttons and pages in your Project. button state. page background. Popup pages or Buttons (at the state level).Images tab The Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all image files to be used in your project (FIG. 40 Resource Manager dialog .Images tab Use this tab as a "library" of every image file that will be used in your project (for pages. Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the image files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order. 40). Once the image has been imported. etc). It is important to import all of your images to this tab first. The Images tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all image files. regardless of their context (i.11 or higher) 53 . before they are applied in the project.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Images Resource Manager dialog .

If this option is selected. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors. For this reason. if you import (or paste) a file that has the same name as a previously imported file (even if it has a different extension). Open the Images tab. Notes on importing image files: When images of any supported file type (except PNG) are imported into a project. since they are usually slightly smaller in size. Unless you are actually using transparency. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. 6. See the Working With Transparent Backgrounds section on page 106 for details. the files are automatically converted to JPGs. 5. Click Open to import the files to the Images tab. 2. Locate and select the file(s) to import. anytime an image with a duplicate file name is imported.11 or higher) . 3. Click the Overwrite resources with duplicate names checkbox to automatically overwrite any existing images that have the same file name as the image selected for import. TPD4 supports most popular image formats. it will replace the original image on every button or page that referenced that file name in the Project. Supported Image File Types TPD4 supports the following image file types: BMP (Windows bitmap) IFF (Interchange File Format) JPG (Joint Photographic Expert Group) PCT (Macintosh Pict) PCX (PC (Zsoft) Paintbrush) PNG (Portable Network Graphic) PSD (Photoshop) TGA (TrueVision Targa) WMF (Windows Meta File) EPS (Encapsulated Post Script) FPX (FlashPix) Notes: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4.Working With The Resource Manager Consider assigning Slot positions to those image files that you expect to use multiple times in the Project. only one accommodates transparency as a color: PNGs. PNGs are not converted because they are already sufficiently compressed. JPGs are recommended over PNGs. 54 TPDesign4 (v2. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. TPD4 automatically adds the "copy of" prefix to the file. Click the Import button to invoke the Open dialog. Importing Image Files Into Your Project To import image files into your Project 1. This functionality works in an identical manner for sound files. 4.

Working With The Resource Manager The largest image size supported on the panels is 1280x1024. so that the image will not be stretched. Any image files that are imported to the project that are larger than 1280x1024 are automatically scaled down to fit this maximum resolution.". Any scaling that occurs is proportional.11 or higher) 55 . the filename is changed to include the prefix "Copy of. This is true even if the second version of the image file you have imported is of a different file type with a different extension. If you import an image file that has already been imported to the Images tab. TPDesign4 (v2...

popup pages. Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item. page background.11 or higher) . etc). 56 TPDesign4 (v2. Get Live File: Click to retrieve a thumbnail of the live feed. regardless of their context (i. Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the image files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order.e. so that you can maintain an organized profile of all images in the project. It is important to import all of your dynamic images to this tab first.Dynamic Images tab Use this tab as a "library" of every dynamic image file that will be used in your project (for pages. to replace the generic icon in this tab. button state. 41): FIG. The Dynamic Images tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all images. before they are applied in the project.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Dynamic Images Resource Manager dialog . buttons and icons). Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected Image file(s) to slot(s).Dynamic Images tab The Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all dynamic image files to be used in your project (FIG. Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option. 41 Resource Manager dialog .

Dynamic images can be applied to all button types except Computer Control and Text Area buttons. TPDesign4 (v2. Click the New button to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG. external to the panel. rather than a directory path to an image file. Host: Enter the Host Name (URL) or IP Address of the image source. Open the Dynamic Images tab (FIG. 5. or FTP. This can be any name you choose. Adding Dynamic Image Files To Your Project To add dynamic image files to the Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog: 1. File: Enter the File name for the image source. Password: Enter Password if desired (optional). Refresh only at panel startup: Click to refresh this image only when the panel is powered up.11 or higher) 57 . Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. Use the Scale Bitmap To Fit state property (Properties Control window . Refresh Rate: Leave the Refresh Rate set to zero (default). Click OK to add the file to the Dynamic Images tab. try to give the file a descriptive name so that it can be identified easily later. 42). 3. Protocol: Select the communication protocol: HTTP (default).States tab) to automatically scale (down only) the dynamic image to fit the button that it is being displayed on. This option is only displayed if the current panel type supports Dynamo Resource images (see the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6). Fill in the fields provided: Name: Enter a name for this dynamic image. Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option. User: Enter User name if desired (optional). 2. Dynamo Resource: Click to specify this image as a Dynamo Resource (for Dynamo Resource images only).Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Images Dynamic Images are images that exist on an HTTP server or FTP server. 42 Create Dynamic Image dialog 4. To use dynamic images in your project you'll specify a URL. Path: Enter the Path for the image source. FIG. The Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all dynamic image files to be used in your project. 41 on page 56).

Note that the Location entry consists of not only the Host address information.jpg d. and paste it into the Host field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. refer to the source image properties: a.jpg The User and Password fields are left blank.ac-images.com/images02/64/l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004.myspacecdn. Right-click to view it's element properties (FIG. we'll use "Photo 1".myspacecdn. 43 Example Element Properties dialog As indicated in the drop-down example above.ac-images.ac-images. b. go to the image that you want to add as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager. Open the Resource Manager to the Dynamic Images tab. Since HTTP is already selected (by default) as the Protocol in the Create Dynamic Image dialog.com Path = images02/64 File = l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004.jpg The various types of information included in the Location string (as provided in the Element Properties dialog) must be broken up and entered into the appropriate fields in the Create Dynamic Image dialog in order for this dynamic image to work: c. 2.Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Image Example . Click New to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog. Verify that HTTP is selected as the Protocol. 43). 3.11 or higher) . Cut the file information from the Path string and paste it into the File field. since no credentials are required by the Host to access the webcam in this case.com/images02/64/l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004. At this point in the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG. and delete "HTTP://" from the pasted string. In a web browser. the host address information for this example is listed in the Location entry of the Element Properties dialog. it is not required as part of the Host. Cut the path and file information from the string and paste it into the Path field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. To provide the other information required in this dialog. 58 TPDesign4 (v2. 4. Copy the address string from the Element Properties dialog. 44): Name = Photo 1 Protocol = HTTP Host = c1.Adding a Dynamic Image The following example steps you through the process of adding a dynamic image to the Resource Manager: 1. the Host string contains Host address information as well as Path and File information: c1. Enter a descriptive name for this dynamic image in the Name field (in this example. Here is the full string provided by the image source for this photo: http://c1. FIG. e. At this point. but also protocol and path information as well.myspacecdn.

Click OK to add this image as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager (FIG. 45 Example Dynamic Image TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. f. the Refresh Only at Panel Startup option is available. to allow the image to update automatically based on the source's refresh rate. When the Refresh Rate is set to zero.Working With The Resource Manager FIG. 45). 44 Example Create Dynamic Image dialog The Refresh Rate should be left to zero (default setting). This option directs the panel to refresh this image only when the panel is rebooted.11 or higher) 59 .

60 TPDesign4 (v2. 3. 46 Create Dynamic Image dialog . User: Enter User name if required (this field is optional).11 or higher) . with one exception: to specify that the dynamic image will be accelerated. 2. or FTP.Working With The Resource Manager When Dynamic images are added to the Resource Manager. as opposed to Dynamic (static) or Dynamo (non-accelerated) images.Dynamo Resource option Creating a DynaMo Image 1. Fill in the fields provided: Name: Enter a name for this dynamic image. and a select number of AMX Touch Panels support "enhanced" or "accelerated" Dynamo images. File: Enter the File name for the image source provided in the camera or video server manufacturer's documentation. Path: Enter the Path for the image source provided in the camera or video server manufacturer's documentation (see the Network Path Information section on page 63). Select Panel > Resource Manager to open the Resource Manager dialog. or click Get Live File to replace the icon with a thumbnail image. DynaMo™ Dynamic Images TPDesign4 (v2. simply select the Dynamo Resource option at the bottom of the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG. Host: Enter the IP Address of the camera/video server. they are initially indicated by an icon rather than a thumbnail image such as is shown in the example above Double-click on any Dynamic image icon. 46). Password: Enter Password if required (this field is also optional). In the Dynamic Images tab. Protocol: Select the communication protocol: HTTP (default). See the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6. these are referred to as Dynamo Resource images. click on New to open the Create Dynamic Image dialog. Dynamo Resource images are essentially the same as standard Dynamo images with one key difference: the playback of Dynamo Resource images is accelerated to up to 30 frames-per-second. FIG.11 or higher). In TPDesign4. The process of adding a Dynamo Resource image to the Resource Manager is identical to that of adding a standard Dynamo image.

Dynamic images that have the Dynamo Resource property set are displayed with a modified icon. Create a General button on which the DynaMo Dynamic Image will be displayed. While TPDesign4 will allow you to place more than one Dynamo Resource image on a page. it is important to note the following: If there are multiple Dynamic images displayed on a single page. To allow other users to access the files via FTP without password protection.Dynamo Resource option The User (name) and Password fields are typically used with FTP servers. as opposed to upon each visit to the page (as is the default).FIG.. Refresh only at panel startup: This option is only available if the Refresh Rate is set to zero. which resembles the standard Dynamic Image icon but features a lightning bolt (FIG. In the States tab of the Properties window.Working With The Resource Manager Refresh Rate: Refreshing resources will cause the button displaying that resource to refresh as well. the frame-rate on all Dynamo Resource images may be reduced as a result. which means that the resource is only downloaded once. In the Dynamic Images tab. Select one that fits your application requirements and interface design. 4. only one of them should be set as a Dynamo Resource image. 48). 47 Create Dynamic Image dialog . The Dynamo Resource option is only displayed if the currently selected panel-type supports Accelerated Dynamo images (see AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images). with one exception: to specify that the dynamic image will be treated as an (accelerated) Dynamo Resource image.11 or higher) 61 . leave the User and Password fields blank. 47).) button b. FIG. c. 5. select the dynamic image that you want to display on this button. Select the DynaMo Dynamic Image that you want to apply to this button. Some cameras/servers support more than one output resolution. The user must type either "Anonymous" or "Guest" to access the specified FTP site. The default value is 0.. select Bitmap to enable the Browse (. Adding an Dynamo Resource Image to the Resource Manager The process of adding a Dynamo Resource image to the Resource Manager is identical to that of adding a standard Dynamo image. Click Browse to access the Select Resource dialog. via the button's Bitmap properties: a. that matches the output resolution of the camera/video server providing the dynamic image. and causes the dynamic image to refresh only upon restart of the panel. simply select the Dynamo Resource option at the bottom of the Create Dynamic Image dialog. Dynamo Resource: Click to specify this image as a Dynamo Resource (for accelerated DynaMo Dynamic images only . TPDesign4 (v2. When working with Dynamo Resource images.

with a Scale Bitmap to Fit setting of 2x.Working With The Resource Manager FIG. 48 Dynamic Resource Image & Dynamic Image icons (Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog) Scaling and Cropping of Dynamo Resource Images Dynamo Resource Images have specific scaling/cropping options available via the Scale Bitmap to Fit (State) property for any state that has a Dynamo Resource image assigned to the "Bitmap" property.This option automatically resizes the Dynamo Resource image to fit the container button. Copy/Paste Operations on Dynamo Resource Images Paste operations of a button with a Dynamo Resource image from a panel-type that supports Dynamo Resource images. the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. If the resulting image is larger than it's container. Note that this option is only available for Dynamo Resource Images (not for Dynamo Dynamic Images). popup or page. Click here for a listing of all AMX touch panels that support Dynamo Resource Images. Paste operations of a button with a Dynamo Resource image from an OMAP panel-type that supports Dynamo acceleration with a Scale Bitmap to Fit setting of Scale to Fit. into an FPGA panel-type that supports Dynamo acceleration results in the Scale Bitmap to Fit value being set to No in the pasted button for all states. This is the default setting. The Scale to Fit option for Dynamo Resource images differs from panels that do not support Dynamo Resource images in that the aspect ratio of the image is maintained. Any paste operation that causes a Dynamo Resource image to be imported into a target panel project that does not support Dynamo Resource images will cause the Scale Bitmap to Fit setting to be reset on the imported resource. The Scale Bitmap To Fit options presented here depend on the panel type selected: No . 2x . 62 TPDesign4 (v2. Scale To Fit . popup or page.The Dynamo Resource image is doubled in size.11 or higher) . into a panel-type that doesn't support Dynamo Resource images results in the Scale Bitmap to Fit value being set to No in the pasted button for all states. Use the Bitmap Justification State property to position the dynamic image bitmap within the button borders. and the image will be arbitrarily centered on the container button. the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts.The Dynamo Resource image will not be scaled at all. If the Dynamo Resource image is larger than it's container.

One way to work around this is connecting to your networked camera or video server using an Internet browser that captures the location or path to the stream. You can download a free version of FireFox at www.11 or higher) 63 .Working With The Resource Manager Cameras and Servers With M-JPEG Streaming Output A number of leading manufacturers are offering a variety of equipment that provides Motion JPEG streaming output. or if necessary. Depending on the camera/network video server type you are using. and the camera/ server is serving up an HTML page with a video window being a part of the page.org. however. Like with any other type of equipment AMX controls.mozilla. what is being sent to the camera/server in the path is a CGI call that may have additional parameters based on the feature set of the camera/server and the syntax the manufacturer requires. An example of such browser is Mozilla FireFox. many networked cameras/servers are accessed using a regular HTML browser. Below is a sample list of popular manufacturers and models: Motion JPEG Cameras and Servers Manufacturer Axis Network camera 205 Network Camera 2100 Network Camera 2120 Network Camera 2420 Network Camera Panasonic KX-HCM280 Color Pan Tilt Zoom KX-HCM10 Indoor Pan Tilt KX-HCM250 Wireless Pan Tilt KX-HCM230 Outdoor Pan Tilt Sony Trendnet Vivotek SCN-RZ30N Pan/Tilt/25x Zoom TV-IP301 IP2111 Network Camera IP2112 Network Camera VS2402 Video Server Network video server 241Q Video Server 4 Inputs 241S Video Server 1 Input Network Path Information While AMX strives to bring to the market innovative features such as support for Motion JPEG. This can also help you fully utilize optional features available on that specific device. TPDesign4 (v2. However. left click on the streaming image and select Copy Image Location. In the case of streaming network cameras/servers. at times it can be difficult to get the needed information with respect to the protocol/syntax of a particular camera/server. at points we have to work through the different ways manufacturers implement standards. manufacturers are using somewhat different syntax for requesting Motion JPEG streams from their networked cameras and servers. however. the panel needs to access only the M-JPEG stream. For Dynamo. manufacturer's documentation and customer support are the most reliable ways of obtaining information on the device's communication protocol/syntax. not the entire HTML page served by the camera/server by default. Using the browser you can go to your network device's IP address. you may need to consult product documentation. contact manufacturer's technical support. What follows are examples for some of most popular manufacturers. For example. In general.

and therefore requires that the target resolution be indicated. Each camera can also have a camera ID number but that is optional.cgi?camera=&resolution=320x240 Dynamic Image Settings . 49 Dynamic Image Settings . 50 Dynamic Image Settings .Example 1: Axis Manufacturer: Axis Model: 2100 (camera) Path: axis-cgi/mjpg/video.Example 2: Panasonic FIG.11 or higher) .Example 2: Panasonic Manufacturer: Panasonic Model: BL-C10A (camera) Path: nphMotionJpeg?resolution=320x240&Quality=Standard 64 TPDesign4 (v2. 49).Example 1: Axis Axis equipment supports a number of resolutions. FIG.Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Image Settings . just as a number of other features that can be indicated in the path (FIG.

Enter a descriptive name for this dynamic image in the Name field (in this example. 2. Right-click to view it's element properties (FIG. set the dynamic image properties to: Protocol: HTTP (default) Host: (the default IP of this camera is 192.11 or higher) 65 .168. In a web browser.1. b. 51 Dynamic Image Settings . 52): TPDesign4 (v2.Adding a Streaming Webcam Image The following example steps you through the process of adding a dynamic image in the form of an online streaming webcam to the Resource Manager: 1. The default settings of "640x480" and "Highest Quality" should be OK.Example 3: Vivotek Manufacturer: Vivotek Model: 2111 (camera) Path: cgi-bin/video. refer to the source image properties: a. To provide the other information required in this dialog. we'll use "Beach 1"). 3. go to the web cam that you want to add as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager.Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Image Settings . Open the Resource Manager to the Dynamic Images tab. Click New to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog.Example 3: Vivotek FIG. 4.jpg?cam=1&quality=3&size=2 Working With Trendnet IP Cameras To get a streaming image from the TV-IP301 Trendnet IP camera on to a dynamic image window of a touch panel: 1. In TPD4. 2.30) Path: goform File: video2 user & password are blank Refresh Rate: 1 (or more) DynaMo Dynamic Image Example . Configure the camera for JPEG and 15fps.

axiscam. but also protocol and path information as well. e.cgi?camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image. since no credentials are required by the Host to access the webcam in this case.jpg 5.jpg d. Copy the address string from the Element Properties dialog. c.element properties As indicated above. Cut the file information from the Path string and paste it into the File field. and paste it into the Host field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. b. 66 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .jpg The User and Password fields are left blank.cgi? File = camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image. it is not required as part of the Host. and delete "HTTP://" from the pasted string. At this point. Verify that HTTP is selected as the Protocol. Cut the path and file information from the string and paste it into the Path field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. the Host string contains Host address information as well as Path and File information: coralsandsinn. At this point in the Create Dynamic Image dialog: Host = coralsandsinn.Working With The Resource Manager FIG.axiscam. 52 Online webcam . the host address information for this example is listed in the Location entry of the Element Properties dialog.axiscam.net/axis-cgi/jpg/ image.cgi?camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image. The various types of information included in the Location string (as provided in the Element Properties dialog) must be broken up and entered into the appropriate fields in the Create Dynamic Image dialog in order for this dynamic image to work: a. Since HTTP is already selected (by default) as the Protocol in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. Here is the full string provided by the image source for this webcam: http://coralsandsinn. Note that the Location entry consists of not only the Host address information.net/axis-cgi/jpg/ image.net Path = axis-cgi/jpg/image.

the Refresh Only at Panel Startup option is available. FIG. to allow the image to update automatically based on the source's refresh rate. or click Get Live File to replace the icon with a thumbnail image. Click OK to add this webcam as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager.11 or higher) 67 . Click Dynamo Resource to use this Dynamic Image as an (accelerated) DynaMo Dynamic Image. they are initially indicated by an icon rather than a thumbnail image. 53 Example Create Dynamic Image dialog f.Working With The Resource Manager The Refresh Rate should be left to zero. When the Refresh Rate is set to zero. Double-click on any Dynamic image icon. TPDesign4 (v2. When Dynamic images are added to the Resource Manager. The Refresh Only at Panel Startup option directs the panel to refresh this image only when the panel is rebooted.

Once an image or sound file has been assigned a slot. the Slot tab lists only those image and sound files that are currently assigned to a slot. Once the image file is assigned to a Slot. Resource Manager dialog . 54 Resource Manager dialog . Popup Pages or Buttons in the Project.11 or higher) . it can be assigned to a Slot position. The Slots tab of the Resource Manager dialog lists all Icon Slot assignments currently defined in the Project. FIG.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Slots TPD4 utilizes the concept of Slots for adding Icons to Pages. TPD4 supports up to 500 icon slot assignments.Slots tab The Slots tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to preview and manage all image and sound files that are being used in your project (FIG. it is considered to be an Icon. All image and sound files must be assigned to a slot before they can applied to pages. Once an image file is imported into the Project (via the Resource Manager). it is available for selection as an icon through the Properties Control Window (States tab). it can be used as an Icon in your Project. 54). popup pages and/or buttons as Icons.Slots tab Where the Images and Sounds tabs contain "libraries" of all Image and Sound files (even if they have not been assigned to a slot). 68 TPDesign4 (v2. Each project has 2000 slots available. Once a Image or Sound has been assigned to a slot in the Resource Manager.

or Shift + click to select a range of files). click Assign (in the Slots tab) to assign the file to slot 1. Cancel: If have selected one or more images. 54 on page 68). and clicked Assign to Slot (in the Images tab). you'll have to more careful about how you choose to assign the files. If you selected multiple files. Icons). click the slot where you want to begin pasting the set of images. The toolbar button in this tab contains several command options: Select All: Click to select all slots (1-2000). If you select just one slot. the program limits you to 2000 slots per panel. click to select the slot to which you want to apply the image file and click Assign (in the Slots tab). then select the slot that you want to target for the duplicated file. Assigning Images and Sounds to Slot Positions To assign image files. and click Swap. Use the Overwrite and Insert radio buttons to select a preference for assigning files to slot(s) with previous file assignments. 4. if you selected ten files to assign to slots. you can click Cancel to cancel the process before you set the slot assignment. Ctrl + click to select two files. By default. The two file / slot assignments are swapped. The selected file is moved to the selected slot. If there are no images or sounds already assigned to slots (the Slots tab is empty). Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. Move: Use this option to move a slot assignment. then click on the target slot for the selected file and click Move. Select Insert to insert the files without overwriting anything. there is no need to assign it to a slot (see Bitmaps vs. they will be assigned in the order in which they were selected. 2. If you are assigning multiple files to multiple slots. Assign: This command assigns the selected Image or Sound file(s) to slot(s). First select the file that you want to duplicate. Open the Images. Click Assign To Slot. only the first file selected will be assigned. If there are already some slot assignments present (in the Slots tab). Swap: Use this option to swap two file / slot assignments. the other slot assignments are shifted to accommodate the new assignments. in the order in which they were selected. If you select five slots. 3. and click Duplicate. select ten slots before assigning the files. you must select the same number of slots as the number of images copied. First select a file / slot assignment. When pasting multiple image files to the Slots tab. dynamic images or sound files to slot positions for use in the Project: 1. Dynamic Images or Sounds tab. only the first five files will be assigned. For example. you can use up to 9900 slots per panel if necessary by changing the maximum number of slots per panel. The files will be pasted consecutively.11 or higher) 69 . However. depending on the type of file you are adding. Note that the Overwrite and Insert options affect how the Move option works. In this case. TPDesign4 (v2. If you are assigning a single file to a slot with a pre-existing file assignment. The selected file is duplicated in the targeted slot. This open the Slots tab (FIG.Working With The Resource Manager If you don't intend to use a image or sound file as an Icon. Duplicate: Use this option to duplicate a selected file to another slot. Select one or more files (Ctrl + click to select multiple files individually. Select Overwrite to automatically overwrite any pre-existing file assignments in the affected slots.

however. Bitmaps that have been imported into the Project are listed in the Images tab of the Resource Manager. and are always appear on top of the Bitmap layer. Icons allow for complex graphics and animations. including all slots to which it was assigned. you could create a button with a Bitmap image. PNGs. and assigned slot numbers (via the Resource Manager dialog). you could place a static icon over an animated bitmap or color transition effect. See Z-Order for details. When an image's slot position assignment is deleted from the Project. Text is always drawn last. that image is removed from the entire project. so they are always drawn on top of a bitmap image. and icons as the foreground graphic image. and place an Icon on top of the Bitmap. Icons are drawn after Bitmaps. JPGs. In TPD4. Icons can also be put into motion via the Slot Position tweener (accessible via the Tweeners sub-menu). Icons TPD4 uses two concepts of image files: Bitmaps and Icons. Icon Slot Assignments that have been specified in the Project are listed in the Slots tab of the Resource Manager. There are important differences in the way each type is treated: Bitmaps: The term Bitmap is a generic term that describes any pixel-based image file. the image is still available as a Bitmap (and remains in any other slot it is assigned to). which may also use Icons (as well as text) in addition to the background image (see Z-Order for details).Working With The Resource Manager Working With Icons Icons are bitmap images that have imported into the project. Icons are different than Bitmaps in several ways: All imported images are considered to be Bitmaps. Icons: The term Icon refers to any image file that has been imported into the Project and assigned to a Slot position in the Resource Manager. and they are always placed in a layer beneath any Icons. Popup Pages and Buttons. In TPD4. For example. Use icons as button graphics that can be placed "on top" of a color fill. bitmap or video fill background. a Bitmap can be any supported image type (not limited to . PSDs and BMPs (among others) are supported Bitmap file types. Having an image assigned to a slot allows you to reference the same image as either a Bitmap or an Icon. but an image cannot also be referenced as an Icon until it is assigned to a slot in the Resource Manager. Bitmaps cannot. on top of the icon. when a Bitmap (in the Images tab of the Resource Manager) is deleted. 70 TPDesign4 (v2. You can think of Bitmaps as the background image used on Pages. The important thing to understand about Bitmaps in the context of TPD4 buttons is that they are drawn first.11 or higher) .BMP files). icons exist before bitmaps in the Z-Order. Any supported image file can be made to be an icon. For example. Think of bitmaps as the background button graphic. simply by assigning it to a slot position. For example. Bitmaps vs. Icons occupy slots in the Resource Manager.

before they are applied in the project. Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the sound files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order. Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected sound file(s) to slot(s). popup pages. buttons and icons). page flip. Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Sounds Resource Manager dialog . 55 Resource Manager dialog .e. It is important to import all of your sound files to this tab first.WAV and . 55): FIG. so that you can maintain an organized profile of all sound files in the project. regardless of their context (i.Sounds tab TPD4 supports . button state. Use this tab as a "library" of every sound file that will be used in your project (for pages. etc). The Slots tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all sound files. TPDesign4 (v2.Sounds tab The Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all sound files to be used in your project (FIG.MP3 files.11 or higher) 71 .

11 or higher) . This opens the Choose Directory dialog (FIG. 4. anytime a sound file with a duplicate file name is imported. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. If you import an sound file that has already been imported to the Sounds tab. Dynamic Images... 5. The primary difference between the two is that MP3 represents a compressed version of a WAV file. 56 Choose Directory dialog 5. Click Open to import the files to the Sounds tab. the filename is changed to include the prefix "Copy of. Slots or Sounds). 56). Locate and select the file(s) to import. Click the Export button. If MP3 files are encoded correctly. Open the appropriate tab for the type of file you want to export (Images. Open the Sounds tab. 55 on page 71): 1. Click the Overwrite resources with duplicate names checkbox to automatically overwrite any existing sound files that have the same file name as the file selected for import. Select one or more files to export (Ctrl + click to select multiple files individually. it will replace the original file on every button or page that referenced that file name in the Project. you should experience very little (if any) difference in sound quality. 6. 72 TPDesign4 (v2. 2. Click the Import button. Click OK. 6. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. or Shift + click to select a range of files). 3. 3. Exporting Image and Sound Files From Your Project To a Specified Directory To export image (including dynamic images) and sound files from Resource Manager dialog to a specified directory: 1. 4. Importing Sound Files To Your Project To import sound files to the Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog (FIG. Use the Browse button to locate a target directory for the files. The program prompts you when the export is finished. 2.". FIG. If this option is selected. This is true even if the second version of the sound file you have imported is of a different file type with a different extension. There are many freeware programs available to encode WAV files into MP3's. This invokes the Open dialog.Working With The Resource Manager Supported Sound File Types TPD4 supports WAV and MP3 sound formats.

Editing Sound Files 1. 3. rename. etc. Once you have indicated a program to be used as the default editor. and another for Sound files. Editing Image Files 1.g. 3. Open the Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog. Select the sound file that you want to edit.Working With The Resource Manager Editing Image and Sound Files Using External Programs TPD4 supports the use of external programs for editing image and/or sound files used in your project. Any subsequent changes made in the external editor will not be reflected nor applied..) will cause the link between TPD4 and the external application to be broken. Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to add external image and sound editing programs. undo/redo. Click the Edit button to launch the external program specified as the default editor for sound files. TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 73 . the image or sound file is opened in the default editing program. 2. you can access it via the Edit button in the Images and Sounds tabs of the Resource Manager dialog. delete. Click the Edit button to launch the external program specified as the default editor for image files. Select the image file that you want to edit. When the edit session begins. Any action taken in TPD4 that would change the state of the image or sound file being edited (e. the Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files section on page 272 and the Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program section on page 273 for more information. See the Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files section on page 272. Open the Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog. and control is returned to TPD4. You must first associate one or more external editing programs with Image files. and specify the default editors. Any saved changes to the resource made in the external editor will be immediately reflected in TPD4. See the Program Preferences section on page 265 for details. 2.

Working With The Resource Manager 74 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

58). 57 Workspace Window (indicating the active Project & Page) Page Flips (which provide the ability to "flip" from one page to another via a button press) are a button-oriented function . FIG. Creating a New Page 1.Working With Pages Working With Pages Overview Pages are not only containers for buttons.11 or higher) 75 . the page background color. all name collision checks in the program are case insensitive. and a font for any text specified (including the font size and settings). Pages cannot have borders and possess only one state. Double-click on any page contained in any open project to set it as the active project.see the Creating a Page Flip section on page 108. 57. but can also have up to one address port / address code and up to one channel port / channel code combination. In FIG. the text color for text applied directly to the page. You can select the name for the page. The maximum number of pages in a panel file = 500. If you change any of these properties (except the name) your changes will be saved and future page creations will carry those selections forward. The active project/page is indicated in the Workspace Window by a green wedge to the left of the panel and page icons. 58 Add Page dialog TPDesign4 (v2. "TPI-PRO-DVI test" is the active project. Each page must be uniquely named within its respective panel file in order to be accepted by the program. You may place text directly on a page outside the context of a button. Select Panel > Add Page (or click the toolbar icon) to open the Add Page dialog (FIG. and "Page 1" is the active page in the project: FIG.

since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. Click the browse button (. or both. The new page will be appear in the Workspace Navigator in the Pages folder. The General tab contains a table that lists the page properties for the active page. select from a drop-down menu. The following programming properties are supported at the page level: Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Setting States Properties: Pages Use the State tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit page state properties. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog. Setting General Properties: Pages Use the General tab of the Properties Window to set/edit page properties. To edit any of the listed properties. To set Page-level properties. separated into three tabs (General. you can either set the item manually. Enter a descriptive name for the new page in the Name field (avoid using inappropriate file name characters). Set the Page Text color (for text applied directly to the page): a. 76 TPDesign4 (v2. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog. you can either set the item manually. Depending on the item selected. Single-click to select a new color from the list. To edit any of the listed properties. 6. Click the browse button (. b. Single-click to select a new color from the list.Working With Pages 2. select from a drop-down menu. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. b. With the Page selected. or both. Depending on the item selected. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.. Programming and States). Click OK to add the new page to the active project. or both. A sample of the selected font type and size is displayed in the window beneath these fields.. In most cases. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. The State tab contains a table that lists the page state properties for the active page. 3. Depending on the item selected.) next to Page Background to open the Colors dialog. Set the Font Name and Size.11 or higher) . click on the Page area in the Design View (as opposed to a button on the page). To edit any of the listed properties. you can either set the item manually. under the project to which the page was added (as the active page). the Properties Window displays the properties available for the Page. select from a drop-down menu. 4. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. 5. Set the Page Background color: a. Setting Page Properties Panel Pages have a set of Page Properties that can be configured via the fields in the Properties Window.) next to Text to open the Colors dialog... The Programming tab contains a table that lists the programming properties for the active page. The following general properties are supported at the page level: Name Description Setting Programming Properties: Pages Use the Programming tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit page programming properties.

60)..Pages tab). click on the Fill Color field to enable the browse (. Click OK to close the Colors dialog.. 60 States tab of the Properties Control window . Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog. 4. In the States tab of the Properties Window. FIG.) button (FIG. 59 Renaming a Page (via the Workspace Window) Adding a Fill Color to a Page 1.11 or higher) 77 . 59). simply click on a Page entry in the Workspace Window and type directly into the text field (FIG. TPDesign4 (v2.Fill Color field 3. FIG. Select the page to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (via the Workspace . and select the color that you want to apply to the page.Working With Pages The following state properties are supported at the page level: Draw Order Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Video Fill Video Touch Pass-Thru Bitmap Bitmap Justification Icon Slot Icon Justification Font Text Text Justification Text Effect Word Wrap Sound Renaming a Page To rename any Page in the active project. 2.

4.11 or higher) . In the States tab of the Properties Window. FIG. 61). Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.. open the image in any graphics editor program. Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there.Pages tab). where you can select the desired bitmap.. 62). 78 TPDesign4 (v2. TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Page.Bitmap field 3.Working With Pages Adding a Bitmap to a Page You can apply a bitmap directly to a Page in your project. 2. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. To check the size of the Pages in your project.Bitmap Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image. to serve as the background image. To scale an image to fit a target Page. 61 States tab of the Properties Control window . Select the page to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (via the Workspace . 62 States tab of the Properties Control window . check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab). Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog. click on the Bitmap field to enable the browse (. 1. and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Page. Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image on the page (FIG. Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project. 5. FIG.) button (FIG.

Select the page to which you want to add or change an image icon (via the Workspace . You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text. If you are also displaying a bitmap on the Page. 2. 4. 1.. and type the page text as desired (up to 4096 characters). 63). 64 States tab of the Properties Control window . click on the Icon Slot field to enable the browse (.. Since G4 panels utilize address and channel port/address codes (and possess a single state).. FIG.) button (FIG. Adding Text to a Page Refer to the True Type Font Support section on page 6 for details on supported text. you can display text directly on a Page in your project. Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image icon on the page (FIG. to serve as the foreground image (see State Draw Order (Z-Order)). 5. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.11 or higher) 79 . Select the page to which you want to add or change a text (via the Workspace .. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. FIG. TPDesign4 (v2. the text will automatically be displayed on top of the bitmap. 2. FIG.Icon Slot field 3.Pages tab). 65). 63 States tab of the Properties Control window .Working With Pages Adding an Icon to a Page You can apply an image Icon directly to a Page in your project. where you can select the desired icon. In the States tab of the Properties Control window.) button (FIG.Text field Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog. you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position. Alternatively. 64).Pages tab).Icon Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image. 1. 65 States tab of the Properties Control window . unless otherwise directed via the Draw Order selection by the user (see the Draw Order (Z-Order) section on page 206). you can type directly into the Text field. If you don't see the desired image icon file listed in the Select Resource dialog. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. click on the Text field to enable the browse (.

68). 4.Working With Pages Also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing page text..Text Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the text. 69 States tab of the Properties Control window . any text that won't fit on the selected Page may not be visible. 3. depending on the text justification setting and the size of the Page. 68 States tab of the Properties Control window .Text Color field Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog where you can select a color for the Page text.FIG. 67 States tab of the Properties Control window .) button (FIG. Click Word Wrap. 80 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .) button (FIG. FIG. FIG. and select whether to wrap text that doesn't fit on a single line on the selected Page (Yes or No . 66).Word Wrap field If you select No. Click on Font in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (.... 69). FIG. Select Text Color in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (. 5. 67). 6.Font field Select the desired font (in the Font dialog). Click Text Justification in the States tab of the Properties Control window to set the justification of the text on the page (FIG. 66 States tab of the Properties Control window . if any exists. FIG.

In the Properties Control window . at the top most level are Panel Names. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources. deleting the last remaining page is not allowed. Popup Page or Button. Pasting Pages You may paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied page onto: (1) an active Design View window (2) the panel name in the Workspace Navigator (3) the folder named Pages Pasting a page onto the Popup Pages folder (which is for popup pages only) is not allowed.11 or higher) 81 . therefore. TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Pages Displaying a Video Source on a Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. and a Popup Pages folder (containing Popup pages).States Tab. Immediately below the panel names is a Pages folder (containing Pages). The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG. All panels must include at least one page.Video Fill field 3. To apply a video fill to a Page: 1. and select Edit > Delete. select the page to delete in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). Select (or a create) a Page in your project. Copying/Pasting Pages Copying Pages In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). The program will prompt you to verify the page deletion first. 70): FIG. You can copy a page either by selecting a Page only (ensuring that no buttons are selected) in an active Design View window. 2. or by single-clicking on a page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) then clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu (or the Copy button in the main toolbar). Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page. Deleting Pages From a Project To delete a page from the active project. 70 States tab of the Properties Control window .

Specify a template for the resulting filenames in the Filename Template field. 6. Use the checkboxes in the Pages and Popups lists to select which Pages and Popup Pages to export. The default setting is 100% (no scaling). FIG. Select Export information overlay to include any function code information this is currently being displayed on the Design View at the time of selection in the exported Page image file. Use the Scale% up and down arrows indicate a percentage to down-scale the exported images.Working With Pages Exporting Pages as Image Files Use the options in the Export Page Images dialog to export one or Pages in the current Project as image files: 1. this option is disabled. Use the browse button (. PNG or BMP) for the resulting image files from the File Format dropdown. If JPG is selected. Specify a target directory for the exported image files in the Export Directory field. it will export the buttons in the (default) Off state. with the button's current display state. 82 TPDesign4 (v2. Select Export current display state for buttons to capture the Pages as they are currently displayed in the Design View. If this option is not selected. 9. If this option is not selected. If this option is not selected. By default. only the Page underneath any currently displayed function codes will be exported. Select Export popup pages shown on pages to include any Popup Pages that are being displayed on the Design View at the time of selection in the exported Page image file. 4. Select Panel > Export Page Images to open the Export Page Images dialog (FIG. 8.. the template is set to include the Panel file name and the Page name into the generated image's file name. 3. this option is enabled.) to navigate to a target directory via the Browse For Folder dialog. this option is enabled. 5. By default. you can select the desired level of image compression 7. use $P to insert the Panel name and $p to insert the Page name into the exported file's name. Select a image file type (JPG. 71). based on the File Format selection.. only the Page underneath any currently viewed Popup Pages will be exported. By default. As described on the dialog. By default. 71 Export Page Images dialog 2.11 or higher) . The file extension is automatically.

The options in the Print Preview window toolbar include: Print: Prints the current page view Next Page: Displays the next page of the selected file Prev Page: Displays the previous page of the selected file One Page/Two Page: Toggles the page view to one or two pages. Zoom In: Zooms in on the page view Zoom Out: Zooms out from the page view Close: Closes the Print Preview window If you don't have a printer installed on your PC. This option is enabled only if the active file is longer than one page. in the Print Preview window (FIG. 72).11 or higher) 83 . the File > Print and File > Print Preview options invoke a message alerting you to install a printer. 72 Print Preview window Each page and popup page in the project is printed one per page. TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Pages Printing Pages Select File > Print Preview to display a preview of the pages and popup pages in the active project. FIG. as they will appear when printed.

Working With Pages 84 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

top. 73 Add Popup Page dialog 2. and click to select the desired border style for the popup page. and contain only one state. To position the Popup manually. can be assigned a border style and border color. FIG.11 or higher) 85 . as well as left. 73). Use the Position fields when you need to achieve exact positioning. Refer to the Using the Popup Draw Tool section on page 87 for details.Working With Popup Pages Working With Popup Pages Overview Popup pages are similar to pages in some respects as they are a container for buttons. Select Panel > Add Popup Page (or click the toolbar icon) to open the Add Popup Page dialog (FIG. you can click and drag to position it manually. Enter a descriptive name for the new popup page in the Name field (avoid using inappropriate file name characters . as well as some special properties that apply only to popup pages.see the Inappropriate File Name Characters section on page 29). which allows you to quickly create new popup pages. You must first select a Popup Page (in the Workspace window) in order to enable the Show Popup Page option in the Page menu. relative to the upper-left corner of the page which is 0. enter Left and Top coordinates (in pixels. 4.0) for the desired placement of the popup page when it displayed on the panel. they may have up to one address port / address code and up to one channel port / channel code combination. 3. you must first enable the Show Popup Pages option in the Page menu. Creating a Popup Page TPD4 features the Popup Draw tool. TPDesign4 (v2. The minimum size for popup pages is 15 pixels in height or width. 1. In the Position fields. Beyond these properties popup pages have many typically button specific properties. unlike pages. Click the down-arrow to open the Border Style drop-down menu. Popup pages. You can also set it's position manually by dragging it wherever you want it to appear. Once the Popup is displayed on the page. in a way that is similar to drawing new buttons. width or height values.

. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog.) next to Text Color to open the Colors dialog. Set the Border color: a.. Set the Text color (for text applied directly to the popup page): a. enter the desired Width and Height dimensions (in pixels) for the popup window. you must first enable the Show Popup Pages option in the Page menu. Single-click to select a new color from the list. the Popup will retain the dimensions specified. Click the browse button (. Click the browse button (. 74). 74 Colors dialog b. the Popup will always appear in the position specified. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the right side of the dialog.. The minimum size for popup pages is 15 pixels in height or width. You can also set the dimensions manually by dragging the sizing handles on the Popup. regardless of the page that you display on. any time you display the Popup (via the Page > Show Popup Pages option). Single-click to select a new color from the list. where you can select the Popup Page that you want to display on the page. To resize the Popup manually. Popup Pages may be created in any size beyond the minimum and up to the maximum size of the panel. Single-click to select a new color from the list. b.) next to Fill Color (in the States tab) to open the Colors dialog (FIG. In the Size fields. 6. b. FIG.. any time you display the Popup (via the Page > Show Popup Pages option).) next to Border Color (in the States tab) to open the Colors dialog. 5. you can click and drag the red handles on the Popup to resize it manually. Click the browse button (. 8. Set the Page Background color: a. Note that once you resize the Popup on the page. Once the Popup is displayed on the page.11 or higher) .. 7. This option opens the Select Popup Pages to Show dialog. regardless of the page that you display on..Working With Popup Pages Note that once you specify the position of the Popup on the page. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog. 86 TPDesign4 (v2.

Set the Font Name and Size. 2. Left-click inside the desired page (in the active Design View window). under the project to which the page was added. Using the Popup Draw Tool The Popup Draw Tool (FIG. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. Click OK to add the new Popup Page to the active project. hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain the item to a square... 76) allows you to draw Popup Pages directly onto a page. and the result is the same as through standard means: 1. a. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index.Working With Popup Pages 9. 75). drag to draw the popup page to the desired size and shape. The new Popup Page will be displayed in the Workspace Navigator Pages folder. Use the Group drop-down list to assign the newly created popup page to an existing group. The minimum popup page size is 15 pixels in height or width.) next to Font to open the Choose Font dialog (FIG. A sample of the selected font type and size is displayed in the Sample window. if desired. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. FIG. click and hold the Button Draw tool (in the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar) for one second to open the drop-down menu containing the Popup Draw tool. TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 87 . 76 Popup Draw Tool The technique is similar to drawing a button. Select Edit > Popup Draw Tool (or click the toolbar button) to activate the Popup Draw tool. When using the Button Draw or Popup Draw tools. When using the Selection tool. FIG. 75 Choose Font dialog b. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. hold down the ALT key while clicking and dragging in a Design View window to move the current selections without selecting anything new on the mouse press (useful for moving popup pages whose entire area is filled with buttons). Click the browse button (. and while holding the left mouse button down. To access the Popup Draw toolbar button. In most cases. 11. 10.

3. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Select File > Save to save your changes. This is a visual indication that the newly created popup has the Edit Focus. Edit the (Off) state properties as desired. click on the Popup Page area in the Design View (as opposed to a button on the page). 6. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting). In most cases. Setting General Properties: Popup Pages Use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page properties. select from a drop-down menu. as opposed to clicking on the item. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. or both. Depending on the item selected. Use this table to set the popup page's programming properties.Working With Popup Pages When using the Selection tool. Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size. 7. Setting Popup Page Properties Popup Pages have a set of Page Properties that can be configured via the fields in the Properties Control Window. 4. Programming and States). With an item selected in a Design View window. The Programming tab of the Properties Control window displays programming-related properties for the popup page in a editable table. To set Popup Page-level properties. On Show Group Timeout Modal Show Effect Show Effect X/Y Pos Show Effect Time Hide Effect Hide Effect X/Y Pos 88 TPDesign4 (v2. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. you can either set the item manually. With the Popup Page selected. The following general properties are supported at the popup page level: Name Left Top Width Height Reset Pos. The General tab of the Properties Control window displays general (non-states related) properties for the popup page in a editable table. Upon the creation of a popup page. Lasso selection forces you to draw a square around the outside of the item to select it. you will see selection handles appear on the outsides of the popup that are small yellow squares with red interiors. The States tab of the Properties Control window displays state-related information for the new popup in a editable table. separated into three tabs (General. The General tab contains a table that lists the properties for the active popup page. hold down the CTRL key while clicking and dragging to force a "lasso" selection to occur (even if the mouse was clicked over a button or Popup Page shown on the Page). 5.11 or higher) . Use this table to set the popup page's general properties. the Properties Control window displays the properties available for the Popup Page. To edit any of the listed button properties.

or both. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. The Programming tab contains a table that lists program-related properties (Address and Channel Port/Channel Code assignments) for the active popup page. To edit any of the listed button properties. The following programming properties are supported at the popup page level: Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Setting States Properties: Popup Pages Use the State tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page state properties. The following state properties are supported at the popup page level: Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Video Fill Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2. select from a drop-down menu.11 or higher) 89 . you can either set the item manually. To edit any of the listed button properties.Working With Popup Pages Setting Programming Properties: Popup Pages Use the Programming tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page properties. select from a drop-down menu. The State tab contains a table that lists the state properties for the active popup page. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. or both. you can either set the item manually. Depending on the item selected. Depending on the item selected.

With the selection of one or more buttons on the page in conjunction with a popup page selection. 2. all five border tools (if a border has been applied to the popup page).. Renaming a Popup Page To rename any Popup Page in the active project. 78 Renaming a Popup Page Adding a Fill Color To a Popup Page 1. FIG. In the States tab of the Properties Control window.Pages tab). 78). 4. as well as apply any of the options from the Aspect Ratio tool. Click OK to close the Colors dialog. simply click on a Popup Page entry in the Workspace and type directly into the text field (FIG. all of the existing Drawing Assist tools are available to allow you to size and align their popup page(s) with existing buttons on the page.11 or higher) . you can use the Center Horizontal and Center Vertical. Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog. Position Assist Tools toolbar Size Assist Tools toolbar FIG.) button (FIG. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (via the Workspace . 79). and select the color that you want to apply to the Popup Page.. the Size to Image tool (if an image has been placed on the popup page). you can utilize several of the Drawing Assist tools available via the Position Assist Tools and Size Assist Tools toolbars and the Layout menu to edit the size and position of the popup page (FIG. 77 Position Assist Tools and Size Assist Tools toolbars With only the popup page selected. click on the Fill Color field to enable the browse (. 79 States tab of the Properties Control window .Fill Color field 3. FIG. 90 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Popup Pages Drawing Assist Support for Popup Pages Once a popup page is displayed on a main Page in the Design View. 77).

2. FIG. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (via the Workspace . where you can select the desired icon. click on the Bitmap field to enable the browse (. 4. FIG. 80 States tab of the Properties Control window .Icon Slot field 3.Working With Popup Pages Adding a Bitmap to a Popup Page You can apply a bitmap directly to a Popup Page in your project. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog.) button. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. 82 States tab of the Properties Control window . 1.. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. to serve as the foreground image (see State Draw Order (Z-Order)). In the States tab of the Properties Control window.. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog. you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position. to serve as the background image. To scale an image to fit a target Page/panel.Pages tab). Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project. Adding an Icon to a Popup Page You can apply an image Icon directly to a Popup Page in your project.Bitmap field 3. Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog.. click on the Icon Slot field to enable the browse (.Pages tab). TPDesign4 (v2. To check the size of the Popup Pages in your project. 1. Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there.) button. 2. check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab). If you don't see the desired image icon file listed in the Select Resource dialog. open the image in any graphics editor program. where you can select the desired bitmap.Bitmap Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image.. 5. TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Popup Page.11 or higher) 91 . 6. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change an image icon (via the Workspace . 81 States tab of the Properties Control window . FIG. and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Page/panel. Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image on the Popup Page.

Icon Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image.) button (FIG.. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog. 83 States tab of the Properties Control window . you can type directly into the Text field.) button (FIG. 84 States tab of the Properties Control window . if any exists.Text Color field Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog where you can select a color for the Popup Page text. You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text. 84). Since G4 panels utilize address and channel port/address codes (and possess a single state).. you can display text directly on a Popup Page in your project.. Select Text Color in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (. 4.. FIG. Click on Font in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (. FIG.. the text will automatically be displayed on top of the bitmap.) button (FIG.Text field Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog.Font field 92 TPDesign4 (v2. 85 States tab of the Properties Control window . 86). 85). Alternatively. 5. FIG.Pages tab).. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change a text (via the Workspace . 1. and type the page text as desired (up to 4096 characters).11 or higher) . Adding Text to a Popup Page Refer to the True Type Font Support section on page 6 for details on supported text. Also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing page text. click on the Text field to enable the browse (. unless otherwise directed via the Draw Order selection by the user (see the Draw Order (Z-Order) section on page 206). If you are also displaying a bitmap on the Popup Page. 3. Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image icon on the Popup Page. FIG. 2. 86 States tab of the Properties Control window .Working With Popup Pages 4. In the States tab of the Properties Control window.

FIG. In the Properties Control window .States Tab. To create a Popup Page group: 1. 6. 87). 2. and select whether to wrap text that doesn't fit on a single line on the selected Popup Page (Yes or No . 87 States tab of the Properties Control window .Group field TPDesign4 (v2. The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG. In the Properties Control window (General tab). 89 States tab of the Properties Control window . 5. Click Word Wrap. FIG. depending on the text justification setting and the size of the Popup Page. 90 States tab of the Properties Control window . Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. 88). Click Text Justification in the States tab of the Properties Control window to set the justification of the text on the Popup Page (FIG. Select a popup page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). Popup Page or Button. 2.Word Wrap field If you select No. FIG. any text that won't fit on the selected Popup Page may not be visible. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources. To apply a video fill to a Popup Page: 1. 88 States tab of the Properties Control window . 90). Select (or a create) a Popup Page in your project.Text Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the text. FIG.11 or higher) 93 .Video Fill field 3. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page.Working With Popup Pages Select the desired font (in the Font dialog). click Group to activate the text field (FIG. Creating Popup Page Groups Popup Page Groups provide a mechanism to group popup pages into mutually exclusive groups for display purposes. 89): FIG.

select the popup page in the Workspace Navigator. The program will prompt you to verify the popup page deletion first. FIG. drag the desired popup page(s) into the desired group folder or set the group association via the Group field in the Properties Control window (FIG. Pasting Popup Pages You can paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied popup page onto: (1) an active Design View (2) the panel name in the Panel Navigator (3) the folder named Popup Pages Pasting a popup page onto another page or popup page in the Panel Navigator (which is only a paste target for buttons) or onto the folder named Pages (which is for pages only) is not allowed. Deleting Popup Pages From a Project To delete a popup page from the active project. or set the Group field to None in the Properties Control window. and select Edit > Delete. 92).Group field To remove a popup page from a group. 92 States tab of the Properties Control window . or by single-clicking on a page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) then clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu (or the Copy button in the main toolbar). To place a popup page in a particular popup group: In the Workspace Window. select the popup page to delete in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). . and drag it out of the group. 94 TPDesign4 (v2. 91). The named Popup Group folder is created under the Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator Pages tab (FIG. 4. Copying/Pasting Popup Pages Copying Popup Pages You can copy a popup page either by selecting a Popup Page only (ensuring that no buttons are selected) in an active Design View window. 91 Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator 5.Working With Popup Pages 3.11 or higher) . Enter a name for the popup group folder. FIG.

Show Popup Page. you can drag and drop a Popup Page from the Workspace Window onto a Design View window to show the selected Popup Page. To hide all Popup Pages: Select Hide All Popup Pages in the Page menu. TPDesign4 (v2. 93 Main Toolbar . To show a Popup Page: Select a Popup Page in the Workspace Window (Popup Pages tab). The Hide All Popup Pages toolbar button is available on the Main toolbar only. the Workspace Navigator context menu or the toolbar buttons contained in the Main toolbar (FIG.Working With Popup Pages Show/Hide Popup Pages The Show Popup Page and Hide Popup Page options can be selected via the Page menu. Additionally. or click the Hide All Popup Pages toolbar button. and select Show Popup Page (or click the toolbar button). Hide Popup Page & Hide All Popup Pages buttons This option deals only with showing a popup page (selected in the workspace) on a page that is currently open in the design view. To hide a selected Popup Page: Select a Popup Page in the Workspace Window (Popup Pages tab). FIG. and select Hide Popup Page (or click the toolbar button).11 or higher) 95 . Design View context menu. 93).

Working With Popup Pages 96 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

Joystick buttons only use the Off state. TPDesign4 (v2. Multi-state buttons are used to create animation effects. not associated with any specific functionality. List Box: Utilizes a collection of subordinate buttons to display either dynamic or static data as a scrollable list.Select to draw Popup Pages. and select from the list (see List Box Buttons). Button Draw Tools Within the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar is the Button Draw Tools drop-down (FIG. List Box Draw Tool . Multi-State Bargraph: Level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. there is no On state associated with them. Bargraph: Level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. Joystick: Vertical and horizontal direction controllers that can be used for pan and tilt control (typically for camera operation). Popup Draw Tool . Multi-state bargraph buttons also allow you to create custom bargraph sliders. except List Box buttons). Multi-State General: Basic multi-state buttons that can also be used for most touch panel functions. 94 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar Click and hold the Button Draw Tool to select from the other types of Draw Tools: Button Draw Tool . Because Joystick buttons don't work in the same way as the other button types (in that they don't generate pushes/releases). Computer Control: Allow you to connect to a PC running a VNC server for remote control applications. Text Input: Intended only to display (non-interactive) text on the panel.11 or higher) 97 . and support up to 256 states. 94): Button Draw Tool Popup Draw Tool List Box Draw Tool FIG.Select to draw buttons (all types.Select to draw List Box Buttons. and support up to 256 states.Working With Buttons Working With Buttons Overview TPDesign4 supports the following button types: General: Basic dual-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions. List box buttons can be used to allow end-users to view data in list form. TakeNote: Allow you to use a G4 panel to annotate to either a windows desktop or on other G4 panels.

Buttons are always drawn in the Off State. 95): Button Draw Tool FIG. 4. The Button Selection/Draw toolbar allows you to control certain new button creation properties for both the Off and the On state of a button. hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting). oval or diamond border types. To toggle between Off and On states. 2. 97 New Button The maximum number of buttons per page / popup page = 500. you may notice the slider bar appearing partially outside of the button border. select Edit > Button Draw Tool from the main menu. programming. 3. 96 Drawing a New Button Hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain the button to a square. 1. If you see this. This is a result of scaling the button smaller than what the selected border requires to accommodate the slider bar. indicating edit focus. Click and hold the Button Draw Tool to access a drop-down of the other types of Draw Tools (FIG. 95 Button Draw Tool (Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar) Alternatively. 5. Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size. and state-specific properties for the selected button.Working With Buttons Drawing a Button Within the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar is the Button Draw Tool. try using "Circle 50" rather than "Circle 100"). Refer to Properties Window for details. Use the fields and options in the General. 97). You will see a sizing rectangle as you drag the mouse. Select the Button Draw Tool (used for all button types other than List Box Buttons). 98 TPDesign4 (v2. To complete the button draw action. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse diagonally. Minimum button size is 4 x 4 pixels. release the left mouse button (FIG. and place your cursor within the boundaries of an open Design View. 96). FIG. Experiment with different border types to get the results you're after. try using a "smaller" border (i. 6. When using the circle. Programming and States tabs of the Properties Window to specify general. Open the Page (or Popup page) that the button will be added to. With an item selected in a Design View window. single-click the State button.e. indicating the size of the button you are drawing (FIG. Upon the creation of a button on a page (or popup page) you will see selection handles appear on the outsides of the button that are small yellow squares with red interiors.11 or higher) . FIG.

Select File > Save to save your changes. if the button has no text. However. This is where the Lock Button Name option (General tab of the Properties Control Window) comes into play. the button is automatically renamed to reflect the bitmap file name (i. Furthermore. "Background"). Additionally. when you apply an icon to the button. Select View > Button Preview to preview the button (click Push to simulate a button press) in the Button Preview window (FIG. 98 New Button . click Lock Button Name and select Yes to prevent the button from being automatically renamed by the program when you edit the text or bitmap assignment(s). the button is again renamed to reflect the updated text.11 or higher) 99 . by default the buttons are automatically given a sequential name composed of the button number (relative to the number of buttons already created in the Project). the button name is automatically updated with either the latest text or bitmap assignment. For example if you create a new button (which is automatically named "Button 9"). At any point in the design process. based on the text and/or bitmap applied to the button: If you apply text to the button. 8. via the Name field.Button Preview window Generated Button Names When new buttons are created. TPDesign4 (v2. By default. Text on a button always overrides the presence of a bitmap. if there is text associated with a button and you add an icon. and does not require a Save operation. Note that if you change the text. If there is text associated with a button.e. Note that this name change occurs on the fly. any time you change the bitmap or the text on the button. note that the button is automatically renamed to "Welcome". and you add a bitmap. However. the button text is substituted for the button number. 98): FIG. the Lock Button Name option is set to Off. the button name will not change. Lock Button Name does not prevent you from manually renaming the button. if the button has no text. then add the text "Welcome".Working With Buttons 7. the button name will not change. However. TPD4 goes further in automatically generating a descriptive name for the button. when you apply a bitmap to the button. the button is automatically renamed to reflect the icon's name. However.

select the button in the Design View window. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. select Type to access the drop-down menu of Supported Button Types (FIG. Refer to the TPD4 online help for previews of each Border Style. If no Border Style was specified (none). 101 State Properties . In the General tab of the Properties Window. 100 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Buttons Specifying the Button Type To specify the button type for any button: 1. 99 Button Type drop-down menu (General Property) 3. For List Box buttons. then the borders listed here are limited to those contained in the selected Border Style. Adding Text to a Button Since button text is a state-specific property. 100): FIG. FIG.. FIG.11 or higher) . you can type directly into the Text field. Alternatively. 101). 99). you can add or change the button text via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1. Select or a create a button. 2. Specifying a Button Border To specify a border style for a button.Text 3. then all border names are available in the provided list. this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column. and type the button text as desired.. click on the Text field in the state that you want add the text to. Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog (FIG.) button (FIG. 2. and select a border style from the Border Name (State) Property (FIG. This enables the browse (. Select the button to which you want to add or change text (with the Selection tool). 100 Border Name drop-down menu (State Property) If a Border Style was specified (in the General tab). Select the desired button type. 102).

4. the panel designer may be forced to use a pre-rendered graphic to display the desired text.Working With Buttons FIG. The size of the font required to support the language (particularly in the case of East Asian languages that utilize ideograms) might be prohibitive due to limits of available memory on the target device.11 or higher) 101 . Click anywhere outside of the Text field to set the button text (or click OK to close the Enter Text dialog). and Devangari. Foreign Language Support for Text For page and button state text properties. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. Button text is state-specific. You can also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing button text. Hebrew. TPDesign4 (v2. or only on specific states. so use the Text field in the state that you want to change. In order to display such languages on a page or button state. See the True Type Font Support section on page 6. if any exists. Once imported into the panel project. If the size of the font exceeds the memory available on the device. the panel designer must create a pre-rendered graphic of the desired text (using a suitable graphics application) that can then be imported into the TPD4 panel project as a graphic (icon or bitmap). These languages include (but are not limited to) Arabic. TPD4 supports non-complex scripts (those that can be printed correctly without the use of a rendered script) to the extent that the True Type font currently selected for that state supports the language in question. 102 Enter Text dialog You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text. so keep in mind wether you want the text to occur on all states. or use the Text field under All States to add the text to every state in the button. TPD4 (and the G4 firmware itself) do not provide explicit support for languages that utilize complex scripts. the graphic can be assigned to one or more page or button states.

11 or higher) . Select the button that you want to add or change the fill color on (with the Selection tool). 103). In the States tab of the Properties Control window. FIG. 104 Colors dialog 4...). Select the button to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (with the Selection tool). Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. This enables the browse button (. Click OK to close the Colors dialog.. 3. so use the Fill Color field in the state that you want to change. Changing the Button Fill Color Since button fill color is a state-specific property. so keep in mind wether you want the Fill Color to occur on all states. or only on specific states.Text Button Fill Colors are state-specific. so use the Fill Color field in the state that you want to change. you can add or change the button fill color via the State tab of the Properties Control window: 1. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. click on the Fill Color field in the state that you want to change the fill color on. This enables the browse (. click on the Fill Color field in the state that you want add the Fill Color to. or use the Fill Color field under All States to change the fill color on every state in the button. Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog. FIG. 2. and select the color that you want to apply to the Button/State (FIG. 2.Working With Buttons Adding a Fill Color To a Button Since Fill Color is a state-specific property. 102 TPDesign4 (v2.) button (FIG.. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. 103 State Properties . or use the Fill Color field under All States to add the Fill Color to every state in the button. you can add or change the button Fill Color assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1. 104).

Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. so keep in mind wether you want the bitmap to occur on all states.) button (FIG. Click the browse button (. 2. FIG. FIG. 105). Select the button to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (with the Selection tool). 3. or use the Bitmap field under All States to add the bitmap to every state in the button.Bitmap Button bitmaps are state-specific.. 105 State Properties . Adding a Bitmap to a Button Since bitmap assignment is a state-specific property. Click OK to close the Colors dialog.. you can add or change the button bitmap assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1.. where you can change the fill color. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. or only on specific states. TPDesign4 (v2. 4.Working With Buttons 3.. Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project (see the Importing Image Files Into Your Project section on page 54). click on the Bitmap field in the state that you want add the bitmap to. This enables the browse (. 106). 106 Select Resource dialog Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog.11 or higher) 103 .) to open the Colors dialog. where you can select the desired bitmap (FIG. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. so use the Bitmap field in the state that you want to change.

108 State Properties .Bitmap Justification drop-down menu Select Absolute to manually position the image. 107 State Properties . Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. open the image in any graphics editor program. To scale an image to fit a target Button. where you can select the desired icon (FIG. Select the button that you want to add an Icon to (with the Selection tool).) button (FIG. Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image on the button (FIG. 109). so use the Icon Slot field in the state that you want to change.11 or higher) . and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Button. click on the Icon Slot field in the state that you want add the icon to. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. Adding an Icon to a Button With TPD4. or use the Icon Slot field under All States to add the icon to every state in the button.. check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab). This enables the browse (. you can add or change the button Icon assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog. 107). 5. FIG. 2. or only on specific states. Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there. you can apply Icons to buttons in your project. to serve as the foreground image (see Z-Order for details).Icon Slot Button icons are state-specific. FIG. 3. TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Button. 108). 104 TPDesign4 (v2..Working With Buttons 4. so keep in mind wether you want the icon to occur on all states. Since Icon assignment is a state-specific property. To check the size of the Buttons in your project.

5. 109 Select Resource dialog If you don't see the desired image file listed in the Select Resource dialog. 110 State Properties . 4.Icon Justification drop-down menu Select Absolute to manually position the image. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.Working With Buttons FIG. Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the icon on the button (FIG. 110). FIG.11 or higher) 105 . TPDesign4 (v2. you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position.

11 or higher) . Generally speaking. the icon actually retains its original rectangular shape. but will display without the background (FIG. 112): FIG. you can take advantage of transparency support in TPD4. by making the background color transparent. 112 Button With Image and Icon Obviously you don't want that unsightly box framing the icon! You need to edit the icon's fill color and make the background color transparent. you will apply a fill to the areas that you want to appear transparent (in most cases the background). 113): FIG. just like you would for any other color in the palette. since they are usually slightly smaller in size. there are a few key concepts to understand: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4. to accommodate layering of images without trying to match colors across layers. and select transparent as the fill color. When using images with transparencies in TPD4. you'll wind up with something like this (FIG. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. you can effectively change the shape of the image. 113 Button With Image and Icon using transparent background Check the documentation for your image-editing program to learn about applying transparency to your images. 106 TPDesign4 (v2. However. only PNGs accommodate transparency as a color.Working With Buttons Working With Transparent Backgrounds When you are applying an icon. With a transparent background color. Raster images are always created in the shape of a rectangle. Typically transparency is used in images for the background color. For example. JPGs are recommended over PNGs. Unless you are actually using transparency. 111 Button With Image and you apply an icon that doesn't use transparent as the background color. 111): FIG. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors. if you have a button with an image (FIG.

States Tab. TPDesign4 (v2. Popup Page or Button. use the All States option in the Properties Control window (States tab). A page flip is a button attribute that allows the user to press a button to "flip" through different panel pages. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources (FIG. To apply the video fill across all states. 115 Text Effect drop-down menu (State Property) For List Box buttons. organize and cross-link your control pages. FIG. Adding Text Effects To add a text effect to a button. Alternatively. you can use Ctrl+A to select all states in the State Manager window.Working With Buttons Displaying a Video Source on a Button TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. Typically you would set up a different control page for each piece of equipment. Select (or a create) a Button in your project. A basic example would be a button labeled "DVD Player" on a main page that when touched. 114). Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the button. opens a DVD Player page. 115): FIG. Page Flips A basic touch panel page design concept is the Page Flip. Organization of device controls is essential to good touch panel design. and select a text effect from the Text Effect (State) Property (FIG. To apply a video fill to a Button: 1. 2. this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column. be sure to consider all of the button states when applying the video fill. Since this is a state-oriented setting. 114 Video Fill drop-down menu (State Property) The Video Fill options presented will depend on the panel type selected for this project. select the button in the Design View window. In the Properties Control window . Refer to the TPD4 online help for previews of each Text Effect. and page flips allow you to separate. 3.11 or higher) 107 . containing only buttons that control the DVD player.

Depending on the type of page flip action selected. popup page or popup group to open. FIG. FIG.) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog (FIG. and access a drop-down list of Page Flip Actions (FIG. 108 TPDesign4 (v2. Select a (or create a new) button. 117). 118). 116). 117 Button Page Flip Actions dialog (Page Flip Actions drop-down menu) 5. you may need to also specify the target page. Click the Add command button to create a new page flip for this button. See the Page Flip Actions section on page 109. 116 Button Page Flip Actions dialog 4.Working With Buttons Creating a Page Flip 1. click on Page Flip to enable the editable field.. Click the down arrow in the Target column to select the target of the selected Page Flip Action (FIG. 3.. 2. Click the browse button (. In the Properties Control window (General tab).11 or higher) .

dropping a page will add a 'standard page' flip action. the drop will offer a list of all applicable page flip actions. and specify the target page.Working With Buttons FIG. Multiple Standard page flips are allowed. where you can set the type of page flip to apply to the selected button. 118 Button Page Flip Actions dialog (Target page selection) 6. you can also drag and drop a page or popup page from the Workspace window onto the Page Flip property in the Properties Window (General tab). click Page Flip in the Properties Control window (General tab) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog. Click the Add command button to access the Page Flip Actions drop-down list which allows you to select from a list of available page flip actions: Standard Page . By default. Repeat this process as desired to create multiple page flips on the button. Drag & Drop To Set Page Flips TPD4 supports a shortcut for adding page flips: Simply select the target page or popup page for the flip in the Workspace window (Pages tab). By default. Page Flip Actions With a button selected in a Design View window.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of standard pages in your project. Select a target popup page for the page flip (to show when the button is touched). dropping a page will add a 'standard page' flip action. you can also drag and drop a page or popup page from the Workspace window onto the Page Flip property in the Properties Control window (General tab).This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project. Alternatively. drag it into a Design View window and drop it onto a button to create a flip to that page or popup page. and dropping a popup will add a 'show popup' flip action to that button. Hide Popup .This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project. TPDesign4 (v2. the drop will offer a list of all applicable page flip actions. Show Popup . Select a target page for the page flip. Alternatively. drag it into a Design View window and drop it onto a button to create a flip to that page or popup page. Use the up and down arrows to re-arrange the order of the page flips if necessary. TPD4 supports a shortcut for adding page flips: Simply select the target page or popup page for the flip in the Workspace window (Pages tab). If dragged with the right mouse button.This selection sets the page flip to go to the previous page (relative to the order of existing page flips) when the button is touched. and dropping a popup will add a 'show popup' flip action to that button.11 or higher) 109 . Select a target popup page for the page flip (to hide when the button is touched). If dragged with the right mouse button. Previous Page . You can apply multiple page flips to any button.

which is not always necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows. Copying/Pasting Buttons The Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element (including buttons. You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry). Hide Popups on Page . Pasting Buttons You can paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied button or buttons onto: (1) a page or popup page name in the Workspace Navigator window . Select a target popup page group for the page flip (to hide when the button is touched). Multiple Popup actions like Toggle popup. Depending on the differences between the palette in the button's source project and the palette in the target project. and you perform a "Copy".This selection populates the Target list box with a list of standard pages in your project. the location or dimensions of the copied buttons exceeds the boundaries of the target popup page. If. Page Flip Forget . but does not retain the source page in the page flip stack (which is used to execute previous page flips). even individual button properties displayed in the Properties Control window) which has the current Edit Focus. you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field. when copying buttons from a page to a popup page. and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window).11 or higher) . This allows the user start on page one. the pasted button will use the palette that is currently active in the project that the button is copied into (as opposed to the palette that was used to create the button). For example. 110 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Buttons Toggle Popup . bitmaps. flip to page three. Copying Buttons Copying a button or buttons from a page or popup page is possible by selecting the desired buttons in an active Design View window then either selecting Edit > Copy from the main menu or by clicking the Copy button in the main toolbar. only adjusting the properties required for them to properly fit on the target popup page. If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties Control window.Pages tab (no open Design View window required) or (2) the active Design View window. Hide Popup Group . Hide All Popups . this can cause color shifting on the button. Use this option when you do not wish to return to the page that initiated the page flip when a subsequent previous page flip action is performed.This selection flips to the page specified. Show Popup and Hide Popup for the same Popup Page are allowed on the same button. Select the page that you want to hide the popups on when the button is touched. Select a target popup page for the page flip (to toggle hide/show when the button is touched). When you copy a button from one project into another project that is using a different palette. since it is not a valid Address Port number. This means the last thing selected. then with a previous page flip go directly back to page one. the pasted items will attempt to maintain their size.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project.This selection sets the page flip to clear all popup pages when the button is touched. if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port".This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup page groups in your project. flip to page two. then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window.

Once a property has been modified. You can also select multiple buttons. You can de-select a button by either selecting another button.Working With Buttons Editing Button Properties Edit Button Properties via the Properties Window: select the button property that you wish to modify. TPDesign4 (v2. you will be notified via a message. Click and drag outside the boundaries of the desired buttons to perform a marquis selection. To select all available buttons on a page or popup page you may either use the Ctrl+A hotkey. and enter (type or select) a new value in the corresponding field.11 or higher) 111 . If the value is inappropriate for the selected object. either press the Enter key. using any of the following techniques: Hold the Shift key and left-click. you may only act on the selected buttons on one page / popup page at a time. and the previous value will be replaced in the box. then clicking on the desired button. Although you may select and retain the selection of buttons on multiple pages. or select Edit > Select All from the main menu. the Prev or Next button. or by left-clicking on the background of the page or popup page. Editing Multiple Selections Buttons may be acted upon individually by clicking the Selection Tool from the toolbar or selecting Edit > Selection Tool from the main menu. or left click the mouse in any box other than the current box to apply the change.

States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound 112 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Buttons General Buttons General buttons are basic dual-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions. The following button properties are supported for General buttons: General Buttons . as opposed to other button types. select from a drop-down menu. To edit any of the properties in the table. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. and are not associated with a specific functionality. which have specific functionalities. 119 General Properties: Type (General button) Setting Properties: General Buttons Once you have created a General button. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. string and text length = 4096 characters. you can either set the item manually. Depending on the item selected. or both.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. Programming and State button properties.11 or higher) . FIG.

Use multi-state buttons when you want to utilize animation effects. or both. string and text length = 4096 characters. FIG. select from a drop-down menu. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 113 . Programming and State button properties.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style State Count Animate Time Up Animate Time Down Auto-Repeat Disabled Hidden Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. you can either set the item manually. The following button properties are supported for Multi-State General buttons: Multi-State General Buttons . Depending on the item selected. 120 General Properties: Type (Multi-State General button) Setting Properties: Multi-State General Buttons Once you have created a Multi-State General button. and that support up to 256 states. To edit any of the properties in the table. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General.Working With Buttons Multi-State General Buttons Multi-State General buttons are basic multi-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions.

This value determines the repeat time (in 1/1000th-second increments) for relative level control. Select a level control type for the selected button (Absolute. this value determines the amount of adjustment relative to the current level resulting from this button. if this value is set to 1000. the user can hold the button down for one second to cause the level to raise or lower repeatedly (according to the specified Level Control Value) without having to press the button each time. These options require the following additional parameters to be defined: Level Control Parameters • Level Port: • Level Code: • Level Control Value: Select or enter the port to which the Level code will be applied. Select AutoAssign to automatically assign the level code to this button. Set the top of the level range (0-255). For relative level control. Set the time (in 1/10th-second increments) that it takes to ramp from the bottom to the top of the specified range (default = 2). Select 0 (Setup port) or 1 as the level port for this button. • Range Time Up: • Range Time Down: 114 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . • Range Low: • Range High: • Level Control Repeat (Relative Level Control only): Set the bottom of the level range (0-255). this value can be entered as a positive integer (to raise the relative level setting) or a negative integer (to lower the relative level setting). For Absolute level control. Set the time (in 1/10th-second increments) that it takes to ramp from the top to the bottom of the specified range (default = 2). For example. this value determines the level value that will be recalled by this button.Working With Buttons Level Control Parameters The Level Control Type options (set in the Programming tab of the Properties Control Window) allow General and Multi-State General buttons to directly control a level without the need for NetLinx code. Relative: The button increments or decrements the current level value by a fixed amount. Relative or None): Absolute: The button acts like a preset and sets the level to the desired value. For Relative level control. Select or enter the level code sent to the master on the selected port.

To edit any of the properties in the table. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2. you can either set the item manually. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. or both. The following button properties are supported for Bargraph buttons: Bargraph General Buttons .Working With Buttons Bargraph Buttons Bargraph buttons are level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. select from a drop-down menu. Depending on the item selected. string and text length = 4096 characters. 121 General Properties: Type (Bargraph button) Setting Properties: Bargraph Buttons Once you have created a Bargraph button.11 or higher) 115 . FIG.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Value Direction Slider Name Slider Color Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/ edit general (non-state oriented) button properties.

and that (like Multi-State General buttons) support up to 256 states.11 or higher) .Working With Buttons Multi-State Bargraph Buttons Multi-State Bargraph buttons are level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound 116 TPDesign4 (v2. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Programming and State button properties. FIG. To edit any of the properties in the table. Use multi-state buttons when you want to utilize animation effects. Depending on the item selected. 122 General Properties: Type (Multi-State Bargraph button) Setting Properties: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons Once you have created a Multi-State Bargraph button. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. you can either set the item manually.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style State Count Disabled Hidden Value Direction Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. or both. select from a drop-down menu. The following button properties are supported for Multi-State Bargraph buttons: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons . string and text length = 4096 characters. Multi-State Bargraph buttons also allow you to create a custom bargraph slider (using an image icon).

The following formatting codes will be replaced with the identified values: $P .$ character TPDesign4 (v2.range low) $R .level percentage $V .range (range high . Formatting Codes Formatting codes can be used in the Text for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons. selectable via the General tab of the Properties Control window): FIG.range low) $$ .range high $A . 123 Slider Types Slider types are not available for Multi-State Bargraph buttons.range low $H .Working With Buttons Slider Types There are several slider types available for use with Bargraph buttons.adjusted level value (raw level value .raw level value $L .11 or higher) 117 .

Create a Multi-State Bargraph button. as on Multi-State General buttons. that there is no slider indicated on the button (in the Design View window). 124). Also note that unlike regular bargraph buttons. use up to 255 states to animate the button action. you touch the bargraph button and move the slider up and down (or side to side on a horizontal Bargraph button). you'll be animating a change in levels as opposed to a push/release. FIG. 3. click the Browse button (. In the Icon X Offset state property. like you would for a normal Bargraph button. Rather than assign a prepared slider. there are no slider-oriented settings to make in the Properties Control window. Note that when you draw a Multi-State Bargraph button. move the icon into the position that you want to be the "start position" for the bargraph slider. The start position for Multi-State Bargraph buttons is always the bottom of the bargraph (representing the minimum level setting).Working With Buttons Creating a Custom Slider Multi-State Bargraph buttons work differently than regular Bargraph buttons. You adjust a level. or in the State Manager window. To create a custom slider: 1.11 or higher) . In the case of Bargraph buttons. 5. Set the Icon Justification to Absolute. 4. you can animate an icon across the states to serve as a custom slider. like multi-state General buttons. Apply a Icon Slot assignment to State 1. Custom sliders on Multi-state Bargraph Buttons work on the panel basically the same as regular sliders.) to open the Image and Text Positioning dialog (FIG. This is because multi-state bargraph buttons.. In the Image and Text Positioning dialog. 2. 124 Image and Text Positioning dialog 6.. 118 TPDesign4 (v2. Select State 1 in the Properties Control Window (States tab).

126): FIG. and ending at the top. The user will always press and drag the slider up and down to adjust the level. you'll want to delete the "extra" state at the end of the sequence. or in the State Manager window. the smoother and more accurate the slider will be. A "short" bargraph button would require less states to create a smooth motion than a "long" one (that for example spans the entire touch panel page).11 or higher) 119 . move the icon into the position that you want to be the "end position" for the bargraph slider.e. Ctrl+click to select just the first and last states. The end position for Multi-State Bargraph buttons is always the top of the bargraph (representing the maximum level setting). but while regular bargraph buttons can be set as either horizontal or vertical. 125 State Manager Window (showing Multi-State Bargraph button with 10 states) Keep in mind that the more states used to animate the movement of the icon. Keep this in mind when setting up a custom slider. In the Image and Text Positioning dialog. Always begin the icon animation starting (at State 1) at the bottom position. TPDesign4 (v2. In the State Manager window. 7. which does not contain the icon (the original State 2 setting). FIG. Generally. The button action is the same (press the bargraph slider and drag to adjust the level). the icon’s new position in the last State is indicated in the State Manager window (FIG. 9. the size of the button that the icon will travel across) needed for the slider should be taken in to consideration as well.Working With Buttons One key difference between regular and Multi-State Bargraph buttons is the way they work on the panel. 126 State Manager Window (new Icon position for final State) 10. duplicating State 1 (containing the icon). Select the last State in the Properties Control Window (States tab). Add States to the button (up to 255 total). Multi-State Bargraph buttons are always oriented vertically. 125 shows the State Manager Window with 10 states: FIG. The range of motion (i. When you close the Image and Text Positioning dialog. 8.

Touch Map images allow you to use irregular shapes for active bargraph buttons. 120 TPDesign4 (v2. 127). Working With Touch Maps TPD4 supports Touch Maps for Multi-State Bargraph buttons. 128 General Properties . FIG. and click and drag the cursor up and down within the button to move the slider up and down. If you select Touch Map as the Value Direction (General property).11 or higher) . 128).Working With Buttons 11. you can also utilize the other tweeners in conjunction with the custom slider to create complex color transition effects. open the Button Preview window. FIG. The results of the tweening are displayed in the State Manager window (FIG. an additional state property is enabled (displayed directly below Value Direction in the Properties Control window) called Touch Map (FIG.Touch Map Click the browse button (..) next to Touch Map to select an image to use as a Touch Map (via the Resource Manager). 127 State Manager Window (showing tweened Icon Position) To preview the custom slider in action. Remember. Right-click on either of the selected states and select Slot Position from the Tweeners sub-menu. The alpha values in the selected image represent the areas where touch will be registered.. See the Working With Animation Effects section on page 223. and the red-channel values represent the overall value to change the control to.

you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. Depending on the item selected. string and text length = 4096 characters. as is reflected in the State tab of the Properties Control window. Setting Properties: Joystick Buttons Once you have created a Joystick button. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style Disabled Hidden Cursor Name Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Aux Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. The following button properties are supported for Joystick buttons: Joystick Buttons . To edit any of the properties in the table. 129 General Properties: Type (Joystick button) Because Joystick buttons don't work in the same way as the other button types (in that they don't generate pushes/releases). States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2. or both. Joystick buttons only use the Off state. there is no On state associated with them. select from a drop-down menu. FIG.11 or higher) 121 .Working With Buttons Joystick Buttons Joystick buttons are vertical and horizontal direction controllers that can be used for pan and tilt control (typically for camera operation). you can either set the item manually. Programming and State button properties.

you can either set the item manually. Depending on the item selected. select from a drop-down menu. Programming and State button properties.Working With Buttons Text Input Buttons Text Input buttons are intended for user-input (using the on-screen keyboards) on the panel. FIG. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. or both. 130 General Properties: Type (Text Input button) Text Input buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers. The following button properties are supported for Text Input buttons: Text Input Buttons . States Properties Border Name Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Font Text Text Effect 122 TPDesign4 (v2. Setting Properties: Text Input Buttons Once you have created a Text Input button.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Password Character Display Type Max Text Length Input Mask Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Note: Maximum command. To edit any of the properties in the table. string and text length = 4096 characters.11 or higher) .

Only one range is allowed per field and the use of a range implies numeric entry only.11 or higher) 123 . Letter or digit (entry required). TPDesign4 (v2. The following table lists the available Input Marks Operators (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Operators < > ^ Causes all characters to be converted to lowercase. Causes all characters to be converted to uppercase. Input Mask Ranges Input Mask Ranges allow a user to specify the minimum and maximum numeric values for a given field. entry optional). The following table lists the available input mask ranges (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Ranges [ ] | Start Range End Range Range Separator Input Mask Next Field Characters Input Mask Next Field Characters allow the user to specify a list of characters that caused the keyboard to advance the focus to the next field when pressed instead of inserting the test into the text input area. The following table lists the available Input Mask Next Field characters (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Next Field Characters { } Start Next Field List End Next Field List Input Mask Operators Input Mask Operators change the behavior of the field in various ways. plus [+] and minus [-] signs not allowed).Working With Buttons Input Mask Characters The following table lists the available input mask characters. plus and minus signs not allowed). and which characters each input mask allows in any given position (for use with the Input Mask property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Characters 0 9 # L ? A a & C Digit (0 to 9. Letter (A to Z. plus and minus signs allowed). Any character or a space (entry required). Letter or digit (entry optional). Letter (A to Z. Digit or space (entry not required. entry required). entry required. Digit or space (entry not required. Any character or a space (entry optional). Sets the overflow flag for this field.

Computer Control buttons only use one state: Off. Computer Control buttons support password protection separate from any additional username/ password credentials that the user may require to access the remote system once the connection has been made. The following button properties are supported for Computer Control buttons: Computer Control Buttons . you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. select from a drop-down menu. States Properties Fill Color Text Color Overall Opacity 124 TPDesign4 (v2. 800x600 or 1024x768). To edit any of the properties in the table. string and text length = 4096 characters. Setting Properties: Computer Control Buttons Once you have created a Computer Control button. you can either set the item manually.11 or higher) . Depending on the item selected. Programming and State button properties. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. allowing you to control the PC via the Touch Panel interface (for remote control purposes). FIG.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Disabled Hidden Remote Host Remote Port Password Color Depth Compression Scale To Fit TakeNote Enabled Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. 131 General Properties: Type (Computer Control button) Computer Control buttons are constrained to one of three predefined sizes (640x480.Working With Buttons Computer Control Buttons Computer Control buttons provide a remote desktop to an attached PC running a VNC server. Computer Control buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers. or both.

FIG. 132 General Properties: Type (TakeNote button) TakeNote buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers. allowing you to use a G4 panel to annotate to either a windows desktop or on other G4 panels. you can either set the item manually. Programming and State button properties. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style Disabled Hidden TakeNote Host TakeNote Port Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. string and text length = 4096 characters. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap TPDesign4 (v2. The following button properties are supported for TakeNote buttons: TakeNote Buttons . Depending on the item selected.Working With Buttons TakeNote Buttons TakeNote buttons work in conjunction with G4 Computer Control to provide a remote desktop to an attached PC running a VNC server. or both. Setting Properties: TakeNote Buttons Once you have created a TakeNote button. select from a drop-down menu.11 or higher) 125 . To edit any of the properties in the table.

button fill color. This selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. 7. font size. 8. Select the Button Draw tool from the Selection/Draw toolbar (FIG. On the extreme left side of the toolbar. Of course. These selections become the default text settings for all subsequent buttons. Button Draw Tool FIG. you can quickly create sets of buttons that are visually consistent. you will see a button that will allow you to toggle the default choices for both the Off and the On state of a button. You can control the button type. Click the down-arrow on the first drop-down menu to the right of the State button to select the Type of button you want to create (default = general). The Drawing toolbar allows you to control certain new button creation properties for both the Off and the On state of a button. but cannot be docked in a vertical fashion. 133) to set the Border Color for the button. border family. 4. When the Button Draw tool is selected. until the Font and Font Size specifications are changed. as the drop down lists contained on the toolbar do not support this type of docking. until the Border Color setting is changed. This selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. This toolbar can either be free floating or docked. until the Fill Color setting is changed. 126 TPDesign4 (v2. until the Text Color setting is changed. Click the down-arrow on the second drop-down menu (to the right of the Button Type drop-down) to select a Border Style for the button. Click the down-arrow on the third palette button (see FIG. 6. 133) to set the Fill Color for the button. font. This toolbar is normally at the top of your screen and provides you with a mechanism for controlling various elements of future button creation. Use the next two drop-down menus to specify a Font and Font Size as the default text attributes for new buttons. This way. This selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. 3. border color and text color. Click the down-arrow on the second palette button (see FIG. 5. Button Type Border Type Font Toggle On/Off State properties Font Size Border Color Fill Color Text Color FIG. 134 Draw Tools (Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar) 2. until the Button Type selection is changed. the Drawing toolbar becomes activated. Buttons are always drawn in the Off State. 133 Drawing toolbar The settings that are specified in this toolbar become the default settings for all new buttons. Again.11 or higher) . 134). 133) to set the Text Color for the button. this selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. until the Border Style selection is changed. Click the down-arrow on the first palette button (see FIG. until the settings are changed. 133). this selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. To set new button parameters: 1.Working With Buttons Setting Default New Button Parameters Use the Drawing toolbar to set the default new button parameters (FIG.

TPDesign4 (v2. Vertical Spacing (Equal. use these commands to shift the selected button(s) up and down just one layer on the page (as opposed to placing them on just the top or bottom layer). select equal spacing. Decrease. To distribute buttons evenly on the page.Use these commands to control the vertical spacing between selected buttons. Center Horizontal/Vertical . Decrease.11 or higher) 127 .Use the Align commands to quickly align selected buttons on the page. and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button). Top.Use these commands to quickly center one or more selected buttons either Horizontally or Vertically on the page. relative to each other (not relative to the area of the page). 135 Order Assist toolbar Send to Front/Send To Back . select equal spacing. Position Assist toolbar FIG. Shift Up/Shift Down . Increase. then increase or decrease spacing as necessary. Choose which Align tool to use based on the shape and size of the selected buttons. Right. You must have at least three buttons selected to enable these options.Working With Buttons Using the Drawing Assist Features The Order Assist.Use these commands to control the horizontal spacing between selected buttons. and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button). You must select at least two buttons to enable the Align options. then increase or decrease spacing as necessary. Remove) .When you have one or more buttons that overlap on the page. Horizontal Center. Order Assist toolbar FIG. 135 describes the tools in the Order Assist toolbar: Send To Back Send To Front Shift Up Shift Down FIG. Vertical Center. You must have at least three buttons selected to enable these options. and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button).When you have one or more buttons that overlap on the page. Remove . use these commands to place the selected button(s) to either the top or bottom layer on the page. and the desired design effect. Increase. 136 describes the tools in the Position Assist toolbar: Align tools Horizontal Spacing tools Center tools FIG. To distribute buttons evenly on the page. Horizontal Spacing (Equal. Position Assist and Size Assist toolbars contain shortcuts to many layout and design control options for controlling various elements of existing button(s) size and position. 136 Position Assist toolbar Vertical Spacing tools Align: Left. Bottom .

35:1 Anamorphic Video Make Ideal For Border .These commands are like nudge controls for button width and height. Note that since all measurements in TPD4 are zero-based. the resulting button will not appear as a perfect circle. 137 describes the tools in the Size Assist toolbar: Make Same tools Make Ideal For Border Increase Height/Width for Border tools Size To Image Aspect Ratio FIG.35:1 Letterbox Video 2. and click one of these commands. Size To Image . and click Size To Image to automatically resize the button to the same size as it's associated bitmap or icon.85:1 Letterbox Video 1. and draw a circle that is smaller than 150 pixels in diameter (or not perfectly round). 128 TPDesign4 (v2. As a design concept. Aspect Ratio . Increase/Decrease Width/Height For Border . Depending on the size of the button. and the Increase/Decrease Height command will always adjust the height on the bottom side of the selected button(s). or cropped by the border style). For example. try to choose button border styles that accommodate and compliment the button image (if there is one). This option is typically for use with the Circle. For example. the Increase/ Decrease Width commands will always adjust the width on the right side of the selected button(s).This command automatically resizes the selected button(s) to the smallest size possible that still accommodates the selected border. if you create a button with the border "Circle 150".Select a button that has the width or height that you want to match.11 or higher) .Select a button that has either a bitmap or icon image assigned to it. Click this button to select from the drop-down menu: 4:3 Video 16:9 Letterbox Video 16:9 Anamorphic Video 1. All selected buttons are resized to match the width or height of the controlling button (the first button selected). Click this command to resize the button to become a perfect circle.This tool allows you to set the aspect ratio (for use with video fills). Oval and Diamond border types. Note that the border uses some of the interior area of the button.Working With Buttons Size Assist toolbar FIG. 137 Size Assist toolbar Make Same Width/Height/Size .85:1 Anamorphic Video 2. and the selected border type. Click these buttons to adjust the button width/height in increments specific to the selected border. the Circle and Oval border types are more problematic in terms of potential image cropping than are rectangular borders (assuming the associated image is rectangular). Size To Image may appear to resize the button to be too small to display the entire image (because part of the image is hidden. then select the button(s) that you want to resize.

the horizontal measurement of the selected panel in pixels). Horizontal . All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. right edges to left: Aligns the right edges of selected buttons to the left edge of the button that was selected first. bottom. vertically (or both) along either the centers of the buttons. Positive values offset the selections to the right. Select Layout > Alignment & Sizing to access this dialog (FIG. left or right).These options allow you to align the selected buttons horizontally.The horizontal alignment values may be offset either absolutely or incrementally. centers: Aligns the centers of all selected buttons. bottom edges to top: Aligns the bottom edges of selected buttons to the top edge of the button that was selected first.11 or higher) 129 . Use the options in this dialog to align and/or resize the selected buttons. top edges: Aligns the top edges of all selected buttons. Offset . TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Buttons Using the Alignment & Sizing dialog To access this dialog. 138 Alignment & Sizing dialog The options in this dialog include: Alignment . you must have more than one button selected (in a Design View window). left edges: Aligns the left edges of all selected buttons. Note that the order in which the buttons are selected in the Design View window controls how several of these options work. centers: Aligns the centers of all selected buttons. FIG. Default = 0.select the type of horizontal alignment to apply to the selected buttons: none: No alignment (default setting). or along any edge (top. left edges to right: Aligns the left edges of selected buttons to the right edge of the button that was selected first. 138). All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. right to left spacing: Aligns the right edge of the first selected button to the left edge of the next selected button. Indicate the number of pixels to offset the alignment options (range = 0 . top edges to bottom: Aligns the top edges of selected buttons to the bottom edge of the button that was selected first. Vertical. negative values offset them to the left. left to right spacing: Aligns the left edge of the first selected button to the right edge of the next selected button. right edges: Aligns the right edges of all selected buttons.select the type of vertical alignment to apply to the selected buttons: none: No alignment (default setting). bottom edges: Aligns the bottom edges of all selected buttons.

negative values subtract).The vertical alignment values may be offset either absolutely or incrementally. Note that the order in which the buttons are selected in the Design View window controls how several of these options work. FIG. border.Resizes all selected buttons to match the width of the button that was selected first. Specify whether to adjust the sizing values absolutely or incrementally. but initially it opens undocked. Make Same Height . 3. Specify whether to adjust the sizing values absolutely or incrementally. All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected.11 or higher) .Resizes all selected buttons to match the height of the button that was selected first. 2. Initially the button is shown in its Off state. Sizing . negative values subtract). Previewing a Button The Button Preview Window allows you to preview a button so you can check size. text and color settings on a Push and Release of the button. Indicate the number of pixels to offset the alignment options (range = 0 . Click on the Push button. Double-click inside the title bar to dock the window. In this case. Select View > Button Preview to open the Button Preview window (FIG. Make Same Width . Button Preview for List Box Buttons is only supported for a selected child button in unmanaged mode. 139 Button Preview window Like the other windows in TPD4. bottom to top spacing: Aligns the bottom edge of the first selected button to the top edge of the next selected button. 139). The Button Preview window displays a preview of the selected button. but will not have any data linkage. height or both. Offset .specify a number of pixels to add or subtract from the selections width (positive values add pixels. Button Preview functions the same as for a General button with no text or graphics. the Button Preview window is fully dockable.the vertical measurement of the selected panel in pixels). To preview a button: 1.Working With Buttons top to bottom spacing: Aligns the top edge of the first selected button to the bottom edge of the next selected button. 130 TPDesign4 (v2. Select the button that you want to preview. Change .specify a number of pixels to add or subtract from the selections height (positive values add pixels. Default = 0.These options allow you to resize the selected buttons to make them match in width. All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. Button Preview is not available for Joystick buttons. Change .

The button can be of any type. Select 0-setup port from the drop-down menu (FIG. 141). 140 Address Port = 0-Setup Port 4. It is a read-only (non-interactive) button. TPDesign4 (v2. 2. 3.11 or higher) 131 . 142). 141 Address Code drop-down menu 5. Click the Address Code field to enable the drop-down menu (FIG. 140). To create a date button: 1.Working With Buttons Creating a Date Button A Date Button is a button that displays the current date on the panel. FIG. but normally you would use the General button type. Click the plus (+) symbol next to Date Display to expose a drop-down menu of time display formats to choose from (FIG. FIG. In the Programming tab of the Properties window. Create a new button. click the Address Port field to enable the drop-down menu.

Creating a Time Button A Time Button is a button that displays the current time on the panel. 3. In the Programming tab of the Properties window.Date Display drop-down menu 6. etc). 2. but normally you would use the General button type. 143).Working With Buttons FIG. 142 Address Code . FIG. 132 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . yyyy-mm-dd. dd/mm/yyyy. Click the Address Code field to enable the drop-down menu (FIG. Create a new button. To create a time button: 1. Select 0-setup port from the drop-down menu (FIG. It is a read-only (non-interactive) button. Select the desired display format (Weekday. The button can be of any type. The time or date is only visible once the project is loaded on a touch panel. 143 Address Port = 0-Setup Port 4. 141). click the Address Port field to enable the drop-down menu. Time and Date buttons do not display any text when viewed in TPD4.

TPDesign4 (v2. 145).Working With Buttons FIG. 144 Address Code drop-down menu 5. Time and Date buttons do not display any text when viewed in TPD4. 145 Address Code . Standard or Standard AM/PM). Click the plus (+) symbol next to Time Display to expose a drop-down menu of time display formats to choose from (FIG.11 or higher) 133 . Select the desired display format (24-hour. FIG.Time Display drop-down menu 6. The time or date is only visible once the project is loaded on a touch panel.

11 or higher) .Working With Buttons 134 TPDesign4 (v2.

External Button Options The first dialog in the New Project Wizard includes an option for selecting External Button Options. The global. Page specific external controls settings are accessed via each page's Design View (with the Page > Show External Controls option enabled). which may be selected like any other button for editing. or cursor select). This option allows you to select from multiple external button layouts. "<none>".for use with a standard MIO R-4. Copying/Converting External Controls Between Panels TPD4 supports copying and converting the properties for programmable external controls (external pushbuttons and LEDs) for NXD-CV5. NXD-CV7. cursor up. If you have selected any touch panel that is equipped with external pushbuttons. Keypad with Transport Functions . the options include: Default Configuration . The global.for use with a Teletext MIO R-4 with transport keys. this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created.for use with a Teletext MIO R-4. Double-click this entry to access a Design View Window representing the size and placement of the external buttons and LEDs. or when converting between panel types that both support external buttons. and MVP-8400 panels.Working With External Controls Working With External Controls Overview TPD4 supports editing the properties for programmable external controls for panels that feature external pushbuttons and LEDs (including R-4 remote controllers). If you have selected the MIO R-4 remote. cursor left. cursor down. i. Teletext Keypad with Transport Functions .11 or higher) 135 . TPD4 supports copying and converting external controls between panels: When copying a page between panels. the External Button Options list is empty. panel-wide settings for external controls can be accessed and edited through the External Controls entry in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window. cursor right. Page specific external controls settings are accessed via each page's Design View (with the Page > Show External Controls option enabled). panel-wide settings for external controls can be accessed and edited through the External Controls entry in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window. the only available option is "Default Configuration" (and cannot be changed). You can edit external control properties on both a panel-wide basis and on a page specific buttonby-button basis.for use with a MIO R-4 with transport keys. MVP-7500. As with the panel resolution. LED. which may be selected like any other button for editing. Teletext keypad . TPDesign4 (v2. Double-click this entry to access a Design View Window representing the size and placement of the external buttons and LEDs.e. the configuration of the source external controls are copied to the destination controls according to the type of control (general. The choices available depend on the type of panel selected in the Panel Type drop-down: If you have selected a panel without external pushbuttons.

Note that are no State properties to configure for external controls. Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window). you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit general external control properties. which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties. 136 TPDesign4 (v2. Page-specific properties are external control properties that change according to the specific page showing on the panel. 3. cursor up. The following global button properties are supported for external Pushbuttons: External Pushbuttons . string and text length = 4096 characters. States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls. which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties. Once you have selected an external button.11 or higher) . Page-specific properties are external control properties that change according to the specific page showing on the panel. Global Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs TPD4 allows you to set Global or Page-Specific properties for external controls (for projects targeted at panel types that have external pushbuttons). the configuration of the source panel's external controls are copied to the destination panel's controls according to the type of control (general.Working With External Controls When copying a page between panels.Supported Properties General Properties Name Disabled Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. cursor down. or cursor select. Depending on the item selected. or both. Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of the external controls on the target panel. Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of the external controls on the target panel. Setting Global Properties for External LEDs TPD4 allows you to set Global or Page-Specific properties for external controls (for projects targeted at panel types that have external pushbuttons and LEDs). LED. Global settings are panel-wide settings that apply to the external controls regardless of the page currently showing on the panel. cursor right. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. you can either set the item manually. or when converting between panel types that both support external buttons. To edit any of the properties in the table. 2. select from a drop-down menu. Global settings are panel-wide settings that apply to the external controls regardless of the page currently showing on the panel. Setting Global Properties for External Pushbuttons Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls (pushbuttons and LEDs) are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window). 1. cursor left. Use the Selection Tool to pick the external control that you want to configure (in the Design View Window).

Depending on the item selected. click on an item in the righthand column to activate the field. Override Global Settings . select from a drop-down menu.Supported Properties General Properties Override Global Settings Name Disabled Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. Page-Specific Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External Pushbuttons Page-specific settings for external controls (pushbuttons and associated LEDs) which may override any Global settings are set via the Design View of the page that you want to associate the external controls with.This option (Yes/No) determines if the button performs the global action defined for the button. Once you have selected an external control. If set to Yes.11 or higher) 137 . Select Pages > Show External Controls to change the Design View to represent the layout of the external buttons on the target panel. which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties. Use the Selection Tool to pick the external control that you want to configure (in the Design View Window). string and text length = 4096 characters. 2. 4.Supported Properties General Properties Name Disabled Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls. To edit any of the properties in the table. or if its behavior is specific to this page. TPDesign4 (v2. The following global button properties are supported for external LEDs: External LEDs . Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of the external controls (buttons and LEDs) on the target panel. The following page-specific properties are supported for external Pushbuttons: External Pushbuttons . 3. Double-click on a Page entry (in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window) to display the selected page in a Design View Window. States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls.Working With External Controls Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window). Note that are no State properties to configure for external controls. or both. 1. the remainder of the external buttons properties will indicate their global values as read-only (default = No). you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit general button properties. you can either set the item manually.

11 or higher) .Supported Properties General Properties Name Disabled Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls.Working With External Controls Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External LEDs Page-specific settings for external controls (pushbuttons and associated LEDs) which may override any Global settings are set via the Design View of the page that you want to associate the external controls with. The following page-specific properties are supported for external LEDs: External LEDs . 138 TPDesign4 (v2.

In this case. Each List Box button is associated to a List Data table. Unlike other button types where you specify the text to be displayed on the button (via the Text button state property). you can select. Every List Box button must be associated to a List Data Table. Subordinate buttons are created by adding columns and/or rows to the list box container button. Strict alignment and spacing rules are forced both by the view and in the properties the user may edit. and make selections from the list. There are three main aspects to List Box buttons: the Container button. List Box buttons are visible in TPD4. in that they use Rows and Columns to organize the data to be displayed. since subordinate buttons only operate as a display of list data. For example. The List Data Table is the data source for list box buttons. and you can specify how the List Box button displays the data (via General and State Button Properties). Further. via options in the Edit List Tables dialog. The List Box Container wraps around the Subordinate buttons which represent the display fields for data populated by the List Data Table. In unmanaged mode. and every button is populated with data coming from the List Data Table associated with the List Box button. The List Data Table provides the data to be displayed in the List Box button. individual button properties are not accessible. One example usage for List Box buttons might be to display a scrollable list of music playlists for the end-user to select and playback. managed mode presents properties by column. the text that is displayed in a List Box button comes from a List Data Table. It also presents properties for the list box button and properties for each column. The List Box button is a special-purpose button type for G4 devices/panels which utilizes a collection of subordinate buttons to display either dynamic or static data as a scrollable list (referred to as a "list box view"). Unmanaged Mode: You can choose to place a List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). such as a MAX Home Theater server. but do not have any visible properties on the panel. The primary role of the (hidden) list box button is to retain the properties of the list box view. When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button.Working With List Box Buttons Working With List Box Buttons Overview TPD4 supports adding "List Box" buttons to projects created from panel types that support List Box buttons. Instead. TPD4 supports two modes for List Box buttons . Once in unmanaged mode the only way to put the list box back in the managed mode is by using the Undo feature. The List Data Table provides the data to be displayed in the List Box button. List Box buttons are set up like tables in TPD4. Note that you cannot select individual "cells" (or buttons). not as individually customizable buttons. and can be defined statically or dynamically. move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons. Subordinate buttons appear in a grid fashion. List box buttons can be used to allow the end-user to view data in list form. Think of a table where each cell is a button. The role of the subordinate buttons is to display the data in the list box view. In many ways. Every List Box button must be associated to a List Data Table. the song titles displayed in the list box buttons are provided by a server. The data displayed in List Box buttons comes from an associated List Data Table. but you cannot add or delete them.Managed and Unmanaged: Managed Mode: In managed mode TPD4 treats the List Box button as a Container for the Subordinate buttons. Subordinate buttons and the List Data table: The main List Box button is referred to as the Container. You can select subordinate buttons by the column to set button properties that affect only the affected column. Select the List Box Container to set button properties for the entire list box button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container).11 or higher) 139 . TPDesign4 (v2. List Data Tables are created in TPD4.

create. you can select. In managed mode. Add Row Add Column Delete Column Delete Row FIG. Double-click again to dock the toolbar. The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary. you cannot individually select. When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button. To move the toolbar. You also cannot access the channel port and code properties of the subordinate buttons. so they can be arranged within the application window. Add Column: Click to add a column to the selected List Box Button. or delete individual subordinate buttons. To create subordinate buttons. Changing any properties such as colors. add columns and/or rows to the list box button. 146 List Box Toolbar All toolbars in TPD4 are dockable. To delete subordinate buttons.11 or higher) . In unmanaged mode. To undock any toolbar. remove columns and/or rows. click and drag using the handle (the single vertical bar) at the far-left side of the toolbar. In managed mode. 146). Select View>Toolbars>List Box Toolbar to show/hide this toolbar: Add Row: Click to add a row to the selected List Box Button. and should be considered an advanced mode for seasoned programmers only.Working With List Box Buttons The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary. or modify their Z-Order. move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons. Delete Column: Click to delete the selected column from a selected List Box Button. its subordinate buttons are managed strictly via edits performed on the list box button or its columns. You can choose to place a List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). List Box Buttons: Managed / Unmanaged Mode When a List Box button is in managed mode. you cannot move the subordinate buttons around individually. List Box button support is limited to the following G4 devices: MIO R-4 Remotes List Box Toolbar The List Box toolbar contains shortcuts to the Selection and Button Draw tools (FIG. G4 Devices That Support List Box Buttons At the time of this release. Delete Row: Click to delete the last row from a selected List Box Button. or fonts for subordinate buttons are done on a column-by-column basis. 140 TPDesign4 (v2. borders. double-click anywhere inside the toolbar (but not on a toolbar button).

148 list box button with one subordinate button By default the list box container is created with a transparent background and a white border. List Box buttons are in managed mode when first created. 149): FIG. 150): TPDesign4 (v2. Select the List Box Draw Tool from the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar (FIG. 146 on page 140).Working With List Box Buttons List Box Buttons: Managed Mode Creating List Box Buttons (Managed Mode) By default. You can select the container and change the border color to black. 149 list box button . The example below shows a List Box button with two columns and three rows (FIG. In managed mode you add subordinate buttons by adding columns or rows to the list box. 147 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar Use the List Box Button draw tool to draw list box buttons on the design view as you would any other button type. 147): List Box Draw Tool FIG.showing container 3. you will not see the container.11 or higher) 141 . To create a list box button: 1. If the background color of the page is white. 2. This way you can see the container (FIG. Select the List Box Container button and click the Add Column or Add Row buttons from the List Box Toolbar (see FIG. Create a list box button by holding down the right mouse button on the view and dragging the mouse. This will create a list box button with one subordinate button (FIG. 148): FIG. This property is only visible in TPD4 and will not appear on the panel.

150 List Box button with 2 columns and 3 rows When the List Box Draw Tool is selected. when the List Box Button is created. Border Color etc. 151). Adding Rows 1. FIG.11 or higher) . the Drawing Tools toolbar can be used to set the border type. Select a List Box button in the Diagram Area (FIG. Fill Color. When a new row is added. font.) as the button above it. fill color and text color for the on and off states of the subordinate buttons. 152). The number of buttons added will be equal to the List Column (general) property.1 Row Added The height of the row will be equal to the List Row Height (general) property of the list box container. This function adds a row to the bottom of the list box container (FIG. 152 List Box button .Working With List Box Buttons FIG. each button will have the same state properties (i. FIG. 151 List Box button 2. Click the Add Row toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar). The width of each button is equal to the Column Width (general) property of each column in the list box. border color. 142 TPDesign4 (v2.e.

11 or higher) 143 . the new column will have the same width as the selected column. this function is disabled. TPDesign4 (v2. 2. FIG. Select a List Box button in the Diagram Area (FIG. 153 List Box button . The maximum number of column allowed in a List Box Button is 20. If only one column exists. the preferred row property should be set back to 1. This function adds a column to the righthand side of the list box container (FIG. After deletion the container will be resized. If a column is selected.1 Column Added The width of the last column is used for the new column. FIG. the Column Display Order field will be reset to "empty". 154). and is part of the Column Display Order field of the parent. If a column is deleted. Click the Delete Row toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar) to delete the bottom-most row in the list box container. 154 List Box button . 153). Deleting Rows 1. Click the Add Column toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar). A column of buttons will appear on the right-hand side of the list and will contain the number of buttons equal to the List Row (general) property.Working With List Box Buttons Adding Columns 1. Select the List Box button in the Diagram Area. this function is disabled. Deleting Columns 1. Select the List Box button in the Diagram Area. If only one row exists. Click the Delete Column toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar) to delete the right-most column in the list box container. 2. If the preferred row is deleted.2 Rows 2.

155 List Box Buttons . 155). these features are no longer available. as shown below (FIG. TPD4 does not support copying and/or pasting individual columns of a managed list box. TPD4 takes care of copying. Click on the outside edge of the List Box button to select the Container.11 or higher) .Container Button In Managed mode. TPD4 treats a List Box button as a Container for the subordinate buttons that constitute the columns and/or rows of the List Box button (FIG. copying and pasting a managed list box works only when the list box container is selected by itself or when the list box container is selected along with other non-subordinate buttons. List Box Buttons .Working With List Box Buttons Cutting. All you have to do is select the container.Container Button Select the Container to set button properties for the entire button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container). When one or more of the subordinate buttons are also selected. Copying and Pasting a List Box Cutting.Container Button Selected 144 TPDesign4 (v2. 156 List Box Button . FIG. The (red) handles indicate that the entire button is selected. pasting and deleting all the subordinate buttons for you. Alternatively. 156): FIG. you can select individual columns within the Container button to set button properties at the column level.

When a List Box Container is selected. Depending on the item selected. since List Box Container buttons do not support multiple states. List Box button columns do support multiple states. TPDesign4 (v2. The other perspective is based on columns of the list box. However. border type. Programming and State button properties. fill color etc (FIG. The following button properties are supported for List Box Container buttons: If you select the List Box Container. To edit any of the properties in the table. you select columns of the list box to change properties for all the buttons in that column such as button width. Managed mode will not allow you to select or move buttons outside of the container. Instead. Column Properties In Managed mode.11 or higher) 145 . click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. or both. FIG.Container Button Selected 2. 157): FIG. The List Box button that contains all the subordinate buttons (called the List Box Container button) presents properties that deal with the list box as a whole. only the Off state is indicated. 158). These properties are viewed by selecting the list box Container (FIG.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Container Properties vs.Column Selected Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons Once you have created a List Box button. the following Properties will appear in the Properties window. 157 List Box Button . select from a drop-down menu. you can either set the item manually. additional state properties are supported. If you select a List Box Button Column. 158 List Box Button . properties are split into two perspectives: 1.

Click on the outside edge of the List Box button to select the Container.11 or higher) . 1. you can either set the item manually. 146 TPDesign4 (v2. The (red) handles indicate that the entire button is selected.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Container Buttons .Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Hidden List Table Port List Table Address Column Display Order Column Sort Order List Table Wrap List Row List Column List Row Height List Preferred Row List Preferred Row Height List Column Padding List Row Padding List Offset Enabled List Managed Programming Properties Address Port Address Code States Properties Border Color Fill Color Overall Opacity Setting List Box Container Button Properties Once you have created a List Box button. Select the Container to set button properties for the entire button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container). 159 List Box Button . Programming. and States tabs of the Properties Window to set/edit button properties for the container button. select from a drop-down menu. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. 159: FIG. Depending on the item selected. or both. as shown in FIG.Container Button Selected 2. you can use the General. To edit any of the properties in the table.

the placement of subordinate buttons in a list box is automatic and controlled by the location of the list box container and laid out in a grid fashion. The List Box Button's Address Port and Code must be set to an Address Port/Code of a List Data Table. 4 and 1. The string is a comma-delimited list of List Table Column Values.Subordinate Buttons Subordinate Button Placement In managed mode. 160 List Box Buttons . When a row or column is added. The Channel Code of each subordinate button is set in sequential order starting with 1000 from left to right.11 or higher) 147 . the list box container is resized automatically to fit the new region of subordinate buttons added. 160): FIG. The Z-Order of all subordinate buttons must follow list box button container and continue in sequential order from left to right. top to bottom. TPDesign4 (v2.Working With List Box Buttons There are additional properties that can be applied to a selected column within the Container button. The subordinate button's Row and Column property is set to their row/column position. For example. List Box Buttons . top to bottom.Subordinate Buttons List box buttons and subordinate buttons have a special kind of relationship to keep track of which buttons belong to the list box button. The list box button's Row and Column properties are set to the total number of rows/columns. The list Box Button's Data Display property is a string surrounded by parenthesis. then this property would be set to 3. Each subordinate button's Channel Port must be set to the High Port of the list box button.4. Rows are added to the bottom of a list box and columns are added to the right-hand side of a list box. if the list box's 1st 2nd and 3rd columns are assigned to columns 3.1 (FIG. See the Setting List Box Button Column Properties section on page 149 for details.

161): FIG. select from a drop-down menu. List Box Buttons . TPD4 treats a List Box button as a Container for the subordinate buttons that constitute the columns and/or rows of the List Box button. Programming. you can either set the item manually. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. 161 List Box Button . Alternatively. The list box column will highlight when dragged on top of the column in the Design View and when dropped the property will change to the value dragged from the properties window. You can also drag and drop one to two states in the State Manager window on a column of a List Box. Click inside the Container to select a column. and States tabs of the Properties Window to set/edit button properties for the columns. The (blue) handles indicate that a single column is selected. You can select individual columns within the Container button to set button properties at the column level. as shown below (FIG. or both. Depending on the item selected. List Box button columns support multiple states.Drag and Drop Capability Full drag and drop capability is supported for Subordinate List Box buttons: You can drag a column property of a list box and drop it on another column of a list box.11 or higher) . 148 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With List Box Buttons Subordinate Buttons . To edit any of the properties in the table. you can use the General. select the Container to set button properties for the Container List Box button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container).Middle Column Selected Setting Properties: List Box Columns Once you have created a List Box button.Columns In Managed mode.

Managed list boxes Scale Bitmap To Fit do not have any programming Icon Justification properties available. Depending on the item selected. There are additional properties that can be applied to the List Box button container. If you select a column within the container (as opposed to the List Box button container itself). or both. you can set button properties that apply specifically to the selected column. See the Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons section on page 145 for details. List Box buttons consist of a container and subordinate buttons that are created with Columns and Rows. TPDesign4 (v2. To edit any of the properties in the table. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Font Text Text Justification Text Effect Word Wrap Marquee Direction Marquee Repeat Setting List Box Button Column Properties Once you have created a List Box button. select from a drop-down menu.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Description Width Above Popups Border Style Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output States Properties Draw Order Border Name Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Note: All of the above are available only for Bitmap Justification unmanaged list boxes. Properties applied to a column will affect all buttons in that column.11 or higher) 149 . Programming. States tabs of the Properties Control window to set/edit button properties for a selected column (within the List Box button container).Working With List Box Buttons List Box Columns . you can use the General. you can either set the item manually.

When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button. In other words. When a List Box button is put into Unmanaged mode: The Container. you can select. You can choose to place a selected List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). individual (or multiple selection) subordinate buttons can not be deleted. this functionality will carry over to unmanaged list boxes. move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons. By removing the check for whether the list box is managed or not. the Z-Order of the unmanaged list box must remain in order without gaps in the sequence. moved and resized. but you cannot add or delete them.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Buttons: Unmanaged Mode When a List Box button is created.Editable Properties Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Container button General Properties • Name • Lock Button Name • Description • Left • Top • Width • Height • List Table Port • List Table Address • List Display • Column Sort Order • List Filter Column • List Selectable • List Table Wrap • List Preferred Row Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Subordinate button General Properties • Name • Lock Button Name • Description • Left • Top • Width • Height • Border Style 150 TPDesign4 (v2. The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary. If the Container is deleted. In unmanaged mode. However. all of the subordinate buttons will be deleted as well. and individual subordinate buttons can be selected. the only way to get the unmanaged list box back to a managed state is via Edit > Undo. Only certain button properties are available to edit in unmanaged mode: List Box Buttons .11 or higher) . Note that once a List Box button has been moved to unmanaged mode. The Z-Order of an unmanaged list box Container/Subordinate buttons cannot be changed. This logic is present for managed list boxes. When changing the Z-Order of a non-list box button. it always defaults to Managed mode. the Z-Order can only be placed in front of or behind the entire list box collection. Rows and Columns cannot be removed nor added.Unmanaged Mode .

The only way to get the unmanaged list box back to a managed state is to use the Undo feature.Unmanaged Mode . This logic is present for managed list boxes. Individual (or multiple selection) child buttons can not be deleted. Unmanaged transition is one-way. The parent can be deleted -> all children will be deleted as well.11 or higher) 151 . When changing the Z-Order of a non-list box button. Parent and individual child buttons can be moved and resized.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Buttons . the Z-Order of the unmanaged list box must remain in order without gaps in the sequence. In other words. Parent and individual child buttons can be selected. Rows cannot be removed nor added.) Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Container button Programming Properties • Address Port • Address Code • Channel Port • Channel Code Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Subordinate button Programming Properties • Feedback • Address Port • Address Code • String Output Port • String Output • Command Port • Command Output State Properties: Off only • Border Color • Fill Color • Overall Opacity State Properties: Off only • Draw Order • Border Name • Border Color • Fill Color • Text Color • Text Effect Color • Overall Opacity • Bitmap Justification • Scale Bitmap To Fit • Icon Justification • Font • Text Justification • Text Effect • Word Wrap • Marquee Direction • Marquee Repeat Rules for Unmanaged List Box Buttons The following rules apply to List Box Buttons in Unmanaged Mode: Must be constructed from a Managed List Box (create a Managed List Box Button and change it to Unmanaged mode via the Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox) option). the Z-Order can only be placed in front of or behind the entire list box collection. Columns cannot be removed nor added.Editable Properties (Cont. a message box is given stating the reason it can not be deleted. If the user tries to delete one or more list box child buttons. Changing Z-Order of an unmanaged list box Parent/Child is not available. By TPDesign4 (v2.

152 TPDesign4 (v2. 162): List Box Draw Tool FIG.11 or higher) . 164): FIG. 164 List Box Button With 2 Columns and 3 Rows 4. State properties of individual unmanaged list box button can be changed. 163 list box button with one subordinate button 3. 163): FIG. Create a list box button by right clicking on the view and dragging the mouse. 2. Select the List Box Draw Tool from the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar (FIG. To create a list box button: 1. The High Port of a parent can not be changed via properties. The example below shows a list box button with two columns and three rows (FIG. this functionality should carry over to unmanaged list boxes. Select Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). 162 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar Use the List Box Button draw tool to draw list box buttons on the design view as you would any other button type. The Channel Port/Code of a child can not be changed via properties. List Box buttons are in managed mode when first created. Creating List Box Buttons (Unmanaged Mode) By default.Working With List Box Buttons removing the check for whether the list box is managed or not. Select the List Box Container button and click the Add Column or Add Row buttons from the List Box Toolbar. This will create a list box button with one subordinate button (FIG.

11 or higher) 153 .Resizing If the change in size specified by the drag is not equally divisible by the number of rows. resizing maintains the size ratio of the preferred row vs. the remainder is applied to the Preferred Row Height. only the right center handle is enabled for resizing (FIG. The program displays a warning message concerning the rules concerning unmanaged mode: Once set. 6. 165). 166 Right center handle enabled for resizing When a single column is selected (not including the last column) resizing is limited to the width of the selected column and the next column to the right. This allows you to change the overall width of the list box. the List Box cannot be set back to managed mode except through the Undo feature. Use the corner resize handles to do a combination what the center handles do by resizing one of the corners. 166). List Box Buttons . The minimum height for each row is 4 pixels. If Preferred Row is 0. After resizing the column. If the List Preferred Row is set to a non-zero value (i. FIG. When a List Box Column is selected. If the last column is selected. the change in size is split evenly between each row by adding/subtracting the change in size to the Row Height and Preferred Row Height properties of the Container (FIG. the maximum width allowed per column is the amount of width from the right-hand side of the list box to the right edge of the page or popup divided by the TPDesign4 (v2. the remainder is dropped. resizing is limited to the size of the last column plus the width left on the right hand side of the list box to the right edge of the page or popup. the other rows. plus the offset of the parent if the List Offset Enabled (General) property is set to "yes". 1). When two or more columns are selected. up to the number of rows present in the list box. In unmanaged mode you can resize and move individual subordinate buttons of the list box but you cannot add nor delete rows and columns. FIG.e.Working With List Box Buttons 5.Resizing When a List Box Container is resized by dragging the center handles. the next column to the right will resize to reflect the change. 165 List Box Buttons . Click Yes to convert the List Box Button to unmanaged mode.

it is either behind or on top of the entire list box). List Box Buttons . the Z-Order (or State Draw order) of the subordinate buttons must follow the list box container's Z-Order in row-column sequential order. or when the list box layout is changed (bring-to-front.Move list down one page.Working With List Box Buttons number columns selected. the new width is applied from right-to-left until the maximum width is met. Using the Drawing Toolbar With List Box Buttons When the List Box Draw Tool is selected. pasted. at the time that the button is created. 167 Drawing toolbar When you draw a List Box button with the List Box Draw Tool.Move list up one page. border color. Page Up . when the List Box Button is created. a button separate from the list box cannot be behind some of the subordinate buttons of the list box and on top of the rest of the subordinate buttons . For managed list boxes the Z-Order is managed for you when rows and/or columns are added. These buttons are referred to as List Box Navigation buttons. When resizing the width of a column. List Box Buttons . send-to-back.Move list up one entry.Move list to end of page. Button Type Border Type Font Toggle On/Off State properties Font Size Border Color Fill Color Text Color FIG.Sort the specified column. fill and text color for the List Box button's subordinate buttons. the properties (including width) of the new column are taken from the selected column. For unmanaged list boxes. A managed list box's Z-Order cannot be interrupted by another buttons Z-Order (i. the Drawing toolbar (FIG. you can manipulate each subordinate button of an unmanaged list box. Even though you can individually select buttons in unmanaged mode. If you select a column. Home . etc. the colors are defined via the Drawing Tools Toolbar. When you add columns and rows (with the List Box Button Container selected). the width of the new column is defined based on the last column in the list box.Move list down one entry.Z-Order In order for a list box to function correctly on a panel. Up . then click the Add Column button (in the List Box Toolbar). Z-Order placement remains managed by the list box. 154 TPDesign4 (v2. Down . Press again for an ascending re-sort. Here are the actions that a list box navigation button can perform (selectable via the Channel Code property).11 or higher) . Only experienced programmers who fully understand list box construction and the logic of Z-Order placement should use the list box in unmanaged mode. When resized in this way. the specified column is sorted alpha-numerically in descending order. the minimum allowed is 4 pixels. Sort Column (1-20) . 167) can be used to set the border.Navigation Buttons General buttons can be used to provide a means for the user to control a List Box button. On first press. End . deleted.Move list to top of page. font.). fill color and text color for the On and Off states of the subordinate buttons.e. you can use the Drawing Tools Toolbar to specify the border type. Page Down .

etc. 5. 3. 7. "List Box 2".assuming that at least one List Box button is defined in the project).Working With List Box Buttons FIG. Add a general button to the page and set the Channel Port to the List Box and set the Channel Code to the desired function. The third button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 3". For example. they will be listed as "List Box 1". one above and one below the yellow button could be set to scroll the list box up and down: 6. The smaller cyan buttons.Programming Tab . Set the top button's Channel Code to "Up" and the bottom button's Channel Code to "Down".11 or higher) 155 . five navigation buttons (in cyan) and a scroll bar (in yellow):. The first button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 1". Set both button's Channel Port to the List Box. FIG. 4. If you haven't renamed any of the List Box buttons that have been added to this project. 2. The second button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 2". TPDesign4 (v2. Alternatively you could leave these buttons out and program the external buttons (R4) to move the list up and down. All three button's Channel Port should be set to the List Box (via the Properties Control . 168 List Box with Navigation Buttons Creating List Box Navigation Buttons 1. See the SystemGenerated Project File Names section on page 30 for details. 168 illustrates a List Box (in white). the three large cyan button in the figure above could be used to sort columns of the list box.

170): FIG. These bargraphs depict position only. 169 List Box Navigation Scroll Bar .Level Code set to Scroll (option 2) Both state fill colors for On and Off are set to white. The user can drag the bargraph at runtime to scroll the list up and down.Working With List Box Buttons Creating a List Box Navigation Scroll Bar One option for List Box Navigation Buttons is to link a single bargraph button to a Listbox for navigating the list data up and down. Now you have two visual options: The first is depicted below (FIG. 170 List Box Navigation Scroll Bar .11 or higher) . Set the Level Port of the bargraph to the list box and set the Level Code to "Scroll". The second option (shown below) uses the slider property to indicate position (FIG. The size of the list is not represented.Level Code set to Scroll (option1) The Off state fill color is set to white and the On state fill color is set to green. the user can drag the bargraph at runtime to scroll the list. Again. 156 TPDesign4 (v2. 169): FIG.

bg2 and bg3: FIG.11 or higher) 157 . It does not have any navigation capability: FIG. 171 List Box Feedback Scroll Bar Scroll Bar Components FIG. 172 List Box Feedback Scroll Bar .Working With List Box Buttons Creating a List Box Feedback Scroll Bar The yellow button in FIG.Scroll Bar Components Buttons bg1 and bg2 are called Mask buttons. 172 shows that the yellow bargraph is actually made up of 3 bargraph buttons labeled bg1. To set these buttons up as a list box scroll bar set the button properties as follows: Button bg1 properties: Level Port: set to List Box Level Code: bottom mask Off Button State: Fill color set to Transparent On Button State: Fill color set to yellow TPDesign4 (v2. 171 serves as visual feedback to indicate the list size and position. They mask portions of button bg3 to visually indicate slider position and size.

Working With List Box Buttons Button bg2 properties: Level Port: set to List Box Level Code: top mask Off Button State: Fill color set to yellow On Button State: Fill color set to Transparent Button bg3 is not connected to the list box.11 or higher) . It is located behind buttons bg1 and bg2 and it's color will show through the transparent parts of bg1 and bg2 to represent the slider of the scroll bar.. List Data Tables are created via options in the Edit List Table dialog (FIG.Move down one entry Page Up .e.Move to Top of page End . List Data Tables provide the information that is displayed on List Box Buttons." automatically.no navigation command will be associated with this button.Move up one entry Down . Down. Since the purpose of List Box Buttons is to present data. Navigation Buttons .Channel Code Values Channel Code values that can be applied to Navigation buttons (via the Channel Code Programming property) include: none .Move up one page Page Down . based on whether the PPF says the panel type supports "Selection" (i. The Sort Column entries contain the column titles (up to 20 columns. TPD4 will save the "List" or "Selection" version of "Up. 173). Up . supplied by the List Data Table). the table can be designated for a list box through a property of the List Box Button. This separates the data from the view so that List Data Table can be created statically or dynamically: TPD4 presents a list table view to create and define a static List Data Table. Button bg3 is not really needed. TPD4 displays these list values regardless of the panel type. the button will sort the list box based on this column selection. Once created.Move to bottom of page Sort Column (1-20) . It is up to you to make sure a column exists in the table when defining a "Sort Column #". List Data Table TPD4 supports the ability to create. However. edit and delete List Data Tables in support of List Box buttons.Enter the number of the column to use for alpha-numeric sorting (1-20). and it's associated dialogs: 158 TPDesign4 (v2. such as the MAX AVP). You can also designate dynamic List Data Table data for a List Box Button that is created at runtime by the panel firmware. a list data table is used to manage the data of a List Box Button and can be designated through a property of the List Box Button. a panel without a touch overlay.Move down one page Home . It could have been left out leaving the background color to show through as the slider... Once applied to a Navigation Button.

Note that unlike Dynamic List Box data. the information displayed on the device is on the master and not the device. the device cannot display current state information provided by the master. the device will resume the last known static table event should power be cycled. Conversely. TPDesign4 (v2. no raw data will be entered by the user.Working With List Box Buttons FIG. Therefore.The Address Code property is an integer value representing the address code of the list data table. Table Type . Dynamic List Box Data Dynamic List Box data populates button information based upon communications between the panel and a NetLinx Master. Table Address Code . Static List Box Data A static list box populates button information based on data stored on the panel. A dynamic table type is updated dynamically from the master with data.Select either a static or a dynamic table type. 173 Edit List Table dialog List Data Table Properties The following list data table properties are editable: Table Name .The Address Port property is an integer value representing the port of the list data table.11 or higher) 159 .The Name is a character value used to identify the list table data. Opposed to static data. Table Address Port . Dynamic List data must be included in the NetLinx code running on the NetLinx Master in order to be available for use on List Box Buttons.

This dialog displays the number of columns indicated in the Create New Table dialog: 160 TPDesign4 (v2. which populates the List Box Button dynamically. FIG. If you haven't already done so. There are two variations on this concept: Static List Box Data. 173 on page 159). which populates the associated List Box Button with the data entered into a List Data Table via the Edit List Tables dialog. 2. 3. so that the data in the List Data Table is displayed in the List Box button: 1. time or temperature. 174 Create New Table dialog Name of Table: Type a unique name for the table.e. Attaching a List Data Table to a List Box Button Once you have created a list Box Button. Select Panel > Edit List Tables (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit List Tables dialog (FIG. date. 175). Address: Assign a Port and Address for the table. Dynamic List Box Data.. See Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button section on page 171. with data defined in NetLinx Code. i. Number of Columns: Enter the number of columns to include in the table.11 or higher) . Number of Rows: Enter the number of rows to include in the table. if the device loses power it will not be able to display the last known states.Working With List Box Buttons Dynamic tables are great for creating parameters for displaying changing options. Click OK to save your changes and proceed to the Column Types dialog (FIG. Use the options in this dialog to assign a name and type to each column in the table. as well as a List Data Table. Creating a Static List Data Table To create a Static List Data Table and associate it to a List Box Button. 174). See the Working With Function Codes section on page 207 for more information on Ports and Addresses. create a new List Box button. Click New to open the Create New Table dialog (FIG. It is this association that allows the data in the List Data Table to be displayed on the List Box Button. See the Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button section on page 163. where you will specify basic properties for the new table. with enough rows and columns to accommodate the data that you will enter into the List Data Table. however. Port: Assign a Port and Address for the table. you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button. 4.

to assign a specific type to each column. resize the table. Use the options in this dialog to assign a name and type to each column in the table. This column is hidden from the user on the display and is used as navigation. You can select any table from the list to edit its properties. Add Column .11 or higher) 161 . use the command buttons along the top of this dialog to add/delete rows and columns from the active table. Click the Column button to sort the columns in descending/ascending order.This column will contain a port/channel code combination that is sent to the master upon activation of a particular row. 176). Icon . This option invokes the Add List Table Column dialog (FIG. each one is added to the Tables list. 175 Column Types dialog Column: Displays the number associated with each column in the table.Click to add a column to the table.The column will display bitmap images from a table of bitmap references.The column will display valid page names that will be activated as page flips. Page Flip . Delete Row .Click to add a row to the table. Click OK to save your changes and return to the Edit List Tables dialog.Working With List Box Buttons FIG. Name: Use these text fields to enter a unique name for each column. Bitmap . Port/Channel Code . Type: Click inside these fields to access the Type drop-down menu. Also note that the table you just created is listed in the Tables list box (left side of the dialog). 6.The column will display icons from a table of icon references. TPDesign4 (v2.Click to delete one or more selected rows from the table. The following are the available column types to select from: Text . As you create more new tables. and specify a Port and Address to the table: Add Row . At this point. 5.The column will contain a variable length text value. Note that the Table Data display reflects the columns/rows and column names that you specified.

Assign to columns that will be used to display bitmaps. the user will be able to enter data. 162 TPDesign4 (v2.Click to delete the column that currently has focus. Bitmap . Shrink Columns . If the column is of the type "Page Flip".Assign to columns that will be used to display text.Assign to columns that will invoke a page flip when selected.Click to assign a unique Port and Address combination for the table.Assign to columns that will be used to display channel code information. then you will need to enter a channel port/code combination value. If the type is of the type "Channel Code".Click to expand each column by equal amounts. and code parameters to one or more selected buttons. 7. Channel Code . Use the options in this dialog to set button-level actions. Type: Click inside these fields to access the Type drop-down menu. The column type options include: Text (default) . Note that this option is disabled once the table reaches the minimum allowed width. Click OK to return to the Edit List Tables dialog. Name: Use these text fields to enter a unique name for each column. Fit Table . Use the Table Port and Table Address fields to specify the port/address combination.Assign to columns that will be used to display icons. then a drop-down list of available pages is displayed. Click the Column button to sort the columns in descending/ascending order. Icon . Expand Columns . 8. Power Assign . Port/Addr . Note that this option is disabled once the table reaches the maximum allowed width. Page Flip .Click to shrink each column by equal amounts. Edit the cell data as desired: When you click inside a particular cell: If column is of the type "Text". This option invokes the Change Port/Addr dialog. Delete Column .11 or higher) . to assign a specific type to each column. 176 Add List Table Column This dialog displays the number of columns indicated in the Create New Table dialog: Column: Displays the number associated with each column in the table. you will be able to select a bitmap that has already been defined in the project.Click to resize the table to fit inside the Table Data window. If the column is of the type "Bitmap".Working With List Box Buttons FIG.This option allows you to rename the column label at the top of a column.Click to open the List Table Power Assign dialog. Rename Column . channel/variable text.

as well as a Static List Data Table.11 or higher) 163 . Clicking inside these fields enables the browse (. click inside either the List Table Port or the List Table Address fields. TPDesign4 (v2. 177 Attach Table To List Box dialog 3. Once a table is selected. 4. Click this button to access the Attach Table To List Box dialog (FIG.Working With List Box Buttons If the column is of the type "Icon". select the List Box Button that you want to associate with a List Data Table. the Table Port and Table Address fields are automatically updated with that table's port/address assignments. It is this association that allows the data in the List Data Table to be displayed on the List Box Button. 9. 1.) button. you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button.. Now you will attach the List Data Table to a List Box Button . FIG. In the General tab of the Properties Control Window. Select the table that you want to attach to the selected List Box Button. select one or more rows and click and drag them to another spot in the table. you will be able to select an icon that has already been defined in the project. To move rows. This dialog lists all Static List Data Tables in your project. Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button Once you have created a list Box Button. In the Design View window. 2. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. 177).see Attaching a List Data Table to a List Box Button section on page 160..

Attach the Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button There are two types of List Box Commands that can be used to define List Box Data in your NetLinx Code: Data List Commands Command Structure List View Data List Commands Data List Commands ^LDN Creates a new data list.. Select the table that you want to delete.4.<primary data>.11 or higher) .Best of. Use double-quotes to surround fields in which commas are needed.Working With List Box Buttons Deleting a List Data Table To delete a List Data Table from your project: 1. address 1.Entry5. Best of. 3. The program will prompt you to verify this action before the table deleted.Uses unicode • primary data = the "key" data column. Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. 173 on page 159). Primary data is required. 2. The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness. 2. The number of data fields is limited only to the number of columns in the data list. 1..<uniflag>.'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • uniflag = indicates unicode. 4. List box commands contain comma-delimited fields.1. Use Data List Commands to define List Data in your NetLinx Code. • data2 = variable. ^LDA Adds a new row to an existing data list. Click the Delete command button.<list address>. and Anything for Love are all cells within the new row. Creating a Dynamic List Data Table Dynamic List Data is provided to the associated List Box Button by the NetLinx Code running on the NetLinx Master that the panel is connected to.. column data information.<column count>. but you can use commas within the fields.No unicode. Meatloaf.<data2>. in the Tables list. Unique list addresses and names are handled programmatically. Syntax: "'^LDN-<list port>. Click OK to proceed. Syntax: "'^LDA-<list address>. 0 . The primary data is set as Entry5. "'^LDA-1.<list name>'" Variables: • list port = port where data resides • list address = address where data resides • column count = the number of data columns (includes hidden columns) • list name = User specified name for the data list Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Select Panel > Edit List Tables to open the Edit List Tables dialog (FIG.Meatloaf. 1 . 164 TPDesign4 (v2.my songs'" Creates a data list of 4 columns named "my songs" and places it at port 5.0.Anything for Lunch'" Adds a text row to the data list located at address 1. "'^LDN-5.

11 or higher) 165 . Note: Data List Command Rules apply (see the Data List Command Rules section on page 166).<column>.'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • column = the starting column number • type = subsequent columns. ^LDC Clears all rows in a given list. 4 .0'" Sets the column type for the data list located at address 1. The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness. 3 . "'^LDC-1'" Clears all rows in data list located at address 1. "'^LDR-1. Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Column is the index of the first type to set.<type>. 0 .Uses unicode • primary data = the "key" data column... Syntax: "'^LDD-<list address>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.) ^LDR Removes a row from an existing data list Syntax: "'^LDR-<list address>.0.0. ^LDD Deletes the data list.Page Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. additional types sent are set in order.Entry5'" Removes the text row Entry5 from an existing data list at address 1.<uniflag>. "'^LDT-1.0.No unicode. 1 . TPDesign4 (v2. 0 . "'^LDD-1'" Deletes the data list located at address 1.Channel.1.Text. The column type starts at column 1. Syntax: "'^LDC-<list address>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. the first column is Text.<primary data>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • uniflag = indicates unicode. the second and third columns are also Text. ^LDT Sets the column type for a data list.Working With List Box Buttons Data List Commands (Cont. Syntax: "'^LDT-<list address>.<type>..

<uniflag>. This can be used to load a data list that has long text fields. then use the backslash to escape the double quote literal. This is to allow double quote literals within the string bounded by double quotes.) and the last nonspace character before the following delimiter (or end of command). The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness.Uses unicode • primary data = the "key" data column. "'^LDL-1.<primary data>. Within double quotes. Data List Command Rules The following rules apply to several of the Data List Commands.1. as indicated in the Data List Commands table: Leading and trailing spaces are ignored before and after opening and closing double quotes. Any data field that has a double quote literal as its first character MUST use double quotes to delimit the field. There are 2 cases in which you would use the backslash to escape a double quote literal within the field.11 or higher) . Note: Data List Command Rules apply (see the Data List Command Rules section on page 166). in the row with the primary data "Entry5" and in the data list located at the address of 1 is a text value of Music. the next character is read as a literal value and the backslash is discarded.0. When a backslash is parsed. the backslash (\) is used as an escape character.Entry5.Working With List Box Buttons Data List Commands (Cont.Music'" The field located in column 1.No unicode.) ^LDL Modifies the data in a single column field.<new cell data>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • column = the starting column number. numbering starts at 1 • uniflag = indicates unicode. 0 . Double quotes must be the first non-space character after the previous delimiter (.<column>. Syntax: "'^LDL-<list address>. to escape another backslash (commas do not need to be escaped). • new cell data = data information for a single field or "cell" Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. 1 . 166 TPDesign4 (v2.

In most cases.Reverse Bit 0x0040 . the reverse bit should not be used alone.Sort Bit 0x0002 .7'" Displays the data list according to the view definitions located at address 1 and filters and reverse sorts the list. Syntax: "'^LVO-<view address>. When used on a sorted list.1'" Sets the data list viewed to the information located at port 2. Possible values for the sort field: 0 = None 1 = Forward Sort 2 = Reverse the current list ordering (may or may not be sorted) 3 = Reverse Sort 4 = Filter 5 = Forward Sort + Filter 6 = Reverse current + filter 7 = Reverse sort + filter Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LVO-1.Filter Reverse bit (0x0002) reverses the list from whatever order it is currently in. ^LVL Data list. address 1 and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 5.<list address>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • list port = port where list resides • list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. so that the 3 bit positions may be combined. "'^LVL-5. TPDesign4 (v2. Syntax: "'^LVL-<view address>.Working With List Box Buttons Command Structure List View Command Structure List View ^LVO Filter sort.<list port>. set the data list displayed. Note that the <sort> field is a bitmask. When used on a reverse sorted list.<sort>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • sort: Bit 0x0001 . tells the view which of the possible orderings to use. but should be used in combination with the sort bit (0x0003) such that it always results in a reverse sorted list. it results in a reverse sort. it results in a forward sorted list.2.11 or higher) 167 .

"'^LVP-5. "'^LVM-2.5. ^LVS Sort. Syntax: "'^LVP-<view address>. display a new position.Working With List Box Buttons Command Structure List View (Cont.1'" Sets the column display order to column 5 first.<offset>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • offset = + / . Syntax: "'^LVC-<view address>.<column>.) ^LVP Set position.2.<index>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • index = the row number in sequential order.11 or higher) .. The data list is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 3..<column>.-4'" Shifts the display -4 and displays the list according to the view definitions located at address 2. sets column order for sorting.<column>. Update must be called for changes to take effect. then column 2 and then column 1. display a new position. "'^LVS-3.'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • column = the column number to display Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.3'" Sets the display position starting at the third row and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 5. sets the table column each view column displays.1'" Sets the column sort order to column 5 first.'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • column = the starting column number Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. ^LVC Column display order. ^LVM Move. 168 TPDesign4 (v2. The data list is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 3.5.numeric display shift Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.... "'^LVC-3. numbering starts at 1 Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.2. Syntax: "'^LVS-<view address>. then column 2 and then column 1.<column>.. Syntax: "'^LVM-<view address>.

The Shins.01. sets what column to use and what string to compare.Smith'" • Filters list based on column 2 such that only those rows whose column 2 contains Smith are displayed. "'^LDN-1. Dynamic List Box buttons require the same List Box navigation buttons as static tables do. ^LVU Update.<column>.1. or list data changes. Syntax: "'^LVU-<view address>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.2.0. address 1 named "my music" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.11 or higher) 169 .Working With List Box Buttons Command Structure List View (Cont. 0 . Note: This must be called after changes to list data.5.5] { PUSH: { //Deletes any existing data list at address 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. this will update the view to any sort. "'^LDD-1'" //Creates new 5-column data list at port 1. Chutes Too Narrow.1.) ^LVF Filter. DEFINE_DEVICE Keypad = 11001:1:4 Keypad2 = 11001:2:4 KeypadMusic = 11001:10:4 DEFINE_EVENT BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad.No unicode. 1 .<search data>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • uniflag = indicates unicode. Setting column to 1 or data to none makes the filtered ordering the same as sorted ordering.my music'" //Specifies column types for the data list at address 1 starting at column 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Syntax: "'^LVF-<view address>. Dynamic List box Table Example The following is an example of a dynamic List Box table as it appears in NetLinx code. Kissing the Lipless. filter. Update must be called for changes to take effect. • The data is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 1. "'^LDA-1.Uses unicode • column = the starting column number. numbering starts at 1 • search data = the data on which to filter Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.1"'" TPDesign4 (v2.0.<uniflag>.0. "'^LDT-1. "'LVU-3'" Updates the data list and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 3.0.0. "10. "'LVF-1. See Listbox Commands for more information on Listbox commands. • Filter is case sensitive.3'" //Adds rows to the data list at address 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad.0.

"'^LVO-2.0. "10. "'^LVC-2.The Shins. "'^LDA-1.2] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. "'^LDA-1.1'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LDA-1. "Mine's Not a High Horse". Chutes Too Narrow.6"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.4'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Those to Come. "10.The Shins. "'^LVS-2.03.10"'" //Sets the column number (4) to display in the view with address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad.3"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.08. "'^LDA-1.0. The 1 indicates forward sort.7] { PUSH: { //Set the sort order for view address 2.8"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LDA-1.Working With List Box Buttons SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Chutes Too Narrow. "'^LVU-2'" } } //Sort the list by Track number instead of title BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad.9"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.6] { PUSH: { //Set the sort order for view address 2. "10. Fighting in a Sack. Chutes Too Narrow. "10.10.04. Chutes Too Narrow. "'^LDA-1. "10. "10.0.The Shins. Young Pilgrim. "'^LVS-2. Pink Bullets. "'^LDA-1.0.The Shins.0. "'^LVO-2. SEND_COMMAND Keypad.1'" //Set the column of the list on which to base the sort of the data displayed //at view address 2 (in this case column 4 which contains titles) SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Gone for Good.1] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.06. "'^LVU-2'" } } BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.0.2"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.0. SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Turn a Square. The 1 indicates forward sort.0.4"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.7"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "10. "'^LDA-1.5"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "10. "'^LDA-1.4'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad.09. "10.The Shins. "'^LVU-2'" } } //Sort the list by title instead of Track number BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad.The Shins. So Says I.1'" //Set the column of the list on which to base the sort of the data displayed //at view address 2 (in this case column 1 which contains track numbers) SEND_COMMAND Keypad.05.11 or higher) .The Shins.0. Chutes Too Narrow.The Shins.The Shins.02. Chutes Too Narrow. Saint Simon. Chutes Too Narrow.07.3] 170 TPDesign4 (v2. Chutes Too Narrow. Chutes Too Narrow.

Enter the Table Port and Table Address of the dynamic List Table.7] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.6] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.']'" Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button Once you have created a List Box Button.0.5] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. click inside either the List Table Port or the List Table Address fields. 178). you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button.4] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. FIG.9] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. 178 Attach Table To List Box dialog 3. "'^TXT-1. Click this button to access the Attach Table To List Box dialog (FIG. 1.[Track '.) button. 4. TPDesign4 (v2. In the Design View window. It is this association that allows the data in the List Data to be displayed on the List Box Button.8] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.itoa(BUTTON.Working With List Box Buttons BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic... 2. select the List Box Button that you want to associate with a List Data Table. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.10] { PUSH: { SEND_COMMAND Keypad2.INPUT. Clicking inside these fields enables the browse (.11 or higher) 171 . In the General tab of the Properties Window. and defined List Data in your NetLinx Code (with Data List Commands).CHANNEL).

Working With List Box Buttons Changing Port and Address Assignments for a List Data Table 1. 5. 173 on page 159). 172 TPDesign4 (v2. showing the current Port/Address assignments for the selected table. This opens the Change/Port Addr dialog (FIG.11 or higher) . Enter the new Port and Address assignments for this List Data Table in the Table Port and Table Address fields at the bottom of this dialog. Open the Edit List Tables dialog (FIG. FIG. You can use the Power Assign feature in the Edit List Tables dialog to quickly assign Port and Channel information for multiple columns in the List Data Table. via the List Table Power Assign dialog. 3. 179 Change/Port Addr dialog 4. Click the Port/Addr command button. or click the toolbar button). 2. Select a List Data Table (in the Tables list). via Panel > Edit List Tables. 164). Click OK to save the changes and close this dialog.

11 or higher) 173 .Working With List Box Buttons TPDesign4 (v2.

Working With List Box Buttons 174 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

TPDesign4 (v2. or the Page itself). the value is copied to the new location. and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project. the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates the number of buttons selected. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. Click the down arrow next to this field to view a list of all buttons on the active page. Also note that the button name and type are displayed in the text box above the tabs (in the example below. Selecting a button from this list is the same as selecting it in a Design View window: the edit focus shifts to the selected button. General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms.Working With Properties Working With Properties Overview The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page. Programming and States (FIG. When you release the mouse button. 180 Properties Window Drag and Drop Support Properties from the General tab and states from the States tab can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). If one or more buttons are selected in the Workspace. Note that the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates which element of the workspace is currently selected. and the original value is left unchanged. The Properties Window contains three tabs: General. the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. popup page and button properties. the selected button is named "pause". and drag it to another field.11 or higher) 175 . TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. With an item selected. and the button type is general. and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties Window. and the Properties window reflects the properties of the newly selected button. FIG. 180).

provided that the change can be applied to them all. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. 181 Apply To All button Use the Apply to All option to set button properties to edit multiple buttons simultaneously. 182 Prev and Next buttons These buttons allow you to quickly edit the selected buttons individually. Hold down the Shift key and click to select multiple buttons. Also note that while you have multiple buttons selected. 181). The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. This Apply To All button works on multiple button selections.11 or higher) . Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. the Prev or Next buttons are unavailable and every selected button has the edit focus. To make state-oriented changes across multiple states. To make changes that affect all states on a button at once. If the Apply To All button is depressed and you select more than one button to act on. and you select more than one button to act on. All modifications are always done on the button with the edit focus. Typing in or changing a value in any property box will immediately affect all selected buttons. located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (next to the Apply to All button) are activated only when more than one button is selected on a page. If the Apply To All button is not depressed. the Prev or Next buttons will activate on the Properties Control window. you will see a message that states that the value was only applied to those buttons for which it was valid. select the states that you want to edit and they will appear listed in the States tab of the Properties Control window. All modifications are always on the button with the edit focus. You may also notice that one or more (if not all) of the property values in the grid are blank. 176 TPDesign4 (v2. Using the Prev and Next buttons The Prev and Next buttons.Working With Properties Using the Apply To All option The Apply To All button is located at the bottom of the Properties Window (FIG. 182). and the Apply To All button is not depressed (FIG. FIG. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. The only values that will display in the grid while the Apply To All button is depressed are those values that are common among all selected items. In the event that a value is appropriate for one (or more) buttons but inappropriate for others. When you have multiple buttons selected. FIG. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. use the All States option in the States tab (located directly above the other listed states for the selected button). but not on multiple states for a single button.

11 or higher) 177 . or click the toolbar button to activate the Grab Properties tool (FIG. Page or Popup Page that you want to grab. FIG. 184 Property Painter dialog 3. Click on a Button or Page in a Design View window to take a snapshot of the properties and values of the Button. Page or Popup Page in the Design View. click the checkboxes to select the Properties of the selected Button. and paint (copy) them onto another Button. Select Grab Properties Tool from the Edit menu. FIG. This action invokes the Property Painter dialog (also accessible via the View menu). The following example shows the Property Painter dialog invoked as a result of selecting a General-type button (FIG. 185 Selection Tool TPDesign4 (v2. 184). 185). Page or Popup Page: 1. 183). 4. the Design View context menu. 183 Grab Properties Tool 2. With the Selection tool (FIG. Page or Popup Page. The set of selected properties (but not their values) may be named and saved for later use by entering a name in the Property Set text box. See Saving a Properties Set. 5. select another Button. Page or Popup Page that is clicked on.Working With Properties Working With The Property Painter The Grab Properties and Paint Properties tools work together with the Property Painter dialog to allow you to grab (copy) the properties of a selected Button. Click Grab Selected to grab (copy) the selected Properties. FIG. In the Property Painter dialog.

11 or higher) . FIG.Working With Properties Hold the Shift key and left-click to apply the properties to multiple selected Buttons. 178 TPDesign4 (v2. Click Paint Selected to apply the properties that were "grabbed" from the first item to the selected item(s) (FIG. 186). 186 Property Painter dialog Saving a Properties Set Use the Property Set feature in the Property Painter dialog to save a set of Properties (but not their values) that can be recalled later. 6.

Column 2 on the List Box Button will display column 4 from the List Data Table. This value is in 1/100th second increments (default = 2). Auto-Repeat Select wether to apply auto-repeat to the button. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. The options are high-color (16-bit) or true color (24-bit). Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. and select the desired style from the drop-down list There are several types of border styles to choose from. This property is available for Multi-State buttons only. Default = high-color (16-bit) This setting should match that of the host PC. This property is available for Multi-State buttons only. FIG. Auto-repeat causes the button to constantly cycle through its states (Yes/No. TPDesign4 (v2. you could enter (without quotes) "3 4 5 2 1" to populate the List Box Button as follows: Column 1 on the List Box Button will display column 3 from the List Data Table. Animate Time Up The time intervals between states as the button animates from the Off to the On state. Column 3 on the List Box Button will display column 5 from the List Data Table. Border Style To change the Border Style for the selected button. 187 Column Display Order For example. This value is in 1/100th second increments (default = 2). This option is not available for buttons on a popup page. default = No). default = No). and they all can all be assigned to both popup pages and buttons. This property is available for Multi-State buttons only. using a List Data Table that contains 5 columns.11 or higher) 179 . Color Depth Select the color depth to be applied to the button. from left to right.Working With Properties General Properties All General properties (including Page. These properties are editable via the General tab of the Properties Window: Above Popups This option allows you the selected button(s) on a Main page to always remain on top of any popup pages (Yes/No. click Border Style. Column Display Order Enter a string of space-delimited integers to specify the order in which the columns in the List Data Table are displayed in the List Box button. Animate Time Down The timer intervals between states as the button animates from the On to the Off state.

The default is single line. if the user wishes to sort the table based on column 1. To add a group. the button will be rendered by the panel in a subdued state (default = No). If the button is set as Disabled (select Yes from the drop-down). Click the browse (.) button to open the Enter Text dialog. Click the browse (. and finally column 5. This property is enabled only for List Box Buttons. Column 5 on the List Box Button will display column 1 from the List Data Table. the value would be (without quotes.. Column Sort Order Specifies the column sort order for the list table data before populating the list box control. 180 TPDesign4 (v2.. This property is available for Popup Pages only.) button to select a color from the Colors dialog. with a space between each number) "3 1 5". Display Type Click to select the display type to be invoked by this Text Input button (single line or multiple lines). and a List Table Address and Port is assigned. Multiple column sorting is useful when a column contains duplicates or more than one cell is empty.Working With Properties Column 4 on the List Box Button will display column 2 from the List Data Table. Cursor Name Select the desired visual style for the joystick cursor. Disabled Indicates how the selected button will be rendered. when a List Data Table is assigned. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only. Click the browse (. This will create a corresponding folder under the Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). This button property is available for Joystick buttons only. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. Click the down arrow to select from the list of available cursor types. when a List Data Table is assigned.11 or higher) . then column 1. For example.. One or more columns can be specified.) button to open the Enter Text dialog. Group Use this field to add the selected Popup Page to a specific Popup Page Group.. where you can type the description. The value is a space delimited string of integers representing columns in the List Data Table. If however the user wishes the table data to be sorted by column 3. type any value in the Group field. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only.. simply drag the desired popup pages into the desired group folder.. Description Use this text field to enter a general or functional description for this button. the value would be "1". default = No). Compression Select wether to compress the image on the button (Yes/No. To place a popup page in a particular popup group. Cursor Color Specify a color for the Joystick cursor. This property is enabled only for List Box Buttons. and a List Table Address and Port is assigned. where you can type the description.

A back-slash ('\') causes the character that follows to be displayed as the literal character. \A is displayed as just A.9999). the button will disappear when transferred to the panel (default = No). depending on the page design and graphics. measured in 1/10th-second increments. You can edit these fields to apply specific dimension info for the button. Hidden Indicates wether or not the selected button is displayed on the panel. Hide Effect X/Y Pos Measured in pixels. to set the input as required or optional. TPDesign4 (v2. the Hide Effect X/Y Pos (position) fields allow you to specify the starting point on the page for the selected Slide Hide Effect. or Hide Effect Y Pos. For example. The default setting is 0 (top edge of the page). to change or force character case. If you have selected a left or right slide effect (including slide/fade effects). If you have selected a top or bottom slide effect (including slide/fade effects). and/or fill the field from the right or the left. Input Mask This field allows you apply a mask to user input on the panel. these values constantly update to indicate the current dimensions. to create multiple logical fields that act as a single field. enter any character other than those shown in the topics above. If the button is set as Hidden (select Yes from the drop-down).9999). characters). to be invoked when the popup is closed (hidden). in pixels.Working With Properties Height Size values. including spaces and symbols. to specify a range of characters / numbers for each field. Depending on the Slide Hide Effect selected. Note that if you select the button and manually resize it on the page. option may become available: This property is available for Popup Pages only. To define a literal. The default is 0 (the left edge of the page). you can set the Y position for the start of the hide effect (range = 0 . Hide Effect Time This property allows you to specify the total amount of time it will take to execute the selected Hide effect. Hide Effect This property allows you to apply a transition effect to the popup page. the Hide Effect X Pos. Use this option to synchronize your popup page transition effects. you may decide to start the slide at some other point than the absolute left edge of the page. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. This property is available for Popup Pages only. In some cases. This property is available for Popup Pages only. An input mask allows you to force the user to enter the correct type of characters (numbers vs. The Height rows indicate the vertical dimensions of the selected button. you can set the X position for the start of the hide effect (range = 0 . suggest a proper format with fixed characters.11 or higher) 181 .

You can edit these fields to apply specific positioning info for the button. and only when a List Table Port is assigned.Working With Properties Left Position values. List Column An integer value representing the total number of columns in the List Box button. to open the Attach Table To List Box dialog. 182 TPDesign4 (v2. This property is present only when the List Box is in Managed Mode. and the minimum is 1. The other way is to press the Browse button (click inside this field to enable). The number of subordinate buttons in a column depends on the number of rows defined for the list box. List Table Port An integer value representing the port of the List Data Table that the List Box button is attached to. This property is read-only and cannot be edited. The options in this dialog allow you to select a static table that has already been created for in the project. A list box column contains one or more subordinate buttons of the same width. The width of the first column is determined at creation by the width of the list box control. This way you can keep track of which row the button is identified with. List Display A string formatted as a space-delimited list of table column numbers in a List Box Button that the columns of the List Data Table are assigned to. You may alternatively enter the port/address manually (in the Table Port and Table Address text fields in the dialog). justified vertically. these values constantly update to indicate the button's current position. The maximum number of columns that can be set/created is 10. There are two ways to define this property: One is to edit the property directly by typing the Table Port number of a data table (static or dynamic). The Left and Top rows indicate the position of the selected button. In unmanaged mode this property is visible (but still read-only) for the unmanaged subordinate buttons. This dialog will populate both the "List Table Port" and "List Table Address" properties when finished. one subordinate button is created automatically.11 or higher) . in pixels. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. relative to the upper-left corner of the Design View window. List Column Padding An integer value indicating the number of pixels between columns of buttons. Note that if you select the button and manually move it around on the page. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. At creation. This property is available for List Box buttons only.

the subordinate buttons will completely cover the list box container (unless List Row Padding and/or List Column Padding is set to a value greater than 0). The other way is to press the Browse button (click inside this field to enable). There are two ways to define this property: One is to edit the property directly by typing the Table Address number of a data table (static or dynamic). This button property is available for List Box buttons only. When set to no. beginning and end limits are present for the list box. You may alternatively enter the port/address manually (in the Table Port and Table Address text fields in the dialog). A page of table data is simply how much of the table data that can fit on the list box. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This property is enabled only when a List Table Address and Port are assigned. If the user presses the scroll bar down button. List Table Wrap This property specifies a behavior for a list box when attached to two or more pages of table data. the list becomes cyclical. Scrolling past the beginning would wrap back around to the end of the list. The options in this dialog allow you to select a static table that has already been created for in the project. In this way. When set to "yes". This button property is available for List Box buttons only. It is used so that the List Box Container can be selected via the Design View. the next page of data will show up in the list box. The same goes for scrolling up. List Managed This display-only field indicates wether the selected List Box Button is in Managed or Unmanaged mode. This property is present only when the List Box button is in Managed Mode. TPDesign4 (v2. to open the Attach Table To List Box Dialog. This dialog will populate both the "List Table Port" and "List Table Address" properties when finished. This button property is available for List Box buttons only.Working With Properties List Table Address An integer value representing the address of the List Data Table that the List Box button is attached to. List Offset Enabled A flag (yes/no) indicating whether an offset of five pixels is applied to the List Box Container all the way around the subordinate buttons of the list box (default = on).11 or higher) 183 . therefore scrolling would go no further than the beginning or end of the table data. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. List Table Wrap specifies that the list box will "wrap around" and start at the beginning again if the user presses the next page button when the list is at the end of the table data. List Filter Column This property sets the column order for filtering data. If set to "no" (default setting).

only the cell in the preferred row implements the marquee feature on the panel. This button property is available for List Box Container buttons only. and the minimum is 1. The List Preferred Row value has the range from 0 to Row Count (default = 0). This button property is available for List Box buttons only. The maximum number of rows that can be set/created is 50. The height of the first row is determined at creation by the width of the list box control. If a row is specified (greater than 0) then the row has some special properties. and the Preferred Row is greater than zero "0". This button property is available for List Box buttons in Managed Mode only. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. it can have a different height specification than all the other rows through the Preferred Row Height property. At creation. This property is present only when the List Box is in Managed Mode. A list box row contains one or more subordinate buttons of the same height. 184 TPDesign4 (v2. justified horizontally. by enabling preferred row all marquee state properties (Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat) defined for each column are now exclusive to the preferred row. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. The number of subordinate buttons in a row depends on the number of columns defined for the list box. All other rows are specified the same height. the height of all the buttons) excluding the preferred row. one subordinate button is created automatically. First. List Row An integer value representing the total number of rows in the List Box button. List Selectable This property is a value representing the current selection type: single or multi.e. This property is present only when the List Box button is in Managed Mode. Zero "0" disables the preferred row functionality. In unmanaged mode this property is visible (but still read-only) for the unmanaged subordinate buttons. So even though a column's state has marquee enabled.Working With Properties List Preferred Row An integer value designating a particular row in the list box as the preferred row. List Row Padding An integer value indicating the number of pixels between rows of buttons. This property is read-only and cannot be edited. Only the preferred row can have a separate height specification. The height of one row bigger than the rest is needed for easy thumb access via the touch screen. List Preferred Row Height An integer value indicating the height of the preferred row in the list box. This way you can keep track of which row the button is identified with. Marquee state properties are column-based properties. List Row Height An integer value indicating the height (in pixels) of all the rows in the list box (i.11 or higher) . This is useful for Panels like the R4 where the screen is very small. Second. This button property is available for List Box buttons only.

use this drop-down list to select which of four possible passwords to apply to the selection (none. page and popup page. password 1.. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. Modal This setting (Yes/No) controls the user's ability to press a button outside the boundaries of the popup page when the popup page is visible. Max Text Length Use this field to specify the maximum number of characters allowed to be entered via this button. Password Character Type a single character to be used as the password to access this Text Input button on the panel. TPDesign4 (v2. "Button 1 : general".Working With Properties Lock Button Name This option controls how the name of the selected button is managed by the program (Yes/No. See the Generated Button Names section on page 99 for details. etc). Password Protection This option allows you to apply password protection to the selected button(s). Password The password supplied by the designer. where you can type the new name. click Name in the Properties Control Window (General tab) to activate the text field. and you cannot apply the Job name (set in the New Project Wizard) to a page. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. You must use a unique name for each button. Button/Popup 3 etc. Click the browse button (. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. Button/Popup 2. password 3. Default = 5900. default = No). Remote Port The port to be used on the PC whose desktop is to be displayed. by default the buttons are automatically given a sequential two-part name composed of the button number (relative to the number of buttons already created in the Project) and button type. Remote Host The IP or DNS resolvable address of the PC whose desktop is to be displayed. Name To give the button a specific name other than the default Button/Popup 1. S See the Page Flips section on page 107 for details. "Button 2 : multi-state general". separated by a colon (i. The range is 0-2000 (default = 0). You can set up to four passwords per panel. When new buttons are created.e. Page Flip Use this option to assign a page flip (type and target page) to the selected button(s). password 2.11 or higher) 185 . This password must match the password entered into the PC remote desktop server.) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog.. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. This property is available for Popup Pages only. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only.. or password 4).

If the state count is increased.9999). click inside the text field and enter the desired number. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. Show Effect This property allows you to apply a transition effect to the popup page. This property is available for Popup Pages only. By default. Click the browse button (. default = No). 186 TPDesign4 (v2. On Show If this option is turned on. states are removed from the end of the set. measured in 1/10th-second increments. This property is available for Popup Pages only.. you may decide to start the slide at some other point than the absolute left edge of the page. Use this option to synchronize your popup page transition effects. If the count is decreased.11 or higher) .. the popup page will always appear at the position established during popup page design each time it is displayed. you can set the X position for the start of the slide transition effect (range = 0 . or Show Effect Y Pos.9999). the Show Effect X/Y Pos (position) fields allow you to specify the starting point on the page for the selected Slide Show Effect. The default setting is 0 (top edge of the page). Scale To Fit Select wether to automatically scale the image to fit the button (Yes/No. To change the state count for the selected button.Working With Properties Reset Pos. Show Effect X/Y Pos Measured in pixels. If you have selected a left or right slide effect. option may become available: This property is available for Popup Pages only. This property is available for Multi-State (General and Bargraph) buttons only. State Count This field indicates the number of states currently associated with the selected button. This feature allows the state count to be changed via Edit > Find & Replace and with the Paint Properties tool. either the Show Effect X Pos. Show Effect Time This property allows you to specify the total amount of time it will take to execute the Fade Hide effect. depending on the page design and graphics. to be invoked when the popup is opened (shown). new states are added to the end of the set as a duplicate of the last existing state. scaling is disabled. you can set the Y position for the start of the slide transition effect (range = 0 . If you have selected a top or bottom slide effect. Depending on the Slide Show Effect selected. This property is available for Popup Pages only. Slider Name Select the desired visual style for the bargraph slider from the list of Slider types. Slider Color Select a color to apply to the bargraph slider. This might be desirable if the popup page contains a button which provides the end user with the ability to move the popup page at will.) to open the Colors dialog. This property is available for Bargraph buttons only. The default is 0 (the left edge of the page). This property is available for Bargraph buttons only. In some cases.

Touch Style This selection drop-down allows you to set a "touch style" for the selected button(s).Working With Properties TakeNote Enabled Select wether to enable TakeNote functionality on the selected Computer Control button (Yes/No. Pass through: This style allows the user to press "through" one button to press another button underneath. Similarly. in pixels. default = No). relative to the upper-left corner of the Design View window. This button property is available for TakeNote buttons only. If Overall Opacity is set to any other value (for partial transparency). This button property is available for TakeNote buttons only.11 or higher) 187 . This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. Touch Map Click the browse button (. only the icon would respond to a press. Touching the transparent areas of the button does not active the button. in terms of the shape and border style used. TakeNote Port Enter the port to be used on the PC whose desktop is to be displayed on this TakeNote button (default = 1541). You can edit these fields to apply specific positioning info for the button. Note that if you select the button and manually move it around on the page. Popup Page Timeout specifies how long a popup page will remain open and active without a button press (default = 0). Top Left/Top .. by using transparencies you could create a button that appears to be round (although the actual shape of the button is rectangular). Active touch: This touch style limits the active touch area to the visible area of the button. This button property is available for Multi-State Bargraph buttons only. For example. if you created a totally transparent button with no border and an icon. and only if the Value Direction is set to Touch Map. in 1/10th second increments.Position values. Areas of the button that are totally transparent will not respond to a press. TPDesign4 (v2. For example. if a transparent button has a visible border but no icon. The Left and Top rows indicate the position of the selected button. Active Touch requires total transparency on the button in order to work.. only the border will respond to a press. This property is available for Popup Pages only. Timeout This property allows you to specify the Popup Page Timeout. these values constantly update to indicate the button's current position. set the Overall Opacity (state) setting to 0. Active Touch will not work.) to select an image to use as the Touch Map image. via the Select Resource dialog. Bounding box: This touch style forces the panel to respond to a press anywhere within the rectangular boundaries of the button (regardless of transparencies or border styles). the user simply presses the page (with no resulting action). in which case you may not the button to respond if the user presses outside of the circular border. If there is no other button underneath the pass through button. Touch style describes the way buttons behave when pressed. To make a button totally transparent. TakeNote Host Enter the IP or DNS resolvable address of the PC whose desktop is to be displayed on this TakeNote button.

For non-multi state Bargraph buttons. To change a selected button's type.Working With Properties Type The Type (button type) defaults to the button type that was set when the button was created. the options are Vertical or Horizontal. Width Size value. the options are Vertical. This property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons only. or Touch Map. This property indicates the horizontal width in pixels of every button in the column. For Multi State Bargraph buttons. click Type in the Properties Control Window (General tab) to activate the button type drop-down menu. Horizontal.11 or higher) . Note that if you select the button and manually resize it on the page. these values constantly update to indicate the current dimensions. Value Direction Click the down arrow to select the orientation of the bargraph. containing a list of all available button types. You can edit this field to apply specific dimension info for the button. 188 TPDesign4 (v2.

.the button will change states (On to Off) on a Push/Release to indicate a channel event always on .the button will always display the On state (and will not indicate a Push/Release) momentary . to expand the Advanced Codes menu to show the available functions. Feedback Select the type of feedback to associate with this button (channel. inverted channel. The combination of Channel Port and Channel Code must be unique. Command Output Specify the command string sent to the master on button push. The combination of Address Port and Address Code must be unique.. 2. blink.) to open the Enter Text dialog. then click on Advanced Codes to access the advanced codes menu. or none). Channel Port Select or enter the port to which the selected button's channel code will be applied. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only.the button will "blink" (switch between On and Off states) on a Push/Release Level Aux This (read-only) field indicates the auxiliary level sent to the Master on the selected port.11 or higher) 189 .the button will change states (Off to On) on a Push/Release to indicate a channel event inverted channel . Channel Code Select or enter the channel code sent to the master on the selected port. only while the button is being pressed. momentary.the button will always display the Off state (and will not indicate a Push/Release) channel .the button will change states. Command Port Select or enter the port to which the command string output will be applied. always on. Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. The NXP-PLV (PosiTrack Video Touch Panel) uses a set of reserved channel and level codes that are reserved for hardware functionality. If the Channel Port is set to 0 = Setup Port.Working With Properties Programing Properties All Programming properties (including Page. none . Address Port Select or enter the port to which the selected button's address code will be associated. These properties are editable via the Programming tab of the Properties Window: Address Code Select or enter the address code sent to the master on the selected port. 1. TPDesign4 (v2. Enter the command output and click OK (or Cancel to exit without saving). Click the '+' sign beside Computer Control. you can click on Channel Code to open the Basic Codes options. Click the browse button (. These codes cannot be re-assigned to other pages or buttons in the panel project. and only if a Level Code has been assigned. blink .

For example. When set to Drag. Select 0 (Setup port) or 1 as the level port for this button. For Relative level control. These options require additional Level Control parameters to be defined. Relative or None). Range Aux Inverted If set to Yes. Level Control Repeat Time This value determines the repeat time (in 1/1000th-second increments) for Relative level control. the user can hold the button down for one second to cause the level to raise or lower repeatedly (according to the specified Level Control Value) without having to press the button each time. For relative level control. this value determines the amount of adjustment relative to the current level resulting from this button. this value can be entered as a positive integer (to raise the relative level setting) or a negative integer (to lower the relative level setting). this value determines the level value that will be recalled by this button. Level Control Type These options allow General buttons to directly control a level without the need for NetLinx code. Relative: The button increments or decrements the current level value by a fixed amount. the user can touch anywhere inside the joystick button and move the level (according to the Range Drag Increment setting). Select Auto-Assign to automatically assign a level code to this button. Select the desired level function: Display Only: This option creates a bargraph or joystick button that only displays level information (but cannot be used to control levels). Active Centering: This option creates an active bargraph or joystick button that returns to it's center position when released. Absolute: The button acts like a preset and sets the level to the desired value. Select a level control type for the selected button (Absolute. only the Level Aux range is inverted (default = No). Level Control Value For Absolute level control. The NXP-PLV (PosiTrack Video Touch Panel) uses a set of reserved channel and level codes that are reserved for hardware functionality.11 or higher) . Active: This option creates a bargraph or joystick button for controlling levels according the other button parameters set here. Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons. Drag: This option creates an active bargraph or joystick button that responds to a relative touch distance on the button after the initial touch. to allow for glide-point style controls. Drag Centering: This option creates an active drag bargraph or joystick button that returns to it's center position when released.Working With Properties Level Code Select or enter the level code sent to the Master on the selected port (none. Level Port Select or enter the port to which the Level Code will be applied. These codes cannot be re-assigned to other pages or buttons in the panel project. 2 or auto-assign). Level Function This option is only available for Bargraph. 190 TPDesign4 (v2. 1. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only. if this value is set to 1000.

Working With Properties

Range Drag Increment
This field allows you to specify the amount of change that will be registered by one full drag across the control, to allow for fine/coarse adjustments. This property is available for Bargraph, Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons only, and only if Drag is selected as the Level Function.

Range Low
Set the bottom of the level range (0-255).

Range High
Set the top of the level range (0-255).

Range Inverted
If set to Yes, the range is inverted, so that the top of the level range is 0 and the bottom of the range is 255 on both the X and Y axis (default = No). This button property is available for Bargraph, Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons only.

Range Time Up
Specify the amount of time (in 1/10th seconds) it will take for the bargraph to go from the bottom to the top of the specified range (default = 2). This button property is available for General buttons, if a Level Control Type (other than "none") has been selected. This button property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons, and only if one of a specific set of Level Functions was selected. These are: Active Active Centering Drag Drag Centering It is not applicable if the Level Function property is set to "display only".

Range Time Down
Specify the amount of time (in 1/10th seconds) it will take for the bargraph to go from the top to the bottom of the specified range (default = 2). This button property is available for General buttons, if a Level Control Type (other than "none") has been selected. This button property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons, and only if one of a specific set of Level Functions was selected. These are: Active Active Centering Drag Drag Centering It is not applicable if the Level Function property is set to "display only".

String Output
Specify the output string sent to the master on button push, on the specified String Output Port.

1. Click the browse button (...) to open the Enter Text dialog. 2. Enter the output string and click OK (or Cancel to exit without saving). String Output Port
Select or enter the port to which the String Output will be applied.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

191

Working With Properties

State Properties
All State properties (including Page, Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. These properties are editable via the States tab of the Properties Window:

Bitmap
To apply an image file as the background image to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select an image file from among those imported into the project. If pairs of image resources exist that end in *off/*on, *f/*n, *0/*1, *1/*2 (case insensitive), and the first in the pair is applied to the Off state of a General button, the second will be automatically applied to the On state to make it easier to set up images on a General button.

Bitmap Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Bitmap X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button, for each state. This property is available only if the Bitmap Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Bitmap Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button, for each state. This property is available only if the Bitmap Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Border Color
To change the border color for the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Border Name
To change the Border Name for the selected button, click Border Name, and select the desired border from the drop-down list. If a Border Style was specified (in the General tab), then the borders listed here are limited to those contained in the selected Border Style. If no Border Style was specified (none), then all border names are available in the provided list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Chameleon Image
This field allows you to apply a Chameleon Image to the selected state(s). This property is only available only if the Border Name has been set to None. Chameleon Images can be used to create special effects such animated glow and drop-shadows. Click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select an image to apply as a Chameleon Image.

192

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Draw Order
This field allows you to specify the order in which the elements of a button, page or popup page are drawn. By default, the draw order is: 1) fill, 2) bitmap,3) icon, 4) text, 5) border. Click the browse button (...) to access the State Draw Order dialog to change the draw order. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Fill Color
To change the fill color for the selected state, click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For bargraph buttons, the preview image in the State Manager works differently than for the other button types. For bargraph buttons, the on and off states are used to indicate a level setting rather than a push/release. As a result, the button image in the Design View window will indicate the bargraph button as it will appear on the touch panel, but the thumbnails in the State Manager window indicate each state as a separate preview image. For example, the bargraph button shown below uses yellow as the On state fill color, and green as the Off state fill color. In the State Manager window you would see the On state (yellow) and the Off state (green) as individual thumbnails. The Button Preview window works differently for bargraph buttons than for the other button types. Rather than using the Push button to view the different states, click and drag on the slider with your mouse cursor (in the Button Preview window) to preview the feedback. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Font
To change the font used for text on the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Font dialog, where you can select a Font, Style and Size for the button text. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Icon Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the icon (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Icon Slot
To apply an icon to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select a slot assignment (icon) to apply.

Icon X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the icon (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is only available only if the Icon Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Icon Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the icon (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is only available only if the Icon Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

193

Working With Properties

Marquee Direction
This field allows you to specify the direction in which marquee text will move. By default, this property is set to Disabled. Click inside the field to activate the down arrow, to select from the other marquee direction options: The marquee direction options include: Disabled - When this property is set to Disabled, the text on the button will not be treated as marquee text. Scroll left - Text scrolls horizontally to the left. Scroll right - Text scrolls horizontally to the right. Ping-pong - Text "bounces" back and forth horizontally between the left and right boundaries of the button area. Scroll up - Text scrolls vertically upward. Scroll down - Text scrolls vertically downward. Both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes.

Marquee Repeat
This field allows you to specify whether the marquee text element on a button will appear to repeat the text string once it has moved all the characters beyond the boundaries of the button. The movement of marquee text is specified by the Marquee Direction button state property. By default, this property is set to No. To enable repeat marquee text, click inside the field to activate the down arrow to change to Yes. Both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes.

Overall Opacity
Use this field to specify the level of opacity for the selected button (0 - 255, where 0 is totally transparent, and 255 is totally opaque). The default is 255. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Scale Bitmap To Fit
This property is available only if the Bitmap selected for this button/state is a dynamic image. Note that this option is available only for Dynamo Dynamic Images (not for Dynamo Resource Images) This option scales the Dynamo Dynamic Image down to fit the container button, popup or page. It will not scale Dynamo Dynamic Images up to fit. To automatically scale the dynamic image (down only) to fit the button, click the down-arrow and select Scale To Fit (default = No). The options available for Scale Bitmap To Fit depend on the panel type associated with your project: No - The Dynamo Resource image will not be scaled at all, and the image will be arbitrarily centered on the container button, popup or page. If the Dynamo Resource image is larger than it's container, the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. This is the default setting. Use the Bitmap Justification State property to position the dynamic image bitmap within the button borders. 2x - This option doubles the size of the Dynamo Resource image. Note that this option is only available for Dynamo Resource Images (not for Dynamo Dynamic Images). See the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6. If the resulting image is larger than it's container, the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. Scale To Fit - This option automatically resizes the Dynamo Dynamic image, maintaining the aspect ratio of the image.

194

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Sound
To change or apply a new sound file to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select a sound file (WAV or MP3) from among those imported into the project.

Streaming Source
Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream. This property is available only if Streaming Video is selected as the Video Fill). Streaming Video is only available as a Video Fill option if the project specifies a touch panel that supports streaming video.

Text
To change or enter the text to be displayed on the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Enter Text dialog, where you can type the new button text. Use the Preview Using Font option to view the text as it will appear in the selected font, style and size (on by default). Unicode characters may be entered via the Enter Text dialog only (not through in-place editing in the States tab of the Properties Control window). When Unicode text is input, the name of the button will not match it's Off state text. Formatting codes can be used in the state text for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons.

Text Color
To change the text color for the selected state, click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in a selected column.

Text Effect
Text effects are graphic effects that can applied to button/page/popup text (for example, the Glow effect applies a neon glow or halo effect to the text on the selected button/state(s). Each text effect is available in several variations ((i.e. Small, Medium, Large or XtraLarge). To apply a text effect to the button text, click the browse button (...) to access the Text Effect sub-menu. This sub-menu presents all available text effects, sorted by type. Click the + symbol next to any effect type in the sub-menu to see all of the variations on that effect. Once you have selected a text effect, use the Text Effect Color field to specify a color for the effect. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Text Effect Color
If you have selected to apply a text effect, use this field to specify the color of the selected effect. Click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Text Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the button text (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column

Text X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the text (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is available only if the Text Justification State property has been set to Absolute).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

195

Working With Properties

Text Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the text (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is available only if the Text Justification State property has been set to Absolute).

Video Cropping
Use this field to specify the number of scan lines to be removed from both the top and bottom of the video signal. For best results, set the video button's aspect ratio to match the video input aspect ratio. This property is only available if the Video Fill State property is set to either Composite Video or Component/RGB Video.

Video Fill
Click the down arrow to select from a drop-down list of video formats that are supported by the touch panel specified in your project. Video-capable Modero panels support Composite video, and Enhanced Modero panels support Composite, Component/RGB and Streaming video formats. If you have specified the NXP-TPI4, click the down-arrow to select from the list of available video slots on the TPI4 (video slot 1,2,3 or 4) to use as the source for this video fill. If you select Streaming Video as the Video Fill, then the Streaming Source state property is made available. Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream. This property is only available for video-capable panels. See the Video Capabilities for Modero Panels section on page 5 and the Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels section on page 5 for details.

Video Touch Pass-Thru
Select Yes from the drop-down menu to enable video pass-thru (disabled by default). This property is enabled only if the Video Fill State property has been set to either Composite Video or Component/RGB Video. Video pass-thru allows you to pass touch/control information from a touch input device (touch panel, mouse or keyboard) through a NXP-TPI/4 to a controlled device with video-out capabilities. This feature is also used in conjunction with the MPS (mouse pass-thru) and KPS (keyboard passthru) commands.

Word Wrap
Use this option to enable the wrapping of text strings that are too long to be displayed across the page on one line. Click the down-arrow and select Yes or No from the drop-down list (default = No). Note that both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Using the All States Option
Use the All States option (in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to apply any changes you make to all states on the selected button. Note that if you have multiple buttons selected (Shift+click to select multiple buttons a page), the All States option only affects states for the button that has Edit Focus. The button with edit focus would be the last one selected, and is indicated by having red-colored square handles (as opposed to the black squares that indicate that a button is selected, but does not currently have edit focus).

196

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties Searching For Button Properties Select Edit > Find (or click the toolbar button) to access the Find dialog. Select Find Next to continue the search. or across the entire Project. select the button properties to use as the search criteria. and the first button found that satisfies the search criteria is selected in the Design View. General and State properties are separated into two sections (labeled as General and States). in which case you can use the Find Next button to cycle through the pages that contain buttons whose values match the search criteria. to select all State-oriented button properties. based on the specified criteria and scope. the Select All button is disabled. use the Find Next button to search the current page only. The program will inform you if no buttons are found that match the search criteria. 188). Open the Find dialog (FIG. Select Select All to close the Find dialog and select every button that meets the criteria. For example. 188 Find dialog 2. You can include any General or State button property as search criteria. 4. In the Search Scope area. In the Search Criteria table. or any combination of search criteria. To select all General button properties. FIG. If the scope of the search is set to Current Page. Scroll down to view all of the available button properties that can be used as search criteria. which allows you to search for any button property value either within the currently open Page. TPDesign4 (v2. If the scope of the search is set to Entire Panel. To search for button properties: 1. click in the checkbox next to the General heading. 3. you can perform a search based on button type.11 or higher) 197 . the Find In Page dialog is compressed to only show the buttons that satisfy the search criteria. When the first instance of the criteria is found. Click the plus symbol (+) to expand the views. and state count (among many others). Click the minus symbol (-) next to the General and States headings to collapse the sections. border style. click in the checkbox next to the States heading. You can specify to search for any General or State button property. select either Entire Panel or Current Page. name.

Working With Properties

When you select a General as well as a State-oriented search criteria, only buttons that match the General criteria, and within that set, the states that match the State criteria will be candidates for the replace operation. For example, if you set the search criteria to include both the Glow-S border style (a General property) and yellow as the Fill Color (a State property), only those buttons with a Border Style of Glow-S are candidates, and within that set of candidates, only those states whose Fill Color is set to yellow satisfy the search criteria.

Searching and Replacing Button Properties
Select Edit > Find & Replace (or click the toolbar button) to access the Find and Replace dialog, which allows you to find (and optionally replace) any button property value with another value of your choosing. You can specify the scope of the search to either the currently open Page only, or across the entire Project (FIG. 189).

FIG. 189 Find and Replace dialog,

To search and replace button properties:

1. Open the Find & Replace dialog (see above). 2. In the Search Criteria table, select the button properties to use as the search criteria. You can include any
General or State button property as search criteria. General and State properties are separated into two sections (labeled as General and States). Scroll down to view all of the available button properties that can be used as search criteria. Click the minus symbol (-) next to the General and States headings to collapse the sections. Click the plus symbol (+) to expand the views. To select all General button properties, click in the checkbox next to the General heading; to select all State-oriented button properties, click in the checkbox next to the States heading.

3. In the Search Scope area, select either Entire Panel or Current Page.
If the scope of the search is set to Entire Panel, the Select All button is disabled, in which case you can use the Find Next button to cycle through the pages that contain buttons whose values match the search criteria. If the scope of the search is set to Current Page, use the Find Next to search the current page only, based on the specified criteria and scope.

4. In the Replace Values table, select the button properties to use as the replace values. The Replace Values
do not necessarily have to match the Search Criteria (although they may). It is also possible to replace multiple values or establish multiple search criteria. For example, to change the Border Style on one or more buttons, select Border Style in the Search Criteria table, then select the particular border style to search for from the drop-down list. Then, select

198

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Border Style in the Replace Values table, and select the desired replacement border style from the dropdown list. Repeat this process for as many other button properties as needed.

5. When the first instance of the criteria is found, the Find In Page dialog is displayed, listing the buttons
that satisfy the search criteria, and the first button found that satisfies the search criteria is selected in the Design View. Select Find Next to continue the search. Select Replace All to close the Find dialog select every button that meets the criteria. The program informs you of the number of buttons affected by this change. All replace actions support full Undo / Redo capabilities. The program will inform you if no buttons are found that match the search criteria. When you select a General as well as a State-oriented search criteria, only buttons that match the General criteria, and within that set, the states that match the State criteria will be candidates for the replace operation. For example, if you set the search criteria to include both the Glow-S border style (a General property) and yellow as the Fill Color (a State property), only those buttons with a Border Style of Glow-S are candidates, and within that set of candidates, only those states whose Fill Color is set to yellow satisfy the search criteria.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

199

Working With Properties

200

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Working With States
Overview
All G4 panel entities (Pages, popup pages and buttons) have at least one state. Pages and popup pages have only one state. General, Bargraph and Text Input buttons have only two states (on/off). Joystick buttons only use one state (Off). Multi-State General and Multi-State Bargraph buttons can have up to 256 states. States start at 1. The ability to set the State Properties (including border name, border color, fill color, text color, video fill, bitmap, bitmap justification, icon assignment, icon justification, font, text, text justification, word wrap preference and sound) is provided at the state level, via the States tab of the Properties Window.

State Manager Window
The State Manager window allows you to view and modify individual states. The State Manager window supports full Cut, Copy, Delete, Insert, Replace and Paste as well as drag and drop capabilities (FIG. 190).

FIG. 190 State Manager window - showing a multi-state button (6 states)

The State Manager context window (open via right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager) support allows the user to Add single or multiple states, Replace states, Insert single or multiple states and Remove states. For Multi-State General buttons the different states are used to animate a button from Off to On (Range Time Up) and back again to Off (Range Time Down). When the button is turned on it will display all the assigned states from first to last with a specified time interval between each state's display. When the button is turned back off, the states will be displayed in reverse order. The interstate time intervals are user definable in 1/10th second increments. A zero entry will automatically advance / retreat to the ending / beginning state without displaying any intervening states. For Multi-State Bargraph buttons, the level will directly reflect the displayed state. You can set an allowable range within a bargraph that has states. Anything outside of that range will not be represented by a state. For buttons with multiple states, Send Commands can set the state number, provided it is not a level type button.

State Manager Context Menu
Right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to open the State Manager context menu, which includes options to add single or multiple states, replace states, insert single or multiple states, and remove states. Use Ctrl+click to select multiple individual button states. Use Shift+click to select a range of states (between two selections). Use Ctrl+A to select all button states.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

201

Working With States

The items in this context menu include: Size - This option sets the size of the button thumbnail views as they appear in the State Manager window. Add States - This option opens the Add States dialog, which allows you to add multiple states to the selected button (up to a total of 255 states). Insert States - This option opens the Insert States dialog, which allows you to insert multiple states to the selected button. This option inserts the specified number of states directly after the selected (highlighted) state. Quick Input - Click to open the Quick Input sub-menu, where you can specify how to use the Quick Input feature (Current Property, Text or Disabled). Use Quick Input to make fast edits to various page and button elements and properties. Cut/Copy/Paste - Use these options to either cut, copy or paste a selected button state to/from clipboard memory. Replace - Use this option to replace the selected button state with the contents of clipboard memory. Delete - Use this option to delete the selected button state(s) from the button. Select All - This option selects all states associated with the selected button. Reverse States - This option reverses the order of states selected in the State Manager window. The selected states do no have to be contiguous. Set As Display State - This option sets the state that is currently being displayed in the Design View as the display state for the button. Image/Text Positioning - This option opens the Text/Image Position dialog, which allows you to specify the position of images and/or text on the selected button state(s). Animation Wizard - This option launches the Animation Wizard. The Animation Wizard guides you through the process of creating an animated button. Tweeners - Click to open the Tweeners sub-menu where you can select from several types of tweeners to use (for animation purposes).

Adding States To a Button
There are three ways in which new states can be added to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button (the number of states is fixed for the other button types): Duplicating an Existing State on the Button Adding States From the Clipboard Adding States Through Drag-and-Drop

Duplicating an Existing State on the Button
One way to add new states to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button is by duplicating an existing state on the button:

1. If the new states are to be added to the end of the collection (in the State Manager window), right-click to
open the State Manager Context Menu, and select Add States.

2. If the new states are to be inserted elsewhere in the collection, first select the state prior to which the new
states will be created, then right-click to open the State Manager Context Menu and select Insert States.

3. The Add States dialog (or the Insert States dialog if you selected Insert States) is displayed (FIG. 191).

FIG. 191 Add States dialog & Insert States dialogs

202

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Use these dialogs to specify the number of states to be created, and which existing state to duplicate (which will be highlighted in the State Manager as the state number is changed).

4. When the desired number of states and the state to duplicate have been chosen, press OK and the new
states will be added to the collection in the desired location. Otherwise, press Cancel to exit the dialog without creating any states.

Adding States From the Clipboard
One way to add new states to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button is by pasting states from the clipboard. Pasting states from the clipboard offers more power and flexibility than single state duplication. States may be copied from another button, page, or popup page, or even from a different panel:

1. First select the button, page, or popup page whose states will be copied. 2. In the State Manager window, select the source states. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add
states to the selection. Left-click + Shift to select a range of states.

3. When the source states have been selected, copy them to the clipboard (Ctrl-C). 4. With the source states copied to the clipboard, select the Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph button to
which the states in the clipboard should be copied (in the State Manager). Select the state prior to which the new states will be inserted. To add the copied states to the end of the series, ensure that no states are currently selected in the State Manager (or select the last state in the series).

5. Paste the states from the clipboard (Ctrl-V).
When copying states from another button or from a popup page, the pasted state's border style may be modified to ensure that it is an acceptable style in the button's border family.

Drag & Drop To Add States
A simplified alternative to using the clipboard to add copies of states within the same button is to use drag-anddrop:

1. First select the source state(s). Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add multiple states to the
selection. Hold down the Shift key while left-clicking to select a range of states.

2. With the source states selected, press and hold the right mouse button while over one of the selected
states. While continuing to press the right mouse button, move the mouse to the location where the states will be copied (FIG. 192).

FIG. 192 Drag & Drop To Add States

If the states are to be added to the end of the collection, drag the source states beyond the last state. If they are to be added elsewhere in the collection, drag the source states either over the state prior to which the new states will be inserted, or over the space between state thumbnails where the new states will be inserted.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

203

Working With States

3. Release the right mouse button and select Insert copy... from the drag-and-drop menu (FIG. 193).

FIG. 193 Drag & Drop To Add States (Insert Copy...selected)

4. The new States are added according to the option selected in the drag-and-drop menu (FIG. 194):

FIG. 194 Drag & Drop To Add States (States copied before State 3)

Setting the Maximum Active State For a Button
You can set the maximum active state on a multi-state button by selecting the last state in a sequence (in the State Manager window) and selecting the States > Set As Max Active State option. The state tagged as the max active state will be the last one included in the multi-state sequence. All states beyond the max active state are ignored when the button is pushed. Note that the states that occur after the max active state in the sequence are displayed with crosshatching across the labels on the thumbnails in the State Manager window, to indicate which states will not be included in the multi-state sequence.

Removing States From A Button
States can be removed from a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button (the number of states is fixed for the other button types) by either deleting them from the collection, or by cutting them to the clipboard. Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph buttons must have at least two states. Actions that would cause the number of states to drop below two are not allowed.

Deleting States 1. Select the states to be deleted. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add states to the selection.
Hold down the Shift key while left-clicking to add a range of states to the selection.

2. Delete the selected states by selecting the Edit > Delete, State Manager Context Menu > Delete, or the
Del key.

204

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Cutting States To the Clipboard 1. Select the states to be cut. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add states to the selection. Hold
down the Shift key while left-clicking to add a range of states to the selection.

2. Cut the selected states to the clipboard by selecting Edit > Cut, State Manager Context Menu > Cut, or
the Ctrl-X keyboard accelerator.

Changing the Order Of States On A Button
Changing the order of states in a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button can be accomplished either through the clipboard or by drag-and-drop:

Reordering States Through the Clipboard 1. In the State Manager window, select the states to be moved.
Ctrl + click to select multiple states individually. Shift + click to select a range of states.

2. Cut the selected states to the clipboard (Ctrl-X). 3. If the states are to be moved to the end of the collection: a. Ensure that no states are currently selected in the State Manager (click anywhere outside of a state
thumbnail, or press ESC).

b. Then, paste the states from the clipboard by selecting Edit > Paste, State Manager Context Menu >
Paste, or the Ctrl-V keyboard accelerator.

4. If the states are to be moved elsewhere in the collection: a. Left-click to select the state prior to which the new states will be inserted. b. Then insert the states from the clipboard by selecting Edit > Insert, State Manager Context Menu >
Insert, or the Ctrl-V keyboard accelerator.

Reordering States Through Drag-and-Drop
A simplified alternative to using the clipboard to reorder states is to use drag-and-drop.

1. Select the states to be moved.
Ctrl + click to select multiple states individually. Shift + click to select a range of states.

2. Press and hold the left mouse button while over one of the selected states. While continuing to press the
left mouse button, move the mouse to the location where the states will be moved. If the states are to be moved to the end of the collection, drag the states beyond the last state. If they are to be moved elsewhere in the collection, drag the states over the space between state thumbnails where they will be moved.

3. Release the left mouse button (the same operation can also be performed with a right mouse button dragand-drop, selecting "Move…" from the drag-and-drop menu).

Copying/Pasting States From a Page, Popup Page or Button
Copying a State to the Clipboard
Copying a state from a page or popup page is possible by selecting the desired states in the State Manager then either clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu or clicking on the Copy button from the main toolbar. You may also right click and select copy from the context menu.

Pasting a State from the Clipboard
You may paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or by clicking the Paste toolbar button) a previously copied state onto a corresponding state in the State Manager (for the page or popup page).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

205

Working With States

Pasting a state on the panel name in the Panel Navigator (which is for pages or popup pages only), on the folder named Pages (which is for pages only), on the folder named Popup Pages (which is for popup pages only) is not allowed.

Draw Order (Z-Order)
Z-Order, or "Draw Order" refers to the order in which the various visual elements of a Page, Popup Page or Button are drawn on the screen. The element at the top of the Z-Order overlaps all other elements. The top of the Z-Order is like the top layer in a multi-layer drawing. The element at the bottom of the Z-Order is overlapped by all other elements. The bottom of the ZOrder is like the bottom layer in a multi-layer drawing. By default, the state draw order is:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

fill bitmap icon text border

You can change the draw order via the options in the State Draw Order dialog.

Changing the Draw Order for Selected States
Use the State Draw Order dialog to specify the draw order for selected states:

1. Select a button, page or popup page. 2. Click the Browse button (...) in the Draw Order State property to access the State Draw Order dialog
(FIG. 195).

FIG. 195 State Draw Order dialog

3. Select an element in the list, and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move the element up or
down in the list.

4. Repeat with the other elements in the list to rearrange the order as desired. 5. Click OK to close the dialog.
Note that the new draw order is indicated in the Draw Order state property.

206

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Function Codes

Working With Function Codes
Overview
In terms of designing buttons that interact with and control the various devices on the control system, TPD4 uses a concept that is familiar to TPDesign3 users, but which has a new name in TPD4: Function Codes. Function Codes were known as Channel Codes and Variable Text Codes in TPDesign3. In TPD4, the term Function Codes refers to all three of the code types that can be assigned to buttons: Channel Codes: Displayed in the upper-left corner of the button, the channel codes indicate the port number and the channel code associated with the button. The channel codes represent communication out of the panel to the master controller. Address Codes: Displayed in the lower-right corner of the button, address codes in TPD4 are similar to the Variable Text Codes in TPDesign3. The address code represents communication from the master controller to the panel, causing the panel to do something (i.e. indicate feedback, display a text string, etc). Level Codes: Displayed in the lower-left corner of the button, level codes represent bi-directional communication between the panel and the master controller (i.e. the panel can cause a change in a level setting, and a changed level setting generates feedback on the panel). Each function code is a two-part number separated by a colon: Port Number:Channel/Address/Level Number (depending on which function code you are looking at). In the example below, the button function code assignments all indicate port 1 and channel/level/address 1 (FIG. 196).

FIG. 196 Button Function Code Assignments

The easiest way to handle function codes is to create and finalize your touch panel pages and buttons (with function codes) before generating the supporting Axcess or NetLinx program code. That way, in case you have to change any aspect of the project (i.e. add/remove controlled equipment, test strings, graphics, etc), you can update the function code assignments in TPD4, rather than having to re-write your code. There are several key differences in the way Function Codes work in TPD4 relative to the way they worked in TPDesign3: "Devices" in TPDesign3 are known as "Ports" in TPD4 (the maximum number of available ports in TPD4 is 100). Where there was a maximum number of 255 channel codes per device in TPDesign3, you can assign up to 4000 codes per port in TPD4. Unlike TPDesign3, TPD4 lets you to assign Address and Channel Codes directly to a page.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

207

Alternatively. The maximum number of address codes per port is 4000. The maximum number of level codes per port is 600. as well as the current state of buttons in the Design View window via the View > Display Function Codes option (or the toolbar button). If Display Function Codes is enabled. press the F7 key to toggle the function codes. Function Codes .11 or higher) . they will also be included in printed output.Limitations The maximum number of channel codes per port is 4000. FIG. 197 Function Code Map 208 TPDesign4 (v2. Function Code Map Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the Function Code Map (FIG. The maximum number of ports in TPD4 is 100. 197).Working With Function Codes Show/Hide Function Codes You can choose to display function codes.

they will now appear in the Function Map and can be modified there just like button function codes. Therefore. Selecting an item in the tree and then left clicking again will provide an in-place edit of the code value. and fix any problems that are found. displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Navigator window. Select Panel > Verify Function Codes to automatically verify the active project's Function Code Map. TPDesign4 (v2. Address and Level codes via these folders. Setting the Address. Address Codes. you cannot drag and drop an Address Code (regardless of the port folder that contains it) into any port folder contained in either the Channel or Level folders. you cannot edit String or Command Outputs the same way. A double-click action on the item will open the associated page (or popup page) and place the edit focus on that item. While you can (in-place) edit the Channel. Channel or Level port to the setup port provides a list of predefined actions.Working With Function Codes The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes. and within Port by Code. For example.Setup Port Setting the Address. 0. Level Codes).e. This list is sorted by Port. Neither String or Command Outputs support any type of drag and drop operations. battery.11 or higher) 209 . These can only be edited via the Programming tab of the Properties Control window. within the primary folder the selected item belongs to (i. ensure that the codes selected apply to your particular panel type. Channel or Level port to the setup port ("0") provides a list of predefined actions. Some of the actions may be hardware dependent. and/or cradle). String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file. Channel Codes. Address codes. In the event that an inappropriate code is selected for a given panel type. If codes have been assigned to any of the panel's sensors (light. You can use the Function Code Map to delete codes as well as drag and drop items from one port to another. Level codes. motion. that code will be ignored.

Once you ensure that the desired button or buttons have been selected. left-click on the button in the set that should receive the first channel / address code. 2. Use Power Assign to streamline this process. In some cases.11 or higher) . all you need to do is bring up the Power Assign dialog. Power Assign works only at the button level. 198). by following the instructions below and utilizing the Begin Assignment At and Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment options. address and level function codes for any given button. To accomplish this. Clear Channels First One powerful feature of Power Assign is the ability to clear the various function codes from the buttons. and any of the buttons in the group you are assigning already have codes assigned. 2. Assign Codes Next assign new function codes: 1. you need to understand the nuances of some of the options involved: 210 TPDesign4 (v2. 198 Power Assign dialog One valuable use of this feature is to establish a contiguous range of channel / address codes on a set of buttons. then: 1. Click Assign. then by holding down the CTRL key. and does not affect pages or popup pages. Select Button > Power Assign (or press F8) to open the Power Assign dialog (FIG. Click Assign. select Assign. one can assign channel / address codes to every button in the set with significantly fewer mouse clicks and keystrokes than would otherwise be possible. this may be what you want to have happen. or on a group of selected buttons. If you don't clear the codes first. Address or Level. 3. select Clear. 3. The Power Assign feature can operate on a single button. FIG.Working With Function Codes Using Power Assign One of the big time-eating factors of creating a touch panel file is correctly setting up the channel. but usually you'll want to clear them before assigning. select Channel. Address or Level. To use take full advantage of Power Assign. Under Function Code Type. Under Function Code Type. and other properties that depend on button type. select each of the remaining buttons in the set in the order in which you want the channel / address codes to be assigned. It is good practice to clear the function codes before any Assign Codes operations. Under Function Code Action. Under Function Code Action. they will show up as used when Power Assign does its' checks. select Channel. Finally.

it's easy to click Clear Codes and hit the assign button again. and level codes (in addition to the currently displayed state) in the corners of the buttons. Since MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE works on a particular port. Next.Working With Function Codes Begin Assignment At (Power Assign) When Begin Assignment At is selected (in the Power Assign dialog) you can specify the starting value of the Port and Function (Channel. use CTRL-select to select the buttons in the order you want to assign the channels. check the Wrap Within Port ID option. One can also simply undo the action if desired. and click Assign again. open the Power Assign dialog. as in a numeric keypad. Next. This will visually display the channel. since the order is important. In these cases. Another thing that comes into play with being able to use multiple ports is that you may need to confine certain ranges of channel codes to a single port to take advantage of the DEFINE_MUTUALLY_EXCLUSIVE channel grouping in the code. However. which is handy when you need both the channel and address codes to have the same numeric values. If the channels are split across ports. make sure to create the selection using CTRL-Select. or Level) code. and TPD4 will find the next available free channels. click Channel under Function Code Type. Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment (Power Assign) This is used when the channel codes have to be in order. TPDesign4 (v2. skipping used channels and continuing on until all available channels have been assigned. with no breaks between them. Since the selection is retained after any operation. use the Functions tab of the Workspace Navigator and click back and forth between the channel and address options. and click Assign. and make a note of the start channel. just like the standard Auto Assign. you're not limited to 256 channel and address codes. uncheck this option. if you make a mistake. Look for a clear range of channel and address codes large enough. The Begin Assignment At function is particularly useful for setting up things like numeric keypads. Then supply the port and channel code values. address. since you might be using offset math in your code to process the button pushes. things like SYSTEM_CALLS are based upon all the channels coming from a single device (port). Check Begin Assignment At and Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment. You can visually verify that the desired action was accomplished by ensuring that the Display Function & State Overlay option is selected from the View menu. the assign operation begins at the first available channel. Here's the setup you would use: 1. Wrap Within Port ID (Power Assign) Since touch panels support more than one port. 3. if the order is important to you. If you don't care what channels are assigned. One nice thing about the Power Assign palette is that it retains its settings after use. First.11 or higher) 211 . In this case the values will be subject to whether or not you've set the Begin Assignment At checkbox. Address. one must ensure that the group of buttons is entirely within a single port. where you need the channel codes to begin at a specific value. the feedback part of the System Call won't work. 2. In either of these cases. Remember that Power Assign processes the function code assignments based on the order in the selection so. While initially somewhat confusing. If you don't check the Begin Assignment At option. which ensures that all channel codes assigned fall within a single port. an immense amount of power is available in the options within the floating Power Assign dialog. click Address under Function Code Type.

11 or higher) .Working With Function Codes 212 TPDesign4 (v2.

In most cases. 199 Colors dialog . The Colors dialog supports three ways to select colors from the RGB color palette: 1. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. 199). and text (pages. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. TPD4 supports the importing of either a JASC® formatted palette file. Every color element that is not assigned either directly via an RGBA selection or the named color table will reference this palette and be affected by any changes made to it. popup page or button. Brightness and Opacity) values numerically.RGB Color TPDesign4 (v2. RGB Color: a full-feature RGB palette that allows you specify RGB (plus Hue. Palettes are saved as part of the panel file. The RGB palette offers millions of possible colors (FIG. transparencies (popup pages and buttons). popup pages. Saturation. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. and buttons). any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. Additionally. There are several ways to open the Colors dialog: When setting new button parameters.Working With Colors and Palettes Working With Colors and Palettes Working With Colors A key feature of TPD4 is it's ability to utilize the full 32-bit RGB color palette. Fill Color or Text Color toolbar icons to open the base palette. which allows you to specify RGB (Red. TPD4 also allows you to save or load custom palettes. or by dragging the cursor around the palette. Brightness and Opacity. Click to select an existing page. FIG. and click on Fill Color in the States tab of the Properties Control Window. Saturation. Color assignments are made through the Colors dialog. The RGB palette offers millions of possible colors that can be applied to fills (pages.11 or higher) 213 . then click More Colors. Blue and Green) values. click on the Border Color. a Microsoft® formatted palette file. or a custom palette file previously saved from within the application. popup pages and buttons). plus Hue.

200). FIG.Working With Colors and Palettes 2.Palette Index 3. Palette Index: a default palette that provides the Base 88 colors (which the can be modified if desired).11 or higher) . 201 Colors dialog . 201). FIG. 200 Colors dialog .Color Name 214 TPDesign4 (v2. and include the transparent color in position 255 (FIG. Color Name: a named color selection dialog based on the Base 88 color scheme. The Palette Index offers a maximum of 255 colors (FIG. These Base 88 colors are identical to those provided in previous versions of TPDesign3.

For example. 202).Working With Colors and Palettes Neither JASC nor Microsoft palette files support transparency in the same manner that TPD4 utilizes transparency. without having to edit the buttons directly. Working With Palettes TPD4 supports creating and saving multiple custom color palettes within a project. which can then be imported/exported for use in other TPD4 projects. you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design . the pasted button will use the palette that is currently active in the project that the button is copied into (as opposed to the palette that was used to create the button). Use the options in the Edit Palettes dialog to create and save custom palettes.PAL files that can then be imported/exported for use in other projects. 202 Edit Palettes dialog TPDesign4 (v2. custom palettes cannot be reopened in another graphics package. and named palette entries. FIG. so once imported. Working With Multiple Color Palettes TPDesign4 supports multiple color palettes to allow easy switching between color schemes. Custom palettes can be used to enable the Color Schemes feature in the G4 PanelBuilder application. Custom Palettes can be saved as *. this can cause color shifting on the button. Creating New Palette Entries 1. When you copy a button from one project into another project that is using a different palette. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Color Schemes allow you to apply different color schemes to an entire template (in G4 PanelBuilder).11 or higher) 215 . Use the options in the Edit Palettes dialog to create custom palettes and save them as *. Depending on the differences between the palette in the button's source project and the palette in the target project.one color scheme for each season.PAL files.

Each color that is listed in the palette is considered to be a palette entry. To edit an existing palette entry. FIG. Use the cursor in the Color Value chart. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Click the New button to clear the palette index of all entries. but highly recommended since this is the name that will appear with the color in the palette when the view option is set to details. Repeat steps 3 . 4. the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. By default. but highly recommended since this is the name that will appear with the color in the palette when the view option is set to details. opacity (and/or Hex value) to specify the color that you want to add to the palette. select a slot with no color assignment. the new palette is titled Unnamed. By default. 202 on page 215). This is optional. 203 on page 216). as indicated in the palette selection drop-down list in the upper-left corner of this dialog. To add palette entries (colors) to this palette. 202 on page 215). 216 TPDesign4 (v2. opacity (and/or Hex value) to specify the color that you want to add to the palette. 2. 6. Click the Rename button to open the Rename dialog (FIG. Enter a description of the new palette entry in the Name text field. the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. Select a palette entry: To add a new palette entry to the palette. Click on the Commit button to add the selected color (and color name if applicable) to the selected slot in the palette. Renaming Palettes 1. the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. 2. Select the palette that you want to rename from the palette selection drop-down list. in conjunction with the Hue/Sat/Bright. 3.Working With Colors and Palettes By default. By default. use the cursor in the Color Value chart. 5. 6. This is optional. in conjunction with the Hue/Sat/Bright. Click on the Commit button to add the selected color and color name (if applicable) to the selected slot in the palette. Enter a description of the new palette entry in the Name text field. in the palette selection drop-down list. 203 Rename dialog 4. select an existing color.11 or higher) . Creating Custom Palettes 1. Select the palette that you want to add a new palette entry (color) to. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Enter the new name for this palette in the text field and select OK. Red/Blue/Green. Note that it is tagged as (active) in the drop-down list. 4. in the upper-left corner of this dialog. The index numbers correlate to the slot in the palette that this color occupies. 5. Red/Blue/Green. and each palette entry is represented by an index number (1-256). 3. Note that it is tagged as (active) in the palette selection drop-down list (in the upper-left corner of this dialog). Note that it is tagged as (active) in the drop-down list. 3.5 to add as many additional colors to this palette as needed. 2.

4. If you desire to make the imported palette the active palette. Click the Export button to access the Save As dialog. Click to select the palette entry that you want to copy. Click the Copy button. 202 on page 215). Click the Copy Entry button. Click the Paste button to paste the contents of the source palette into the new (target) palette. 5. Changing the Active Palette To select a different palette to use. If you select a slot that already has a palette entry. 2. 4. and select from the listing of available palettes in the palette selection drop-down list. the copied color will overwrite the original. Select Panel > Edit Palettes to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. 202 on page 215). you could open an existing palette and paste over the existing palette entries.PAL) files for use in other projects via the Export option in the Edit Palettes dialog.PAL) files for use in your project via the Import option in the Edit Palettes dialog: 1. 202 on page 215). you must select the Set Active button at the top of the dialog. 202 on page 215). Note that the new name overwrites the previous name (removing the previous name from the list). 2.PAL file. Select the slot that you want to paste the copied palette entry into and click Paste Entry. 4. 3. Click the New button to open a new (empty palette) or select an existing one from the drop-down list. 3.11 or higher) 217 . Use this feature to save and distribute custom palettes that can be imported back into TPD4 via the Import option: 1. 3. TPDesign4 (v2. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. 2. Select the palette that contains the color(s) that you want to copy from the palette selection drop-down list (in the upper-left corner of the dialog). Alternatively. Importing Palette Files You can import palette (*. Copying Palette Entries Use the Copy Entry and Paste Entry buttons at the bottom of the Edit Palettes dialog to copy and paste individual palette entries (colors): 1. as a *. Copying Palettes Use the Copy and Paste buttons at the top of the Edit Palettes dialog to copy and paste entire palettes: 1.Working With Colors and Palettes 5. Select the palette that you want to copy from the palette selection drop-down list (in the upper-left corner of the dialog). 6. Click the Import button to access the Open dialog. 2. The new name of the palette is indicated in the palette selection drop-down list. Use this dialog to locate and select the desired *. in the upper-left corner of the dialog.PAL file. Use this dialog to save the palette to a specified directory. select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to access the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. 202 on page 215). Exporting Palette Files You can export palette (*. Select Panel > Edit Palettes to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Click Open to import the selected palette file and close the Open dialog.

one color scheme for each design. 218 TPDesign4 (v2. Note that if the exported project does not meet these requirements.Working With Colors and Palettes Using Custom Palettes to Enable Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder TPDesign4 supports creating and saving multiple custom color palettes within a project. the buttons in the project must use the border types that come with TPD4 (as opposed to a custom image that defines the button's look). the Color Schemes feature is applied via the Project menu in G4 PanelBuilder. For example. In order to utilize Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder. without having to edit the buttons directly. These preview images are used to display the color schemes that are available for this template in G4 PanelBuilder. While it is not an enforced requirement. and saved as part of the TPD4 project. The project must include one preview image for each of the custom palettes that are included. in order for the project to actually make use of multiple palettes in G4 PanelBuilder. TPDesign4 is also required to export the project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*. Color Schemes allow you to apply different color schemes to an entire template (in G4 PanelBuilder). When a valid TPD4 project file is exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template.TPT). Using the Microsoft® Paint Utility Program Select Tools > Paint to launch the Microsoft Paint Utility program. Using custom palettes to create Color Schemes requires the use of both TPDesign4 and G4 PanelBuilder: Custom palettes are created in TPDesign4. Not all TPD4 projects support the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder. Custom palettes can be used to enable the Color Schemes feature in the G4 PanelBuilder application. Refer to the Paint online help for instructions on using Microsoft® Paint.11 or higher) . the TPD4 project must meet several requirements before being exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template file (via the File > Export as G4 PanelBuilder Template option): The project must include at least one custom palette (in addition to the default palette). However. You can also use Chameleon Images in conjunction with custom palettes to further enhance the use of Color schemes in G4 PanelBuilder. the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder will be disabled for this template. and then opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application. the Project > Color Schemes option (in the G4 PanelBuilder application) allows you to apply different color schemes to the template with a single click. you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design .

The NXP-TPI/4. If Streaming Source is selected from the drop-down list of Video Fill options (in the States tab of the Properties Window). Popup Page or Button.Working With Video Fills Working With Video Fills Overview If you are designing a project targeted at a video-capable panel. TPI-PRO and TPI-PRO-DVI accommodate up to 4 video source inputs. The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG. 2. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page. then Streaming Source is added to the list of state properties. and NXD/NXT-1700VG only). Select (or a create) a Page in your project. Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream in the Streaming Source field. NXD/NXT-1500VG. without having to create a page-size button (as was the case in TPDesign3). Streaming Source is available as a video fill option. and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill. To apply a video fill to a Page: 1.States Tab. 3. FIG. The NXP-TPI/4 and TPI-PRO accommodate up to four video source inputs. TPDesign4 (v2. TPD4 supports video fills directly to the page/popup page. 204 State Properties: Video Fill options If you are working with an existing page with buttons. and not a button on the page. Streaming Video Fills If the project specifies a touch panel that supports streaming video (NXD/NXT-1200VG. Displaying a Video Source on a Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. 204). popup page or button.11 or higher) 219 . you can assign a "video fill" to a page. In the Properties Control window . click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources. and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill. be sure to click on the page (not on a button) to bring up the State Properties for the Page.

3. 3. To apply the video fill across all states. Select (or a create) a Button in your project. Alternatively. 2. To apply a video fill to a Popup Page: 1. Select (or a create) a Popup Page in your project. Displaying a Video Source on a Button TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. Since this is a state-oriented setting. In the Properties Control window .States Tab. In the Properties Control window . use the All States option in the Properties Control window (States tab). and not a button on the Popup Page. Popup Page or Button.States Tab. you can use Ctrl+A to select all states in the State Manager window. 2. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources (Source 1-4). Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Popup Page.11 or higher) . If you are working with an existing Popup Page with buttons. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the button.Working With Video Fills Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources (Source 1-4). 220 TPDesign4 (v2. Popup Page or Button. be sure to click on the popup page (not on a button) to bring up the State Properties for the Popup Page. be sure to consider all of the button states when applying the video fill. To apply a video fill to a Button: 1.

11 or higher) 221 .Working With Video Fills TPDesign4 (v2.

Working With Video Fills 222 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

This however. To add the images that will comprise the animation sequence.e. through the File > Import Resources option.. and there are no other options in this dropdown list until at least one sequence has been created.. cool_button_spin02. by creating a series of states and applying a different bitmap or icon to each state and treating each state as an individual frame. all of which are available to be used as "frames" in an animation. It guides you through the steps of generating an animation sequence that can be applied to a multi-state button to apply impressive visual effects to your buttons. Although you can edit the sequence of the images in the animation manually. Animation Wizard .Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) dialog. Select Chameleon Image to use (32-bit PNG) chameleon images in the animation. Note that the only images that are available to choose from are those that have been imported into the project. Use this dialog to specify the images to be included in the animation. make sure the numbering convention used for the files is consistent (i. don't mix "1" and "01" or "001"). You can create an animation sequence for a multi-state button manually.Select Type (Step 1 of 6) Use the radio buttons in this dialog to specify the type of animation to create (Bitmap or Icon). TPDesign4 (v2. Once you import a series of images with identical names except for a post-fixed numeric indicator. In order for images to appear in the Sequence drop down for selection. The Sequence selection is set to "[custom]" by default. To create a simple button animation using the Animation Wizard: 1. Animation Wizard . Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . the wizard will allow you to add the necessary number of states to the button to accommodate the animation sequence (and automatically change the button type to Multi-State General). This opens the Select Resource dialog. Ctrl+click to select multiple files. or via the Import button on the Resource Manager dialog (see the Importing Image Files Into Your Project section on page 54 for details). Also. would be a very tedious and time-intensive process.jpg.jpg. where you can select which images to include in the animation. it makes things easier if you take naming into consideration before importing the files. etc.11 or higher) 223 . they will be available via this drop-down list.Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) Use this dialog to specify the images to be included in the animation. 2.Working With Animation Effects Working With Animation Effects Overview TPD4 utilizes three main concepts for supporting animation effects in your projects: Animation Wizard Tweening Chameleon Images Using the Animation Wizard The Animation Wizard is a powerful tool included with TPD4. Select Bitmap to use bitmaps in the animation. Note: If you select a General (two-state) button to use with the animation wizard. Select Icon to use icons in the animation. Multi-state buttons can have up to 256 states. cool_button_spin01. cool_button_spin04.jpg. cool_button_spin03.Select Type (Step 1 of 6). click the Add button. or Shift+click to select the range of files between two selections.jpg.). The Animation Wizard automates most of the process and makes the task easy. the images that you use to create the animation must be named in sequence (i. Select Button > Animation Wizard to start the wizard. and set the sequence of the images. and set the sequence of the images.e. This opens the first of six dialogs: Animation Wizard .

Use the options in the lower-half of this dialog to specify the positioning of the animated image relative to the button containing it.11 or higher) . 5. use the X and Y fields to indicate the desired position. you have only two states on the button. and the original GIF animation can be simulated. you'll have to add at least eight states to the button (one frame per button state). you shouldn't have to modify the sequence at all. If the images were named consecutively. a warning message is displayed along the bottom of the dialog. 0. Select the desired position option from the drop-down list.Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6) dialog. This dialog tells you two important pieces of information: the size of the animated image. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard .GIF file type. for a ten-frame animation.Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6) Use this dialog to create enough states to accommodate the number of frames in the animation sequence. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0.Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) dialog. Use the radio buttons in the top-half of the dialog to specify wether to scale the button to fit the animated image. The general concept is that you start with an existing animated GIF image. these files can be imported into your TPD4 project. Animation Wizard . Use the Add and Remove buttons to add/remove selected images from the sequence (if necessary). Use the next field to indicate which of the existing states to duplicate.version 7 or higher. If you are applying an animation that is bigger than the containing button.Size & Position (Step 3 of 6) dialog. So. there are also many freeware applications available). Obviously. and the animated image will be clipped (cropped) to fit in the button. Once extracted. or to simply apply the animation to the button at its current size. and open the Animation Wizard before adding any states. For example. the animation sequence will have more than two frames. The image files you selected now appear in alpha-numeric order in the preview window of this dialog. If button states exist beyond the end of the animation. Click OK in the Select Resource dialog to return to the Animation Wizard . 224 TPDesign4 (v2.Appearance (Step 5 of 6) dialog. you will have to save the frames out to a supported file type. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . The options in this dialog allow you to automatically detect the number of frames in the animation sequence. 3. and the number of states available on the button to which the animation is to be applied.Size & Position (Step 3 of 6) Use this dialog to specify the size and position of the animation relative to the button that will contain it. use the radio buttons to indicate how to handle them (Leave Alone or Remove). the first state). Lets say that your sequence has ten frames. Animation Wizard . and the size of the button that will contain it. Use the first field to indicate which state to start the animation on (default = 1. If you select Absolute. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). if you create a multi-state button. if more states are required for the animation. and save each frame in the animation out as an individual image file (resulting in a series of image files). Use the Move Left and Move Right buttons to re-arrange the image sequence (if necessary). Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . 4. Note that since TPD4 does not support the (proprietary) .Working With Animation Effects You can bring existing animated GIF files into your project via a third-party application (for example JASC® 's Animation Shop which comes bundles with Paint Shop Pro .

Tweening Short for in-betweening. When the button is turned back Off. This is called "Animate Time Down". Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . TPD4 supports multi-state buttons. Beyond simplifying the process of creating motion animations. In TPD4. the tweening process greatly simplifies the process of generating each state individually by automatically creating a gradual transition across all states based on the state properties of the first and last states. the states will be displayed in reverse order. it is also possible to use tweening to make buttons fade in and out on the page. if you create a multi-state button with 256 states. The starting state for the animation. Animation Wizard . If creating a bitmap animation. Click Finish to generate the animation. you would have to create the button without borders. When used in combination with TPD4's ability to handle RGB colors (including the opacity setting). which can have up to 256 states which are used to animate a button push from Off to On and back again to Off. TPDesign4 (v2.Finish (Step 6 of 6) This dialog lists the actions to be taken to generate the button animation. 6. tweening also generates very smooth color transition effects that would be difficult or impossible to do any other way. to make a button fade completely in/out on a page. If creating a icon animation. Remember.Finish (Step 6 of 6) dialog. A listing of each state and the image file associated with it. So. and Button Fill Color on the resulting button. and click Push). The Animate Time Up and Animate Time Down values are set in the General tab of the Properties Control window. these options default to no border (Set to "none") and transparent fill (Set to "transparent").Appearance (Step 5 of 6) Use this dialog to specify how treat the Button Border Style. many other animation effects can be achieved via the Tweening tools of TPD4. including: The number of states to be added to the button. and is definable in 1/10th second increments.11 or higher) 225 . and the animation type (Bitmap or Icon). each state of a multi-state button can be thought of as an individual frame. When the multi-state button is turned On it will display all the assigned states from first to last within a specified time interval. The position of the animation on the button. This is called "Animate Time Up". Since transparent borders are not supported in this version of TPD4. also definable in 1/10th second increments. Note that the animation is indicated in the State Manager window. Tweening is a common concept in all sorts of animation software. "tweening" is the process of altering the display properties of intermediate frames between two images to give the appearance that the first image evolves smoothly into the second image. the number of frames in the animation. Provided you are not creating an image-based animation. Use the Button Preview window to view the animation (select View > Button Preview. these options default to leave both border an fill color alone (Leave alone).Working With Animation Effects Animation Wizard . and which state to duplicate. you might say that you have 256 frames available for the animation.

Note that to make buttons fade in/out completely. the states will be displayed in reverse order. the smoother the transitions will appear. Fill Color and Text Color tweeners to easily apply color transition effects to multi-state buttons. Apply a color (Fill Color. This is called "Animate Time Up". these effects can be made to be very subtle and smooth. Ctrl+click to select two states in the State Manager window that are separated by at least one state (do not select the intermediate states). Text Color and Text Effect Color): 1. Text Color. FIG. The color tweeners can be used individually. 206). To create a color transition effect: The following steps apply to all three button color attributes (Border Color. The Animate Time Up and Animate Time Down values are set in the General tab of the Properties Control window. This is called "Animate Time Down". or in combinations to create smooth fades from one color to another when the button is pressed. and is definable in 1/10th second increments. An opacity setting of zero makes the button totally transparent. but change the opacity on one of them to zero (via the Colors dialog. 205 Multi-State Button (4 States) 2. 226 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . 207). When the button is turned On it will display all the assigned states from first to last within a specified time interval. Border Color. With 256 states available to use as "frames" in a tweened animation. 206 Multi-State Button (4 States) To create a fade effect. Fill Color. Note that the more states you use. you would have to create the button without a border assignment. it is also possible to use tweening to make buttons fade in and out on the page. most color transition effects don't require that many frames to produce a very smooth fade. When the button is turned back Off. also definable in 1/10th second increments. FIG. since transparent borders are not supported in this version of TPD4. leave the colors the same for the first and last states. However. The color tweener(s) will generate a transition effect that fades the first color into the second (FIG. set to RGB colors). 205).Working With Animation Effects Creating Color Transition Effects Use the Border Color. An opacity setting of 255 (max) makes the button totally opaque. Select (or create a new) multi-state button with at least three states (FIG. 3. When used in combination with TPD4's ability to handle RGB colors (including the opacity setting). Text Effect Color or any combination) to the last state that is different from that of the first state (FIG.

The results are displayed immediately in the State Manager window (FIG. Insert at least one state (tweeners require at least three states to work). Set the Icon Justification property to Absolute. 5.States tab). TPDesign4 (v2. 208 Multi-State Button (4 States) Use the All Colors Tweener to tween all colors applied to the button. Ctrl+click to select just the two states containing the icon start and end positions in the State Manager window. Experiment with applying multiple color tweens to the same button.Working With Animation Effects FIG.11 or higher) 227 . and you should not select the intermediate states). 208). In the last state included in the tween. Creating Animated Bitmap Effects Use the Icon Position and Bitmap Position tweeners to apply animated bitmap effects to multi-state buttons. They must be separated by at least one stage. However. To create animated bitmap effects with an icon: 1. and with different combinations of tweeners. 3. FIG. 2. 4. Duplicate the state that the tweening should begin across all states to be included in the tween. 6. 5. The Bitmap Position tweener allows you to cause a bitmap to move around the button area when it is pressed. Move the icon into it's starting position for the animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). Select one or more of the color tweeners to apply effects. 8. 7. Select (or create a new) multi-state button. the TPD4 tweening tools are not limited to one tween effect per multi-stage button press. place the icon in its end position in the animation via the Image/ Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). Right-click on one of the highlighted states in the State Manager window. Animated bitmap effects can be used alone or in conjunction with the other tweeners to create all sorts of eyecatching visual effects. 4. and select Tweeners from the context menu to open the Tweeners sub-menu. 207 Multi-State Button (4 States) The most basic type of color transition effect starts at the first state (or frame) and ends at the last. Add an icon to the button (via the Icon field in the Properties Control window . The Icon Position tweener allows you to cause an icon to move around the button area when it is pressed.

Fill Color . The Text Position tweener will generate a motion effect that moves the text across the button. The text position tweener allows you to have the button text move around the button area when it is pressed. The only difference is that you will select and apply a bitmap rather than an icon to the button.This option tweens the Text Effect Color (only) between two selected button states. Ctrl+click to select just the two states containing the text start and end positions in the State Manager window. The options in this menu include: Border Color .This option will tween the Bitmap.11 or higher) . To create animated text effects: 1. 2. and Text positions applied to two selected button states all at once.States tab).This option tweens the Border.This option tweens the position of an icon applied to two selected button states. some of these options may not be available. bitmap or text must be set to Absolute. and you should not select the intermediate states). In order to apply motion tweening to an icon. Text Position .This option tweens the Overall Opacity (only) between two selected button states. 228 TPDesign4 (v2. bitmap or text must be set to Absolute. This menu allows you to select a type of tweener to use in creating animations on multi-state buttons. Insert at least one state (tweeners require at least three states to work).Working With Animation Effects To create animated bitmap effects with a bitmap image. Tweeners sub-menu Select Tweeners from the States Menu or the State Manager context menu to open the Tweeners sub-menu. 3. Add text to the button (via the Text field in the Properties Control window . 4. 6. For example.This option tweens the Fill color (only) between two selected button states. 7. Set the Text Justification property to Absolute. bitmap or text. the Bitmap Position option is only available if the selected buttons use a bitmap. Note that depending on the elements of the selected buttons. All Colors . Text Color . Copy the text from the first state to the last state to be tweened. Icon Position . Overall Opacity .This option tweens the position of text applied to two selected button states. Text.This option tweens the position of a bitmap applied to two selected button states. and move it to its end position in the animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). Icon. Creating Animated Text Effects Use the Text Position tweener to apply animated text effects to multi-state buttons.This option tweens the Border color (only) between two selected button states. Animated text effects can be used alone or in conjunction with the other tweeners to create all sorts of eye-catching visual effects. Fill. Bitmap Position . Select (or create a new) multi-state button.This option tweens the Text color (only) between two selected button states. All Positions . follow the steps outlined above. Move the text into it's starting position for the animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). bitmap or text. In order to apply tweening to an icon. They must be separated by at least one stage. the justification for the icon. and Text Effect colors between two selected states all at once. the justification for the icon. 5. Text Effect Color .

The Blue channel is not used. Refer to the Chameleon Images. while virtually any PNG file could be applied as a chameleon image. Ideally. then the Chameleon Image property becomes available. when placed on top (via the Draw Order state property). when used in conjunction with custom palettes. One possible benefit of using chameleon images is that. uses the Fill and Border colors assigned to the button/state to determine the colors in the image. set the image properties to RGB Color and 8 Bits/Channel. PNG images consist of four separate color channels (Alpha. then the colors used in the chameleon image will change accordingly. Red. This file can be viewed in G4 PanelPreview or on an actual G4 panel. glow and drop-shadow effects. it is an image that can have its colors changed on the panel itself (at runtime). Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder help topic for details. can add highlighting and shadow effects to convincingly create an illusion of depth. some images make more sense and would give better results than others. The Green channel defines the area that will be filled with the state's Border Color. A chameleon image is a PNG image file that. Note that chameleon images are not necessarily different from any other PNG image file. Chameleon Images TPD4 supports a button state property called Chameleon Image. When the border name is set to none. if the Fill and/or Border colors are changed. when applied to a button/state. chameleon images may also use a companion bitmap which.Working With Animation Effects Text Size . As a result. Green and Blue). When creating an image to be used as a Chameleon image in TPD4. The position-oriented tweener options only work when the selected elements are set to use absolute positioning. the image to be used is one that either was created or was selected specifically with the concept of colorizable regions that could be changed to suit different design needs. Requirements for Chameleon Images Chameleon images can be applied to buttons to create animated highlighting. For an example of a chameleon image. chameleon images can also take advantage of TPD4's tweening tools to easily create color transition effects. and chameleon images use the button/state's Fill and Border color assignments to determine the colors used in the image as follows: The Alpha channel of the Chameleon image defines the overall shape mask for the state. refer to the "Chameleon Demo" TPD4 file attached to Tech Note TN733 to provide an example of chameleon images. you must be logged into www. Computer Control and TakeNote buttons. In other words.11 or higher) 229 .amx. That is.com as a dealer.This option tweens the size of text applied to two selected button states. Furthermore. To access AMX Tech Notes. The Chameleon Image state property is available for all button types except Text Input. they enable the ability to create multiple color schemes that can be applied to a single template in the G4 PanelBuilder application. TPDesign4 (v2. When used with multi-state buttons. The basic requirements that allow an image file to be recognized as a chameleon image in TPD4 are: It is a PNG image file It uses RGB color (8 bits/channel) It has an alpha channel defined In order for a chameleon image to be applied to buttons or popup pages. The Red channel defines the area that will be filled with the state's Fill Color. the Border Name state property must be set to none.

keep in mind that the Red and Green color channels will be replaced by the colors specified as the Fill and Border colors in TPD4 for each state of the button. 3. 2. create or select a button to which you wish to apply the chameleon image. 209). The exported file must be a 32-bit RGB Color (8 Bits/Channel) file in order to be interpreted correctly by TPD4 as a chameleon image. Working With Chameleon Images Chameleon Images utilize the 4 color channels (Red. Computer Control or TakeNote button types.Example Here's an example of creating a simple chameleon image. It meets the technical requirements for a chameleon image. 2. When creating an image to be used as a chameleon image. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. 230 TPDesign4 (v2. Blue. only PNGs accommodate transparency as a color. FIG. In a Design View window. It has been applied to a button as the Chameleon Image (via the Chameleon Image state property). Export the image as a PNG file. Import the image file into TPD4 (via the Import button on the Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog).11 or higher) . Green and Alpha) that comprise 32-bit images to define separate colorizable regions (FIG. Using an image editing program to create an image to use as the chameleon image: Only PNG image files can be used as chameleon images. since in TPD4. The Blue color channel is not used for chameleon buttons. 4. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors (32-bit). Keep in mind that the Chameleon Image state property is not available for Text Input.Working With Animation Effects The characteristics that define any image as a chameleon image are: 1. Use the alpha channel to define the overall desired shape of the button (see Working with Transparent Backgrounds for more information). 209 Working With Chameleon Images Working With Chameleon Images . for the purpose of illustrating the basic concepts used: 1.

Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder Chameleon images can be used in conjunction with custom palettes to create G4 PanelBuilder template files that. the Chameleon images can by used in conjunction with any of the other Tweening tools. the Chameleon Image property becomes available (directly beneath Border Name). For example.11 or higher) 231 . Not all TPD4 projects support the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder. However. There are also several requirements for images to allow them to be recognized as chameleon images by TPD4. click the browse button (. set the button's Border Name to None. The Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder allow you to apply different "color skins" to a single template. TPDesign4 (v2. 211 Chameleon Image . any portion of the image that exists on the Green color channel now matches the color specified in the Border Color state property. Icons. you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design . Custom palettes are created in TPD4. 211): FIG.. depending on what elements (Bitmaps. 210): FIG. TPD4 is also required to export the project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*. note that any portion of the image that exists on the Red color channel now matches the color specified in the Fill Color state property. Chameleon images utilize the 4 color channels that comprise 32-bit PNG images to define separate colorizable regions.one color scheme for each design. In order to utilize Chameleon Images and Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder. Since the Fill and Border colors are in turn associated with a particular color palette (which is saved as part of the TPD4 project). In the States tab of the Properties Window. the primary benefits of these features are realized in the G4 PanelBuilder application (via the Project > Color Schemes feature). Note that at this point.TPT).) to access the Resource Manager dialog. Select the chameleon image (in the Image tab) and click OK to apply it to the selected button.Fill and Border colors tweened In fact. when opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application. The project must include at least one custom palette (in addition to the default palette). 210 Chameleon Image . Chameleon Images. Text) make up your button. Using chameleon images coupled with custom palettes to create Color Schemes requires the use of both TPD4 and G4 PanelBuilder: Chameleon images are imported and applied to buttons (or popup pages) in TPD4. and saved as part of the TPD4 project. the TPD4 project must meet several requirements before being exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template file (via the File > Export as G4 PanelBuilder Template option): The project must utilize at least one chameleon image (meaning that a chameleon image has been applied to at least one button in the project). A few examples of color changes resulting from changing the Fill and Border colors for the button/state with the chameleon image (FIG.. you can use the Fill Color and Border Color Tweening tools to quickly create color transition effects for each of the color channels (FIG. Now that the image has been applied as a chameleon image. are capable of switching from one color scheme to another without having to edit the buttons directly. Similarly. the colors used to render the chameleon image will change if and when a different color palette is applied to the template in the G4 PanelBuilder application. 6. In the Chameleon Image property.Fill and Border colors Since chameleon buttons rely on the Border and Fill color settings.Working With Animation Effects 5.

232 TPDesign4 (v2. Note that if the exported project does not meet these requirements.Working With Animation Effects The project must include one preview image for each of the custom palettes that are included. When a valid TPD4 project file is exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template. the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder will be disabled for this template. and then opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application.11 or higher) . the Project > Color Schemes option (in the G4 PanelBuilder application) allows you to apply different color schemes to the template with a single click. These preview images are used to display the color options that are available for this template in G4 PanelBuilder.

To access the Connection Settings dialog. While all file transfer operations to touch panels are managed by the Master. 3. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. There are three types of file transfer operations in TPD4 (both accessible via the Transfer menu): Send To Panel: Sends the currently open project (*.File Transfer Operations File Transfer Operations Overview In TPD4. Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself. and select New to create a new communication configuration. you must enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect (FIG. select Transfer > Connect (or click the toolbar button) to open the Connect dialog. Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Masters that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog. 212 Connection Settings dialog (Authentication enabled) TPDesign4 (v2.TP4) file to a specified Master. via the User Name and Password fields in the Connection Settings dialog.11 or higher) 233 . all file transfer operations are routed through the NetLinx Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. without opening the file in TPD4. the files themselves are routed to the panels. 2. You can save the User Name/Password combination as part of the communication configuration for that Master. You'll have to be aware of the security settings on the target Master before trying to connect. or select an existing configuration from the drop-down list and click Properties to edit those saved settings. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2. Send File To Panel: Sends a selected project file to a specified Master. 1. Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. Once they are entered here. 4.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters. where they will reside (touch panel files never reside on the Master). Use the Connect dialog to define and save one or more connection settings. FIG. Receive From Panel: Receives a project file from a Master. 212). Secure NetLinx Connections If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed.

214). 214 Connect dialog Anytime you establish a new communication connection configuration (via the New button in the Connect dialog).File Transfer Operations When attempting to connect to a secured NetLinx Master. If a User Name/Password is specified for a Master that does not require authentication. if the correct User Name/Password combination is not entered (or if the entries are incorrect). the program requires you to enter a name for the configuration (in the Name field of the Connection Settings dialog). so it does not need to be established/ dropped each time a transfer is performed. 213): not connected connected to an unsecured master connected to a secured but unencrypted master connected to a secured and encrypted master FIG. FIG. FIG. Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Master that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog. and select the desired configuration from the Connection drop-down list (FIG. they will be ignored. The status bar reflects the status of the connection as follows (FIG. 215 Connect dialog . See the Connecting to a NetLinx Master section on page 235 for details on establishing a new connection. 215). Use the Connect dialog to define and save one or more connection settings (FIG.11 or higher) . select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog.Connection drop-down list 234 TPDesign4 (v2. To recall a saved communication configuration. 213 Connection Status (indicated in the Status Bar) Working With Communications Configurations Saving and Recalling Communication Configurations Connection information is maintained separate from the transfer itself. The configuration you specify under that name can then be accessed via the Connection drop-down list in the Connect dialog. the connection will fail and TPD4 will display an error message indicating why the connection was denied.

There are three possible ways to connect to a NetLinx Master: TCP/IP. you will prompted to enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. Connecting to a NetLinx Master via TCP/IP These steps describe establishing TCP/IP communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time. Select TCP/IP from the Transport drop-down list (FIG. Connecting to a NetLinx Master Typically. enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you setting up (in the Name field). 2. This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later. FIG. 4. Select Transfer > Connect to access this dialog. and click OK to save your changes and return to the Connect dialog. 3.TCP/IP selected as Transport 5. TPDesign4 (v2. Once these steps have been completed. Therefore. The invokes the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog. select a configuration (in the Connect dialog) and click the Delete button. The Connect dialog allows you to set up communications. you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog). as opposed to connecting directly to the panels. 216 Connection Settings dialog . 216). you will first establish communication between the PC running TPD4 and the NetLinx Master to which the target panels are connected.11 or higher) 235 . 3. In the Connect dialog. Do not change this number. Enter the IP Address of the target NetLinx Master in the IP Address/DNS Name field. If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. 4. click New to establish a new connection. Edit the communication settings for the selected configuration as needed. 212 on page 233). Serial or Modem. In the Connection Settings dialog. and save multiple connection configurations for easy access. file transfer operations are routed through the NetLinx Master to which the panels are connected. 212 on page 233). Select the configuration that you want to edit from the Connection drop-down list. 7. 1. Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Master that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog. without having to re-configure. 6. The IP Port should always be set to 1319 (default). Select Transfer > Connect (or click the toolbar button) to open the Connect dialog. in order to transfer touch panel files for use on G4compatible panels. 2. Click the Edit button to invoke the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. Editing the Settings on an Existing Communication Configuration 1.File Transfer Operations To delete a saved configuration. Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog.

Serial selected as Transport 5. Stop Bits and Flow control) as needed. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2. Parity. you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. 217 Connection Settings dialog . Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2. without having to re-configure. 8. In the Connection Settings dialog. 3. enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you setting up (in the Name field). Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog. you will prompted to enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. Once these steps have been completed. 6. 8. 1. Select Serial from the Transport drop-down list (FIG.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters. 4. This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later. The invokes the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. Once they are entered here. click New to establish a new connection. 217). Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog.11 or higher) . Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. 236 TPDesign4 (v2. Configure the Settings parameters (COM Port. 9. 2. Press the Connect button to establish the connection. Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Serial Port These steps describe establishing serial communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. Once they are entered here. you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog). In the Connect dialog. FIG. Baud Rate.File Transfer Operations Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters. 212 on page 233). you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog. Press the Connect button to establish the connection. Data Bits. 7. Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog.

In the Connection Settings dialog. The invokes the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2.File Transfer Operations Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Modem These steps describe establishing modem communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time. Configure the Settings parameters (COM Port. Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog. If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. 212 on page 233). Data Bits. Once they are entered here. In the Connect dialog. Parity. 218 Connection Settings dialog . you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog). click New to establish a new connection. Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. 6. Flow control and Phone #) as needed.11 or higher) 237 . Press the Connect button to establish the connection. enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you setting up (in the Name field). 7. Select Modem from the Transport drop-down list (FIG. Once these steps have been completed. 2. 1. 5. without having to re-configure. This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later. 3.Modem selected as Transport 4. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. FIG. 218). Stop Bits. you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. Baud Rate. TPDesign4 (v2. you will prompted to enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters.

Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself. Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel. In TPD4. appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). Earlier versions of the firmware and TPD4 software are incompatible with G4 panels. c. To use TCP/IP as the transport type: 1. Receiving a Panel File From a NetLinx Master Use the Transfer > Receive From Panel option (or click the toolbar button) to connect to a Master and upload a panel file from a compatible G4 touch panel on that Master's bus. In order to transfer touch panel files. via the Connect dialog. Use the Send File To Panel option to send a project file without having to open it in TPD4. Select TCP/IP from the Transport drop-down list. enter a name for this communication configuration. If you are not already connected to the Master. There are three ways to connect and upload Panel files: TCP/IP. Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog 2. the panel files are routed to the panels. Do not change this number. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. There are three transport types available to transfer touch panel files: TCP/IP. To transfer to a G4 panel. so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. If you have already established a TCP/IP communication configuration. the panel files are routed to the panels. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). Use the Connect dialog to define and save connection settings. In the Name field. so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed. d. the panel files are routed to the panels. In TPD4. The IP Port should always be set to 1319 (default). 238 TPDesign4 (v2. via the Connect dialog. Configure the TCP/IP connection (IP Address/DNS Name of the target/source device). In order to transfer touch panel files. you must first establish communication between the PC and the NetLinx Master.11 or higher) . select it from the dropdown list. Serial and Modem. Otherwise. This is the name that will b. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. Use the Connect dialog to define and save connection settings. e. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the TCP/IP connection. create and save a serial communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog: a. Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself.01 or higher. 214 on page 234). the Connect dialog is invoked (FIG. Panel File Transfers via TCP/IP In TPD4. verify that the NetLinx Master Firmware is build 85 or later. Verify the TPD4 program being used is Version 1.File Transfer Operations Transferring Touch Panel Files to/from a NetLinx Master Sending a Panel File To a NetLinx Master Select Transfer > Send To Panel (or Transfer > Send File To Panel) to send a panel file to a NetLinx Master with a G4-compatible panel (or panels) on its bus. you must first establish communication between the PC and the NetLinx Master. Serial and Modem. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels.

Once communication is established. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. In the Name field. the panel files are routed to the panels. Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer. verify the IP Address. If you encounter a transfer error. Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the transfer options. indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting).none These settings must match those of the selected COM port. Description. The online device tree lists the online devices by System #. 3.File Transfer Operations 3. Panel File Transfers via Serial Port In TPD4. b. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master).8 Parity . Otherwise. and Manufacturer. c. Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the serial connection. 5.none Stop Bits . While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. and connection status of both NetLinx Master and Modero panel. Configure the selected serial (COM port) connection (Baud Rate. Device #. Parity. either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked (depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu). TPDesign4 (v2. d. The suggested settings are: Baud Rate . displaying an online device tree. either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked (depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu).38400 Data Bits . Data Bits. (firmware) Version. If you are not already connected to the Master. To refresh the Online Devices Tree. disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu. Stop Bits and Flow Control). See the Transfer Options section on page 241. Select Serial from the Transport drop-down list. Once communication is established. Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel. 4. displaying an online device tree. Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog 2. This is the name that will appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog. select it from the drop-down list. indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting). create and save a serial communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog: a. enter a name for this communication configuration.11 or higher) 239 . If you have already established a serial communication configuration. To use Serial as the transport type: 1. Panel ID. the Connect dialog is invoked.1 Flow Control .

Flow Control and Phone Number). d. 4. In the Name field. If you have already established a modem communication configuration. The suggested settings are: Baud Rate . Otherwise. To refresh the Online Devices Tree. Device #. 5. Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer. b. Configure the selected modem connection (Baud Rate. To refresh the Online Devices Tree.38400 Data Bits . either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked (depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu). If you are not already connected to the Master. create and save a modem communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog: a. Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the transfer options. To use Modem as the transport type: 1. (firmware) Version. (firmware) Version. indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting).1 Flow Control . This is the name that will appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog. the Connect dialog is invoked. enter a name for this communication configuration. disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. Description. the panel files are routed to the panels. Device #. disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the modem connection. This method can range in speed but on average communicates at 3 Kbps. Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel.8 Parity . select it from the dropdown list. Panel File Transfers via Modem In TPD4. The online device tree lists the online devices by System #.11 or higher) . Description. and Manufacturer. 240 TPDesign4 (v2.File Transfer Operations The online device tree lists the online devices by System #. Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog 2. c. Once communication is established. Stop Bits. displaying an online device tree.none Stop Bits .none These settings must match those of the Modem. Note: Modem transfer is the slowest method of transferring TPD4 panel files to the target device. Select Modem from the Transport drop-down list. Data Bits. Parity. and Manufacturer. See the Transfer Options section on page 241. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. 3.

sound files and fonts that all already resident on the target panel.11 or higher) 241 . 5. Any bitmaps. Select the Master URL / IP input box and enter the IP address of your PC (displayed in the Virtual NetLinx Master Properties dialog). since any existing panel files on the target panel will be wiped out anyway. TPDesign4 (v2. Full clean transfer (all panel & system graphic files): Select this option to automatically wipe out any existing project files resident in the target panel before loading the new panel file. 7. using your PC as a Virtual NetLinx Master. To configure the panel for Virtual NetLinx Master transfers via TCP/IP: 1. If you are simply sending a panel file to a panel. This feature is primarily intended for use by graphic designers. 3. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 3. Open received panel (uploads only): Select this option to automatically open the panel file once it is received. you don't need to use the Full Clean option. 6. which reduces the transfer time by only replacing those panel files that have been updated (relative to the files already loaded in the panel). since it involves sending many more files. There are three basic steps to Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP file transfers: 1. Select URL as the Connection Mode. 2. Press the Protected Setup button to access the Protected Setup page. to allow them to create panel files and then test them on a panel without necessarily having access to a Master. 5.File Transfer Operations 4. The Full Clean option adds considerable time to the transfer. Select Ethernet as the Master Connection. below the touch screen) for 3 seconds to access the Setup page. and is not necessary in most cases. Set the System Number to 0 (zero). See the Transfer Options section on page 241. Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer Transfer Options Smart transfer (updated panel files only): Select to utilize the Smart Transfer feature. Clear from status queue when complete: This option (enabled by default) clears each transfer from the Transfer Status Window when complete. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers If it is not already powered up and connected. or in your panel file on your PC (for uploads) are not included in the transfer. 4. Normal transfer (all panel files): This option sends all panel files. On the Touch Panel. press and hold the Setup Access button (on the front panel. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the password (the default password is 1988). Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the transfer options. you can use your PC's Ethernet connection to connect directly to the panel. Press the System Connection button to access the System Connection Setup page. apply power to the touch panel and verify that it is connected to the LAN via the TCP/IP connector on the rear (or side) of the panel (G4 panels only). In this situation. Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers TPD4 supports direct connection to G4 panels via TCP/IP. 8. for situations where the target panel is not connected to a NetLinx Master. Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 2.

Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog (or click the toolbar button). The panel should appear in the list of Online Devices. Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via TCP/IP) 1. 2. Click the Send button to initiate the transfer. 5. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection Once you have configured both the touch panel and TPD4 for Masterless TCP/IP Transfers. Once you have entered the IP address of the PC (acting as a Virtual NetLinx Master). Click the Properties button to access the Virtual NetLinx Master Properties dialog. Verify that an Ethernet cable is connected from either the rear (NXT models) or side (NXD models) of the panel to a valid Ethernet Hub. Enter this IP address as the Master's URL/IP on the System Connection Setup page on the touch panel. Select any Options (Smart Transfer. Connect the terminal end of the PSN6. a. the panel should appear in the online device tree. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 1. press the Reboot button on the System Connection Setup page to reboot the panel. Select <Virtual NetLinx Master>[] from the Connection drop-down list. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press the Reboot button to reboot the panel.File Transfer Operations 9. 3. 3. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send to Panel dialog.11 or higher) . Once you can see the device online. you are ready to transfer files to/from the panel without the need for an intermediate master: Sending Files To the Panel 1. you may transfer panel files to and from the G4 device without the need for an intermediate NetLinx master. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. 2. Write down the IP address. The Virtual NetLinx Master connection allows G4 devices to directly connect to TPDesign4 instead of a physical NetLinx master for transfers. To receive files from the panel. b. Once you can see the panel online. After several seconds. listed as Virtual NetLinx Master. select Transfer > Receive From Panel. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. 2. 10. you may transfer the files. which displays the Host Name and IP address for your PC. 4. Verify the green Ethernet LED (on the rear Ethernet port) is illuminated (indicating a proper connection). 3. Allow several seconds after the panel is rebooted for it to appear in the Online Device list in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialogs. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send To Panel dialog. 242 TPDesign4 (v2.5 power cable to the 12 VDC power connector on the rear/side of the touch panel.

Power up the Panel without the USB cable connected to the panel. In this situation. for situations where the target panel is not connected to a NetLinx Master. 7. click on the Next buttons. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog TPDesign4 (v2. listed as Virtual NetLinx Master. 6. 5. using your PC as a Virtual NetLinx Master. Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers TPD4 supports direct connection to G4 panels via USB. select to continue the installation. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 3. 2. When the Install Driver dialog does appear. Press the Protected Setup button to access the Protected Setup page. There are three basic steps to Virtual NetLinx Master USB file transfers: 1. Double click on the icon to bring up the list of USB devices (you should see the AMX USB LAN LINK device in the list). Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the password (the default password is 1988). 4. Select any Options (Smart Transfer. Click the Receive button to initiate the transfer. panel. This feature is primarily intended for use by graphic designers. If the Install Driver dialog doesn't appear automatically. After several seconds. To configure the panel for Virtual NetLinx Master transfers via USB: 1. 3. The OS will complain about the fact that the driver you are installing/updating does not have a digital signature. please follow the steps below to ensure a valid USB connection to the G4 panels: 1. apply power to the touch panel and verify that it is connected to the LAN via the TCP/IP connector on the rear (or side) of the panel (G4 panels only). Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers If it is not already powered up and connected. 3. Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button (below the touch screen) for 3 seconds to access the Setup page. Select USB as the Master Connection (this selection causes all other fields in the Master Connection section become read-only). Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press the Reboot button to reboot the 7. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. you can use your PC's USB connection to connect directly to the panel. select the Properties button and then the Update 6. to allow them to create panel files and then test them on a panel without necessarily having access to a Master. Select Transfer > Receive from Panel to open the Receive from Panel dialog. You should see an USB icon show up in the System Tray. the panel should appear in the online device tree. you are ready to connect to the USB port of the G4 panel. Press the System Connection button to access the System Connection Setup page. 5. 2. 4. After installation is complete. 2. 3.File Transfer Operations Receiving Files From The Panel 1. accepting all the default prompts.11 or higher) 243 . Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection Installing the AMX USB Driver for G4 Touch Panels After installation of TPD4. This is acceptable. This is done via the Virtual NetLinx Master connection in the Connect dialog (Transfer > Connect). Driver button. Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 2. Plug in the USB cable into the G4 panel.

Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via USB) 1. then connect to the panel. you are ready to transfer files to/from the panel without the need for an intermediate master: Sending Files To the Panel 1. Click the Receive button to initiate the transfer. you may transfer panel files to and from the G4 device without the need for an intermediate NetLinx master. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. First plug the USB cable into the PC. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send to Panel dialog. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection Once you have configured both the touch panel and TPD4 for Masterless USB Transfers. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. Allow several seconds after the panel is rebooted for it to appear in the Online Device list in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialogs.5 power cable to the 12 VDC power connector on the rear or side (depending on the model) of the touch panel.File Transfer Operations Once you can see the device online. 3. The Virtual NetLinx Master connection allows G4 devices to directly connect to TPDesign4 instead of a physical NetLinx master for transfers. Click the Send button to initiate the transfer. Connect the terminal end of the PSN6. To receive files from the panel. Select Transfer > Receive from Panel to open the Receive from Panel dialog. 2. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. 3. select Transfer > Receive From Panel. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send To Panel dialog. 2. Once you can see the panel online. 2. Select <Virtual NetLinx Master>[] from the Connection drop-down list. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 1. Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog (or click the toolbar button). Receiving Files From The Panel 1.11 or higher) . Use a (type-A) USB cable to connect the panel to an available USB port on your PC. 244 TPDesign4 (v2. 3. Select any Options (Smart Transfer. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. you may transfer panel files. The panel should appear in the list of Online Devices. 2. Select any Options (Smart Transfer.

220). This invokes the Local Area Connection Properties dialog (FIG.11 or higher) 245 .FIG. it should create a new LAN connection (see My Computer | My Network Places | View network connections). Right-click on the Network Connection that indicates "AMX USB Device Link".File Transfer Operations MVP-5200i USB Driver The MVP-5200i utilizes a native RNDIS USB driver. When the MVP-5200i device is connected to the computer. Launch the Network Connections dialog (select Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network Connections . and select Properties from the context menu. To enter a static IP address for the connection. This driver utilizes Ethernet-over-USB. It is necessary to supply a static IP address for this LAN connection. FIG. via Windows Network Connections settings: 1. you must edit the properties of the TCP/IP interface of the connection itself. 219 Network Connections dialog 2. FIG. 220 Local Area Connection Properties dialog TPDesign4 (v2. 219).

221 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog 4. and enter the desired (static) IP Address and Subnet Mask for the panel. FIG. 5. Select Use the following IP address. The static IP assigned to this connection should be on the same subnet as the IP address entered on the device Setup Pages (Protected Setup | System Settings | IP Settings | IP Address). Click OK to save your changes.File Transfer Operations 3. This invokes the Internet Protocol (TCP/ IP) Properties dialog (FIG. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). 246 TPDesign4 (v2. and click on Properties. 221).11 or higher) .

The buttons and pages can be edited. Select File > Import Touch Panel Template to open the Import Touch Panel Template dialog. 222 Example System Page Template TPDesign4 (v2. *. When a VAT or TPT template file is imported. a Status dialog indicates the progress as the various component files are loaded.TPT) Files TPD4 allows you to import VisualArchitect (VA) template files (*. this could take several minutes. Working With the System Page Template The System Page Template is a set of pages.VAT template files are created and exported using the VisualArchitect application. Locate and select a Touch Panel Template file (*. copied and pasted just like any other TPD4 project.TPT) to import into TPD4 for editing. Depending on the size of the template. TPD4 automatically selects the template that matches the panel and resolution specified for the active project. 222). You will see the System Page Template open in the Workspace Navigator as a separate project folder. Select File > Open System Page Template to open the system page template.TPT template files are created and saved as templates in TPD4. FIG.TPT). To import a touch panel template file into TPD4: 1. Once the template has been loaded.VAT or *.11 or higher) 247 .VAT) as well as TPD4 template files (*. *. containing a set of system pages and popup pages (FIG. 2. it is opened in TPD4 as a project file.VAT or *. popup pages and buttons that are pre-defined with functions that allow you to view/edit various panel and system parameters.Working With Templates Working With Templates Importing Template (*. When you open the System Page Template.

Keep in mind that if the System Page Template was opened as part of the Workspace. or copy/paste selected elements from a System Page into a page in your project.Working With Templates The System Page template is a resource that you can use to copy/paste entire System Pages into your project. This is to protect the original System Page Template pages from being edited. Address Code: System Page buttons are each assigned a descriptive name as the Address Code for easy identification. and paste them into any page in your project. you can copy/paste just the buttons you want out of a System Page.e. "_RGB setup"). Once the System Page is pasted into your project. In this case you will be presented with the Enter Access Password dialog. TPD4 will not allow you to create and save a page with the two underscore prefix.setup port) by default. the Reload last workspace option (in the Application tab of the Preferences dialog) will cause the application to attempt to open the (protected) System Page Template as part of the last opened workspace. Alternatively. just like any other page in the Project. it is fully editable. you may want to include the entire RGB Setup page in your project. are always set to the reserved setup port (0 . since they always retain their function codes. Note that each System Template page has a descriptive name that begins with two underscores (i. For example. just like you would for any other page in the Project. and once these pages or buttons exist within your Project they can be modified as needed. When these pages are pasted into a Project.e. The pages and the buttons they contain are not editable until they are copied out of the System Page Template folder. Channel Port: Since System Page buttons require communication out of the panel to the master controller. TPD4 treats the System File Template as a password-protected file to avoid accidentally modifying the template pages directly. The pages and popup pages included in the System Page Template are displayed in the Pages tab. Since there is not a password to unlock the file. The pages that make up the template cannot be modified directly. To copy an entire System Page out of the System Page Template folder and paste it into a project: Select File > System Page Template to open the System Page Template folder as a separate project folder in the Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab). you can edit function codes (and all other page and button parameters). You can edit or modify the page and contained buttons.setup port) by default. it is treated like any other page in your project. you only want to use some of the features on a System Page. System Pages and the buttons they contain will remain fully functional when they are copied into your project. the name is automatically changed to a single underscore (i. and them paste them into your Project. if necessary. TPD4 will not allow you to save any Page using the doubleunderscore prefix. and the name is (automatically) changed to use a single-underscore prefix. "__RGBsetup").e. "__RGB setup"). once the System Page Template is copied into a Project. Once you copy the System Page into your project. Copying/Pasting Entire System Pages into a Project You can add System Pages to your project by copying and pasting. and pasted into a Project. You can open the System Page Template (via the File menu) and copy entire pages or particular elements from a page. System Page buttons always use these settings: Address Port: System Page buttons which require communication from the master controller to the panel. The double-underscore prefix indicates that the System Pages are intentionally locked. 248 TPDesign4 (v2. To avoid potential conflicts with the System Page Template. However. The System Page Template Pages are all intentionally locked. you may decide that rather than pasting an entire system page into your project. Again. In this case. the Address and Channel Port/Code assignments work differently than the buttons you create. the Channel Port is always set to the reserved setup port (0 . Note that the System Page Templates all have names that begin with two underscores (i. the only option is to open the System Page Template as a Read-Only file. Note that if you click on a button on a System Page. Channel Code: System Page buttons are each assigned a descriptive name as the Channel Code for easy identification.11 or higher) .

TPDesign4 (v2. Select the target project and select Edit > Paste (or use the Paste toolbar button). You cannot cut a System Page out of the System Page Template. Double-click the copied System Page to open it in a Design View window. TPD4 allows you to copy/paste specific items from a System Page into an existing page in your project. Simply copy/paste these popup pages into your Project. This is generally used as the primary standard keyboard. . you may have a need for a particular element or set of elements in one of the System Page Templates in your project. Abort and Done buttons). • keypad: • keypadExtend: • keypadPrivate: • keypadTele: This is standard 10-key numeric keypad (also includes Backspace. The pages in the System Page Template. This is a more secure version of the keypad popup page. the System Page name automatically changes from a double. but includes asterisk and pound symbols additional symbols. Similar to the keypadExtend popup page. you can edit the associated function codes (and all other button parameters). where only asterisks are displayed when you type. the popup pages and all of their buttons can be edited just like any other popup pages and buttons in your Project. you may want to use just the Red. This indicates that the page will be treated like a "normal" project page from this point on. 3. For example. you would simply select and copy that set of bargraph buttons from the RGBsetup System Page and paste them right into an existing page in your project. System Page buttons will remain fully functional when they are copied into your project. where only asterisks are displayed when you type. You can use these keyboards and keypads in your Project without having to build the keys or assign the function codes. Note that once the System Page is pasted into the project. Similar to the keypad popup page. for text/numeral entries made on the panel. Select the System Page (or pages) that you want to copy (in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator). 2. Use the keyboard and keypad System Popup Pages anytime you need to add text/numeric entry functions to your Project.Working With Templates 1. if necessary. • keyboardPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keyboard popup page. for use with telephone connections. until they are pasted into a Project. and they will be fully functional. including Caps Lock.to a single-underscore prefix (i. The System Popup Pages include: • keyboard: This is a full 63-key keyboard. Like the other System Pages in the System Page Template. but with several additional symbols (-. /. they can be modified just like any other button in the project. However. while you may not necessarily want to include the entire RGBsetup System Page as a page in your project. Green and Blue Level bargraphs into a page. and the buttons they contain are locked for editing.e. and edit the page and contained buttons like you would any other page in the project. Once you bring the keyboard/keypad popup pages into your Project. Once the System Page button(s) are pasted into your project. "_RGBsetup"). In this case. and International functionality. Shift. once the copied buttons are pasted into a page in your project. since they always retain their function codes. Clear.. :. these popup pages and their contained buttons are locked to editing. Select Edit > Copy (or use the Copy toolbar button). allowing text/numeric entries on the panel. Copying/Pasting System Page Elements into a Project page In some cases.11 or higher) 249 . Working with System Page Keyboards and Keypads One of the most helpful features of the System Page Template is the set of keyboard and keypad System Popup Pages it contains. In addition to copying/pasting entire System Page Template pages into your project. ').

You will see the System Page Template open in the Workspace Navigator as a separate project folder. select Edit > Copy. used to indicate the progress of file transfer operations. these popup pages and buttons are fully editable. you won't have to do any additional work to make the keyboard/keypad work on the panel. Use the Time page to set the system clock. Revision. 2. then select the target Project in the Workspace Navigator and select Edit > Paste. Version. This is the Project Information page. System Page Template Reference • Battery: • Calibrate: • Calibrate Test: • Panel: • Progress: • Project: The Battery Base page allows you to configure various battery and power related options. The elements on this page allow you to reset the vertical and horizontal touch points on the LCD. The pasted popup page is automatically pasted to the Popup Pages folder for the target Project. containing the following pages. TPD4 automatically selects the template that matches the panel and resolution specified for the active project. Panel Volume and Default Panel Sounds . then enter the text for each button in the States tab of the Properties Control window. etc). and to specify how time and date values will be displayed on the panel. Either way. Protected Setup). Job Name. Use the elements in this page to store information specific to the target panel for this Project. Panel Information. containing options for various system identification information (IP Settings. • Time: 250 TPDesign4 (v2. including one protected password (which only displays asterisks when the password is being entered for additional security). remember that once pasted into your Project.Working With Templates There are two ways to add a keyboard or keypad to your Project: 1. • Protected Sensors: • Resolution: • Setup: This page contains options to allow you to configure light and motion sensors on the panel. Dealer ID. This is the Protected ID page.single or double-beep). which contains various setup options that are not usually exposed to the end-user (Device Number. Select File > Open System Page Template to open the system page template. and copy only the buttons/keys that you plan to use into an existing page in a Project. The Setup page allows you to set several basic setup options (Panel Timeout. This page allows you to match the outgoing screen resolution on an NXP-TPI/4 to the connected touch panel. Panel Information. Touch Input Select. This page also contains buttons that have page flips to other related System Pages (Project Information. Bus Blink. Video/RGB Adjustment. The elements on this page allow you to confirm that the calibration was done properly.11 or higher) . However. When you open the System Page Template. popup pages and buttons that are pre-defined with functions that allow you to view/edit various panel and system parameters. This page contains a Progress Bar. System Page Template Reference The System Page Template is a set of pages. Copy and Paste the entire Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page into an existing project: Select the appropriate System Template Popup Page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). Time Adjustment. • Protected: • Protected ID: • Protected Password: • Protected Secondary ID: This page contains options to allow you to apply password protection to a secondary (wireless) connection. copy/paste the system page (or just those elements that you want to use in your project) into your Project. To use these pages in your project. etc). Copy and Paste only selected elements from a Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page into an existing project: Open a Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page. This page contains options to allow you change any passwords associated with this Project. Use the elements in this page to store information specific to your Project (File Name. etc). Baud Rate. Master Connection. This is the Protected Setup page.

Horizontal and Vertical Size/Position and Tracking). ').) • RGB Full Screen: This page contains options to allow you to adjust various aspects of the RGB signal (Red. KeypadTele: Similar to the keypadExtend popup page. for text/numeral entries made on the panel. and International functionality. for use with telephone connections.Working With Templates System Page Template Reference (Cont. KeypadPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keypad popup page. plus buttons to indicate video source slot assignments (which relate to video sources coming from the NXP-TPI/4). but includes asterisk and pound symbols additional symbols. Warning Message: This is the Battery Base warning message. including Caps Lock. where only asterisks are displayed when you type. Shift. and several other buttons to allow a return to the Default RGB values. Keypad: This is standard 10-key numeric keypad (also includes Backspace. • RGB Setup: • Video Setup: • Volume: System Page Template Popup Pages The System Page Template also includes several popup pages: Keyboard: This is a full 63-key keyboard.. :. Input and Format). Green and Blue levels. plus buttons for returning to default settings. This page also contains a clock adjust button for setting the system clock. Clear. Version and Status text-area buttons. This is generally used as the primary standard keyboard. KeyboardPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keyboard popup page. Status. where only asterisks are displayed when you type. but with several additional symbols (-. Saturation and Hue). Keyboard Virtual: For use with Computer Control buttons to simulate the keyboard on the PC. Contrast. Undo changes. Save Settings. Abort and Done buttons). /. save changes and other textarea buttons relating to video sources (Version. . undo changes. Full Screen Edit. This page contains all of the items in the RGB Full Screen System Page. The options in this page allow you to configure the master volume settings for the panel. TPDesign4 (v2. The Video Setup page contains options for setting/adjusting the video sources coming from the NXP-TPI/4 (Brightness.11 or higher) 251 . KeypadExtend: Similar to the keypad popup page.

Make sure they do not conflict with each other. This dialog indicates errors and warnings relating to the G4 PanelBuilder Template (*. based on the established elements. Now rename the new image to the appropriate element name. You only need one template per resolution but you should consider instances such as the MVP-8400. create several different variations of Navigation and Sub-Navigations (3 items. then make copies of it.TPT) can be created to constitute a template family. but many more panel types. Any number of template files (*. G4 PanelBuilder requires that navigation elements in a template be implemented as pop-ups.Working With Templates Exporting Your Project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template TPD4 allows you to export your TPD4 project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*. You are ready to begin restructuring the elements to fit your needs. Then. 1. Start with the Device and Navigation elements first and the Placeholder elements last.png"). Suggestion: Mock up the interface in TPD4 by opening the corresponding page and display all applicable popups. You must have a minimum of 1 Placeholder element. G4 PanelBuilder customizes the TPD4 file based on the navigation flow you designed. popups and buttons. it is suggested you create one for each resolution totaling 6.. Your navigation menus will always be on top of your Devices. 4 items. This method allows you to modify and delete thus the pages are more likely to be similar. According to the table there are only 6 resolutions. Both examples are situations where you might consider making specific templates for those panel types. The key for creating your own elements naming conventions. the minimum number to make a template family. 2. Then open the resource manager and select Paste. Careful consideration will reveal the type of navigation you will need. The menu option to export a project as a G4 PanelBuilder template will be disabled for R-4 projects. You must have a main preview image ("[preview].11 or higher) . Create the preview images for the elements. 3. The resolutions and panel types are provided here. Doing this gives you a starting point to begin looking at how to modify the TPD4 file to create a template. Select File > Export As G4 PanelBuilder Template to open the Export As G4 PanelBuilder Template dialog. What navigation model are you going to use? You know you're going to have the required template elements but are some of your menus so complex they will require sub-menus? What devices and features will the template include? Consider using some optional template elements. [nav#navName]pageName. named in a manner that G4 PanelBuilder will understand the relationship between all of the elements.). You cannot create a "drill-down" style of navigation with G4 PanelBuilder. Images do not have to be full size. in fact AMX templates utilize a 1/4 screen size to reduce the template file size. On the other hand. A G4 PanelBuilder template is a TPD4 file complete with pages. Select Page > Copy Image To Clipboard.TPT) file that will be created from this project. Also. Things to remember: You must have a minimum of 1 Navigation element. You should spend some time deciding what you want the panel to do. G4 PanelBuilder looks for navigations with the name. Suggestion: Create a simple TPD4 file showing the desired output.TPT) file.jpg" or "[preview]. 252 TPDesign4 (v2. Suggestion: Start with the most complex Device element first. TPD4 does not support the creation of G4 PanelBuilder templates for R-4 remote devices (since R-4 remotes must implement navigation elements in the form of pages in order for the Back and Up/Down buttons on the remote to function correctly). where the Pixels Per Inch is higher than the CV12 and the MVP-7500's limited color depth.. etc.

11 or higher) 253 . The pages are highlighted in the color of the element they represent (FIG. Not all resolutions have to be done at once. Below is the workspace for TPD4.Example G4 PanelBuilder Template TPDesign4 (v2. this is the basis of a template family. Repeat the design for other resolutions. After you have completed the template design. 223). Leave the "Job Name" in the Panel Properties the same for all related TPD4 files.Working With Templates 4. Things to remember: You can use TPD4's Save As Other Panel Type when appropriate or as a starting point. 5.TPT file is created and a list of errors and warnings are displayed at this time. 223 TPD4 Workspace . do a generate. A . if applicable. If necessary you can build the ones you currently need and address the other resolutions as they present themselves. FIG.

This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project. 224). 224 G4 PanelBuilder Templates .Working With Templates G4 PanelBuilder Templates . buttonName.This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project. Only one of the pages or popups in A Navigation element can contain an Info button. [title]buttonName buttonName . Consists of at least one popup but can contain multiple popups. The popups in the Navigation element must contain at lest one item button that will be filled with navigation information. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouse-over element description in the toolbox. Item buttons are ordered within the Navigation element in order of left to right then top to bottom. Cannot contain any pages Only one can be displayed at a time.Required Template Elements When designing a template it is important to remember the rules that govern elements and their relation with the templates. The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Navigation element and can contain an optional icon image. The text will be replaced with the name given to the Navigation in the generated TP4 project. FIG.11 or higher) .The base page name that will be used in the generated TP4 project. Element Specific Conventions: [nav#navName]pageName navName .Required Template Elements The template must have at least one of each of the following elements: Navigation Elements This is the main menu where most of your navigation selections are made. Popups in a Navigation element can contain one or more Title buttons.The name of the Navigation as it will appear within G4 PanelBuilder. [item]buttonName buttonName . 254 TPDesign4 (v2. pageName .This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. The chart below demonstrates these rules (FIG.

11 or higher) 255 . Only one Placeholder element can be displayed at a time. buttonName .The name of the Placeholder element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. Only one page or popup within a Placeholder element can contain an Info button.This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project. TPDesign4 (v2. Element Specific Conventions: [placeholder#placeholderName]pageName placeholderName . buttonName .The base page name that will be used in the generated TP4 project.This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Consists of one page and may have optional popups. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouse-over element description in the toolbox. buttonName . The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Placeholder element and can also contain an optional icon image. pageName .The name of the Navigation as it will appear within G4 PanelBuilder. Placeholder Elements This is a blank device element that allows you to represent unique items in the diagram area. buttonName .The button name will be used in the generated TP4 project. pageName . [title]buttonName buttonName . The pages and popups in a Placeholder element can contain one or more Title buttons.This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project.Working With Templates navName . The text is replaced with the name given to the Placeholder element in the generated TP4 project.

[item]buttonName buttonName .Working With Templates G4 PanelBuilder Templates . the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Item buttons are ordered within the Mode element by left-to-right then top-to-bottom. i.Unused. 256 TPDesign4 (v2. pageName . "Video Conference Mode" or "Presentation Mode.Optional Template Elements Your templates can have any of the following: Mode Elements This element is generally used for designating "modes" your system will work in.The name of the Mode as it will appear in G4 PanelBuilder. buttonName . There are rules that govern all template elements (FIG. 225 G4 PanelBuilder Templates . Only one page in a Mode element can contain an Info button. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. Element Specific Conventions: [mode#modeName]pageName modeName .e.Optional Template Elements There are required elements when developing templates but G4 PanelBuilder also supports a series of optional elements that will make your templates more robust. Consists of a single page and can contain multiple popups. The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Mode element and can also contain an optional icon image.The button name used in the generated TP4 project.. Only one Mode element can be displayed at a time. The page in the Mode element must contain at least one Item button that contains the navigation information.11 or higher) . 225): FIG. Mode elements can be associated with rooms." Additionally.

Unused. Element Specific Conventions: [subnav#navName]pageName navName . Popups in the Sub-Navigation element must contain at least one Item button that will contain navigation information. Element Specific Conventions: [splash#splashName]pageName splashName . pageName .The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName .The name of the Sub-Navigation element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder pageName .11 or higher) 257 .The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. Sub-Navigation Elements This element is a submenu and can occur on screen with Navigation elements.The button name used in the generated TP4 project.The button name used in the generated TP4 project.Unused. Splash Elements This element is a popup that can contain an image. Item buttons are ordered in the Navigation element left-to-right then top-to-bottom.The name of the Sub-Navigation element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder pageName . i.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. Cannot contain pages. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . Only one of the popups in a Sub-Navigation element can contain an Info button. TPDesign4 (v2. Cannot contain pages. [item]buttonName buttonName . corporate logo. buttonName . [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Mode as it will appear in G4 PanelBuilder. modeName . The popups in a Sub-Navigation element can contain one or more Title buttons. buttonName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project. [title]buttonName buttonName .e. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. navName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project.Unused. whose text is replaced with the name given to the Mode in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . The text within the Title buttons are replaced with the name given to the Sub-Navigation in the generated TP4 project. pageName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Sub-Navigation element and can also contain an optional icon image.Working With Templates Popups in a Mode element can contain one or more Title buttons. [title]buttonName buttonName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project..The button name used in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Splash element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. buttonName .

Element Specific Conventions: [device#deviceName]pageName deviceName . Only one Device element can be displayed at a time. buttonName . consult AMX templates where we list the most commonly used devices. buttonName . this button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Pages and popups in a Device element can contain one or more Title buttons. pageName . [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. [title]buttonName buttonName . Only one page or popup in a Device element can contain an Info button which contains the page flip information for displaying the Device element and can also contain an optional icon image. Feature Elements This element resembles the Device element..Working With Templates Only one of the popups in a Splash element can contain an Info button.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. deviceName .The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . which contains the page flip information for displaying the Splash element and can also contain an optional icon image. Device Elements This element is the actual device used. buttonName . Popups in a Splash element can contain one or more Title buttons.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. i. pageName . The text within the buttons is replaced with the name given to the Splash element in the generated TP4 project. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. However.11 or higher) .The name of the Device as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder.Unused.Unused.Unused. buttonName . this button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Consists of one page and can contain multiple popups. there can only be one Feature element in a panel design. [title]buttonName buttonName . For reference. The text within the buttons is replaced with the name given to the Device element in the generated TP4 project.The name of the feature as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. Only one Feature element can be displayed at a time.The button name used in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Splash element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. Consists of one page and can contain multiple popups.e.Unused. pageName .The base page name used in the generated TP4 project.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. splashName . 258 TPDesign4 (v2. buttonName . pageName . the "Clean Panel" feature.The name of the Device as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. Element Specific Conventions: [feature#featureName]pageName featureName .

i. buttonName .The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. TPDesign4 (v2.The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project.The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Perform the standard page flip to the page for that element. Show any popups for the element. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.Unused.Unused. Only one of the pages or popups in a Sub-Feature element can contain an Info button. Show the Navigation element that is linked to the element. when applicable. When navigating to a Device." Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups. Cannot contain pages. pageName . Sub-Feature Elements This element represents the "universal" features that appear on many pages. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Sub-Feature element and can also contain an optional icon image.e. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Sub-Feature element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder.The name of the feature as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder.Working With Templates Only one page or popup in a Feature element can contain an Info button. there are rules for navigating the templates and template wide conventions you need to heed.The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. Rules for Navigating a G4 PanelBuilder Template In addition to the template requirements and required elements. [title]buttonName buttonName . the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Feature or Placeholder element from a Navigation element: Hide all popups on the page for that element.Unused. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Feature element and can also contain an optional icon image. "volume. subFeatureName . Show any popups for the linked Sub-Feature. pageName .11 or higher) 259 .The name of the Sub-Feature element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. whose text is replaced with the name given to the Feature in the generated TP4 project. featureName . buttonName . Popups in a Sub-Feature element can contain one or more Title buttons. buttonName . buttonName . buttonName .Unused. Element Specific Conventions: [subFeature#subFeatureName]pageName subFeatureName . [title]buttonName buttonName .. buttonName .The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. whose text is replaced with the name given to the Sub-Feature element in the generated TP4 project. The pages and popups in the Feature element can contain one or more Title buttons. pageName .

Show the Navigation element that is linked to the Sub-Navigation element or chain. Feature or Placeholder element from a Sub-Navigation element: Hide all popups on the page for that element.. If the Info button is omitted.The string "[text]" is required on the button wherever text is to be replaced in the output file.Template Wide Conventions Text Replacement . popup pages are shown in alphabetical order. The element previews should follow the same naming conventions as their page prefixes." There can only be one preview image per element. Perform the standard page flip to the page for that element. 260 TPDesign4 (v2. G4 PanelBuilder Templates . The string "[text]" allows you to prepend/postpend text with characters. then show the Sub-Navigation element that is linked to the element. For Sub-Navigations the user must set "Hide On Action" to No. "[device#DVD].Working With Templates Any Sub-Navigation elements that may have been currently displayed will be hidden. i. when applicable.jpg.A template can contain as many buttons named "[panelTitle]" as necessary.jpg" (or . the Sub-Navigation is not shown.e. or if an icon is used on the corresponding Navigation or Sub-Navigation button. Preview Images . Show any popups for the linked Sub-Feature. If the text on a button to be replaced does not contain '[text]" then it is unchanged. they are replaced with the "Job Name" of the panel. Panel Title . When navigating to a Device. Show any popups for the element. The main preview image should be named '[preview].11 or higher) . if not all popup pages should be initially shown. Info buttons are optional and only have to be included within an element if the order the popup pages is shown is important.png). Otherwise.A template must contain a main preview image and can also contain a preview image for each element.

Dual Volume .Single Lift Light Zone Monitor Pool Screen Security Shade Slide Projector Spa Switcher size Radio TV VCR Video Projector Volume .Single Feature Names US Weather Maps Mode Names Mode X Navigation Names Nav X Example [device#Audio Conference]Audio Conference [device#Cable Box]Cable Box [device#Camera]Camera [device#Cassette Deck]Cassette Deck [device#CD]CD [device#Document Camera]Document Camera [device#Door]Door [device#DSS]DSS [device#DVD]DVD [device#DVR]DVR [device#HVAC .Single Example [feature#US Weather Maps]US Weather Maps Example [mode#Mode 3]Mode 3 Example [nav#Nav 3]Nav 3 Description [mode#Mode x] x = the number of mode options Description [nav#Nav 3]Nav 3 x = the number of navigation options G4 Computer Control [device#Computer Control]G4CC TPDesign4 (v2.Dual [device#HVAC .Working With Templates G4 PanelBuilder Templates .Single]Volume .AMX Naming Convention Device Names Audio Conference Cable Box Camera Cassette Deck CD Document Camera Door DSS DVD DVR HVAC .11 or higher) 261 .AMX Naming Conventions AMX urges you to use the following naming convention to allow for portability between templates.Single]HVAC . Errors could occur if the elements do not match from template to template. G4 PanelBuilder Templates .Dual]HVAC .Dual [device#Volume .Dual HVAC .Single [device#Lift]Lift [device#Light Zone]Light Zone [device#Monitor]Monitor [device#Pool]Pool [device#Screen]Screen [device#Security]Security [device#Shade]Shade [device#Slide Projector]Slide Projector [device#Spa]Spa [device#Switcher size]Switcher size [device#Radio]Radio [device#TV]TV [device#VCR]VCR [device#Video Projector]Video Projector [device#Volume -Dual]Volume .

Also.Navigations as Pages TPD4 modifies the export of panel projects as VisualArchitect templates to allow navigation elements to be implemented as pages instead of popup pages for panel projects of device class "remote". where the Pixels Per Inch is higher than the CV12 and the MVP-7500's limited color depth. 262 TPDesign4 (v2. A VisualArchitect template is a TPD4 file complete with pages.11 or higher) . TPD4 limits navigation elements of device class "panel" to pop-up pages only. You only need one template per resolution but you should consider instances such as the MVP-8400. VA Templates . Any number of template files (*. it is suggested you create one for each resolution totaling 6. VA Templates .TPT) can be created to constitute a template family. named in a manner that VisualArchitect will understand the relationship between all of the elements. the minimum number to make a template family.VAT) file that will be created from this project. The resolutions and panel types are as follows: Resolution 640x480 800x600 Panel Type • MVP-7500 • TPI4 • MVP-8400 • CA12 • CV12 • TPI4 800x480 • CV7 • CV10 • CV10/PB 1024x768 • CV15 • CA15 • TPI4 1280x1024 1280x768 • TPI4 • CV17 According to the table there are only 6 resolutions. based on the established elements.Working With Templates Exporting Your Project as a VisualArchitect Template TPD4 allows you to export your TPD4 project as a VisualArchitect Template (*. popups and buttons.VAT) file. Then. Select File > Export As VisualArchitect Template to open the Export As VisualArchitect Template dialog. This dialog indicates errors and warnings relating to the VisualArchitect Template (*. VisualArchitect customizes the TPD4 file based on the navigation flow you designed.Logical Page Scroll Bar Elements Logical pages contain two button elements that are used to implement a scrollbar. These two buttons are named [scrollbartop] and [scrollbarbottom]. Both examples are situations where you might consider making specific templates for those panel types. but 12 different panel types.

Logical Page Info Element Logical pages must contain a [logicalinfobtn] button element that will be used to identify the first page of a logical page group. VA Templates . These two buttons are named [logicalupbtn] and [logicaldownbtn]. Each logical page must contain one of each of these elements. feature.Working With Templates VA Templates . A [logicalinfobtn] button element must be present in addition to a [info] button element that might be required to indicate that the logical page belongs to a device. There should be one and only one [logicalinfobtn] button element for each logical page group. TPDesign4 (v2. VA Templates .List Box Page Up and Down Elements List box pages contain two button elements that will be used to implement list box single up/down operations. or placeholder implementation. This button should contain the list of individual logical pages belonging to the logical page collection.11 or higher) 263 .Logical Page Up and Down Elements Logical pages contain two button elements that will be used to implement page flips within the logical page group. starting with itself. Each list box page must contain one of each of these elements. A logical page that is itself the only page of a logical page group must still contain a [logicalinfobtn] button element containing at least one page flip (to itself). These two buttons are named [listboxupbtn] and [listboxdownbtn].

11 or higher) .Working With Templates 264 TPDesign4 (v2.

Preferences Dialog .11 or higher) 265 . "Directories: The items in this tab allow you to specify default directories for Panel files. although the data that makes them up is still saved. system generated filenames are not generated. Editor Selection: The items in this tab allow you associate external editing programs with image and sound files that can be accessed through TPD4. TPDesign4 (v2. Backup copies and the image library directory.Application tab The items in the Application tab include: Startup Prompt for system generated name: This option will default the checkbox for system generated filenames (in the New Project Wizard) to the checked position. where you can set general program preferences for TPD4. This dialog contains four tabs: Application: The items in this tab relate to Startup. 226 Preferences Dialog .Application tab FIG. Undo/Redo Support and Miscellaneous program settings. Reload last workspace: This option will reopen the last panel file and the pages (including popup pages) that were open when the application was closed (assuming that a panel file was open when the application was closed). Appearance: The items in this tab relate to the Design View window. With this option unchecked. 226 shows the Application tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG. Use the Customize dialog to customize the TPD4 GUI.Program Preferences Program Preferences Overview Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog.

the tool is reverted to the Selection Tool at the completion of every button draw operation. if a name conflict occurs. Increase the cache size to keep more images in memory (potentially. but will take effect the next time you open a project file.Program Preferences If the System Page Template was opened as part of the Workspace. depending on their size) to speed up loading and displaying those images. Expand Workspace Navigator: This option will expand the tree structure (in the Workspace Navigator . With this option unchecked. it must be loaded again from disc. Image Cache Size (MB): Use the up and down arrows to adjust the size of the image cache (default = 8 MB). Create backup copy: This option saves a backup copy of the panel file to the backup folder every time you perform a save operation. which is a much slower operation. Retain selected tool: This option locks the selected tool (Selection Tool or Button Draw Tool). State Manager. Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings. Warning Messages When deleting resources in use: Click to receive a warning from TPD4 when you attempt to delete resources that are currently being used by the open project. 266 TPDesign4 (v2. without saving any changes. Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog. the Reload last workspace option will cause the application to attempt to open the (passwordprotected) System Page Template as part of the last opened workspace. this option flushes system memory of any pages that were previously opened but now closed. the user will be asked to resolve the name conflict. Note that this option does not take effect immediately on pressing Apply. Click Apply to apply any changes. Miscellaneous Flush Closed Pages on Save: When enabled. by design the only option is to open the System Page Template as a Read-Only file. and Button Preview). The image cache size value specifies the amount of memory allocated for images used in displaying buttons (in the Design View. Since there is not a password to unlock the file. Use "Copy of" prefixes: This option automatically adds the prefix "Copy of" to any pasted pages and popup pages. In this case you will be presented with the Enter Access Password dialog.Pages tab) on application startup. With this option unchecked. If an image is not found in the in-memory cache. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog. when the project is saved successfully (default = enabled).11 or higher) . Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings.

You can also manually set the zoom factor on any page or popup page by selecting the page and using the Zoom Toolbar. Use this option if you are working on a resolution or zoom setting that takes up most or all of your screen area. where you can either use the zoom in and out icons to zoom in/out (in 25% increments). most 21" monitors typically have between a 19.5" and 20" viewable area. and you want to work with multiple pages without cascading them (which could result in part of the page window being outside of the viewable area).Appearance tab The items in the Appearance tab include: Window Initial Zoom: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of the zoom settings that can be applied as the default initial zoom setting for all new Design View windows. Fit Width. as opposed to the monitor's overall diagonal size. For example. Because there are variations in dots per inch measurements among panels and among computer monitors. 227 Preferences Dialog . Monitor Size: Use this field to specify the size of the visible portion of the monitor that your pages will actually be displayed on (see Initial Zoom and Note above).11 or higher) 267 . 227 shows the Appearance tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG.see below). this option allows you to see how large a page will appear when actually displayed on the panel. or select the zoom setting (including Fit Page. This setting does not affect the zoom setting for pages that are already open. This number should represent the diagonal measurement of the visible portion of the monitor or of the space occupied by a fullscreen image. Gutter Color: The Gutter is the area around the outer edge of the Design View windows. Fit Height) from the drop-down list.Appearance tab FIG. Once of the Initial Zoom options is called Actual Size. Click the down arrow to open a palette used to set the default color for the gutter on all new Design View windows. Auto Stack New Windows: This setting causes all page windows to stack directly on top of the last active (selected) page window. To use this option. TPDesign4 (v2. Default = enabled. you must first specify their monitor's visible size (in the Monitor Size field .Program Preferences Preferences Dialog .

This set of options allow you to modify the way that the transparency checkerboard appears. The Transparency checkerboard is visible on pages and popup pages that are transparent. Custom Colors: If Custom was selected as the Style (see above). Snap Tolerance: Use the up/down arrows to specify the snap tolerance for the grid. The options are Light. Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog. and in the Button Preview when a state is transparent. Click Apply to apply any changes. the default setting is 8. Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings. Dashed Line or Dots). Style: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of available checkerboard styles that can be used to represent transparency. 268 TPDesign4 (v2. The range is 4 . Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. Medium and Large. Grid Grid Style: Select from the drop-down list of styles that the grid can be displayed in (Line. Small.11 or higher) . Dark and Custom. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog. in the State Manager when a state is transparent.Program Preferences The Auto Stack and Initial Zoom settings are retained the next time you launch the program. Medium. Grid Size: Use the up/down arrows to set the default grid size (measured in pixels). the Custom Colors option is enabled (see below). Transparency Transparent colors in TPDesign4 are represented by a checkerboard pattern. shades and/or colors can facilitate viewing and working with graphics. via the Button Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar). changing the checkerboard style to different sizes. The snap tolerance represents the number of pixels within which objects in the Design View window will "snap" to the nearest grid line (applicable only when the Snap To Grid option is enabled. Grid Color: Click the down arrow to open a palette used to set the default color for the grid (if enabled) on all new Design View windows. In certain situations. Size: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of available checkerboard sizes. then you can specify a custom color combination for the checkerboard by selecting from these two drop-down lists.255. without saving any changes. The options are Tiny. If Custom is selected.

11 or higher) 269 . Reset: Click to reset all options in the Directories tab to their default settings. Temp folder location: Use this field to set the location of the folder TPD4 uses for any temp files. TPDesign4 (v2. Click the browse button (. This feature accommodates the potential for large projects which need an especially large amount of temporary disk space. where you can navigate to an alternative folder. Click the browse button (.TP4). 228 shows the Directories tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG.TP4 Backup files. Backup copies: This text box displays the directory that is currently set as the default directory for all *..Directories tab The items in the Directories tab include: Default Directories Panels: This text box displays the directory that is currently set as the default directory for all Panel (or project) files (*. Click Apply to apply any changes. In these situations the Temp folder cannot be changed since it is being actively used. without saving any changes. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings.) to open the Browse For Folder dialog. 228 Preferences Dialog .Directories tab FIG. This field is re-enabled once all panels are closed and transfers are completed.) to open the Browse For Folder dialog... Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog. If you either have a panel open or a transfer in progress the Temp Folder Location field is disabled..Program Preferences Preferences Dialog . Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog. where you can navigate to an alternative folder.

Editor Selection tab The options in the Editor Selection tab allow you to associate external programs of your choice with image and sound files. you can edit image and files by selecting the file in either the Images or Sounds tab of the Resource Manager and clicking the Edit button. The items in the Editor Selection tab include: Editor Type menu . 229 Preferences Dialog . click this button to remove it from the list.Click the down arrow to select either Image Editors or Sound Editors from the drop-down list. to accommodate in-place editing of the images and sounds used in your Project.Click to add either an image or a sound editing program to the Editors list (depending on the Editor Type selected).Program Preferences Preferences Dialog . Remove Editor button .Editor Selection tab FIG. 229 shows the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG. and disassociate it from image or sound files in TPD4.11 or higher) .Lists all external image or sound editing programs (depending on the Editor Type selected) that have been added. The Default column indicates which of the programs is currently set as the default editor. by filename (*. 270 TPDesign4 (v2. Add Editor button .With an editor selected (in the Editors list). Once you have associated an external program to image and/or sound editor.EXE and file path. Editors table .

the program will always display the page(s) affected by an undo operation. TPDesign4 (v2. For example. if you changed a button property on a button that exists on a page that has been closed. Click Apply to apply any changes. Pressing OK or Accept after enabling/disabling the undo system will result in a clearing of the undo/redo history.11 or higher) 271 . this option is selected. this option is selected. Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog. without saving any changes. Enable the Redo system: This option enables/disables the ability to redo actions. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. that page will automatically be reopened to show the button that was affected at the point that the Undo is performed. Number of Undo Levels: Use the up/down arrows to change the number of undo actions allowed (default = 500).Undo/Redo tab The items in the Undo/Redo tab include: Undo / Redo Support Enable the Undo system: This option enables/disables the ability to undo actions. Show affected pages on Undo: With this option enabled. even they have been closed since that action was performed. By default.Undo/Redo tab FIG. Change selection on Undo: When enabled. Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings. By default.Program Preferences Preferences Dialog . 230 Preferences Dialog . this option will automatically change the selection so that the item(s) affected by the Undo / Redo action are selected. 230 shows the Undo/Redo tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog.

Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog.11 or higher) .) to locate and select the desired program's executable (.EXE) file.Editor Selection tab Note that Image Editors is already selected in the Editor Type drop-down menu. but one is specified as the default image editor: 1. 231). 2. Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to associate one or more image editing programs with image files in TPD4 projects.. and open the Editor Selection tab (FIG. 231 Preferences dialog . but one is specified as the default image editor: 1. 3. Click the Add Editor (+) button to access the Choose Editor dialog. in the Open dialog.. 272 TPDesign4 (v2. Click the Browse button (. 3. 4. in the Open dialog.EXE) file. Click the Add Editor (+) button to access the Choose Editor dialog. Note that you can associate multiple editor programs with image files. 2. The first program added to the Editors list is automatically designated as the default image editor. Click the down arrow and select Sound Editors from the Editor Type drop-down menu. FIG.. If you add additional programs to the list.Program Preferences Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to associate one or more image editing programs with image files in TPD4 projects. Note that you can associate multiple editor programs with image files. Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog. Click OK in the Choose Editor dialog to add the selected program to the Editors list.) to locate and select the desired program's executable (. you have the option (in the Choose Editor dialog) to set the default image editor.. 4. Click the Browse button (. and open the Editor Selection tab (FIG. 231).

Check the Default Editor checkbox to set the selected program as the default editor (FIG. 2. 233). If you add additional programs to the list.11 or higher) 273 .Program Preferences FIG. FIG. 232 Preferences dialog . Double-click on any program in the list (other than the current default) to access the Choose Editor dialog. The Default column indicates which program is the current default (TRUE = current default). This selection populates the Editors table with a listing of all editing programs that have been added. you have the option (in the Choose Editor dialog) to set the default image editor. and open the Editor Selection tab. TPDesign4 (v2. 233 Choose Editor dialog (Default Editor option selected) 5. Select the Editor Type that you want to change the default program for (Image Editors or Sound Editors) from the drop-down menu. Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program You can change the default image or sound editor program via the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog: 1. 4. Click OK to close the Choose Editor dialog. Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog.Editor Selection tab The first program added to the Editors list is automatically designated as the default image editor. 3. Click OK in the Choose Editor dialog to add the selected program to the Editors list. 5.

FIG. 235 Customize dialog . 234 Default Editor Indicated In the Default Column of the Editors Table Customizing the Menus and Toolbars Use the options in the Command tab of the Customize dialog to customize the contents of the TPD4 toolbars and menus (FIG. 3. to the Commands tab. Position the command/icon right where you want to drop it in the toolbar.11 or higher) . Alternatively. 235). 234).Program Preferences The new default editor is indicated in the Default column of the Editors table (FIG. if one exists. drag the command/icon to a toolbar. 5. 2. 4. regardless of category.Command tab Customizing the Toolbars Adding Buttons To Existing Toolbars 1. While holding the mouse-button down. The command/icon is placed as a button in the toolbar. Select a command category (under Categories). Click to highlight a command/icon (under Commands). 274 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. 6. Note that the cursor symbol indicates that it is not allowed to be placed anywhere except inside the area of a toolbar (any toolbar). Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize). along with their associated toolbar icon. The commands included in the selected category are displayed (under Commands). select All Commands to view a full list of all commands. and release the mouse button.

FIG.11 or higher) 275 . 2. select Image Only or Image and Text (the Text Only option does not allow you to associate an icon). Note that the cursor symbol changes to an "x" when the button is dragged outside of the toolbars. Select an icon from the User-Defined Image field. While holding the mouse button down. For menu items. 237 Button Appearance dialog 4. Associating an Icon With a New Command Once you have added a new command to a Toolbar or Menu. Click OK.Program Preferences Removing Buttons From Existing Toolbars 1. Select Button Appearance to open the Button Appearance dialog (FIG. Alternatively. 2. you can simply right-click on any button to open the New Command context menu. 3. right-click on the select the button that you want to associate an icon with to open the context menu. 236). Click to select a toolbar button from an existing toolbar. Select Delete to delete the button. TPDesign4 (v2. 6. 5. Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize). right-click on a menu item (FIG. drag the button to any area outside of a toolbar. Release the mouse button to delete the button from the toolbar. 4. 237). FIG. In the Button Appearance dialog. 236 Customizing menu items 3. you can associate an icon with the command: 1. as long as the Customize dialog is open. Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize). For toolbar buttons.

along with an empty new toolbar icon. 4. 238 Customize dialog . Select the toolbar you want to rename from the list. 2. Enter a name for the new toolbar in the text field and click OK. 239).Program Preferences Creating a New Custom Toolbar 1. 6. FIG.Toolbars tab 2. open the Commands tab of the Customize dialog. 3. This opens the Toolbar Name dialog (FIG. Select a command category (under Categories) to display a list of commands (under Commands). 5. 276 TPDesign4 (v2. Click the New button. FIG. and click Rename to open the Toolbar Name dialog (FIG. Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab (FIG. Repeat this process to add as many commands as you like to your custom toolbar(s) (FIG. in an empty area near the other toolbars. 239). Click and drag commands from the Commands list and drop them inside the area of the new toolbar.11 or higher) . 8. 240). Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab (FIG. 239 Toolbar Name dialog 3. The new toolbar name appears in the Toolbars list. 7. 238 on page 276). With the empty toolbar in place. 238). Enter the new name in the Toolbar Name text field and click OK to save the change. Click and drag to move the new toolbar icon into position. FIG. 240 Dragging a Command From the Commands List Into the New Toolbar Renaming Custom Toolbars 1.

Open the Customize dialog. Click to select a menu item from an existing menu. TPDesign4 (v2. to the Commands tab (FIG. drag the command/icon to the open menu. Select Delete to delete the button. if one exists. regardless of category (FIG. as long as the Customize dialog is open. Note that the cursor symbol changes to an "x" when the menu item is dragged outside of the menus. 2. 7. Click Delete to permanently delete the selected toolbar. 3. While holding the mouse button down. Removing Commands From Existing Menus 1. select All Commands to view a full list of all commands. Release the mouse button to delete the item from the menu. 4. Select a command category (under Categories). 2. drag the menu item to any area outside of a menu. FIG. 6. The commands included in the selected category are displayed (under Commands).Adding Commands To Existing Menus 4. Click to select a custom toolbar. along with their associated toolbar icon. While holding the mouse-button down.Program Preferences Deleting Custom Toolbars To delete custom (user-added) toolbars from the TPD4 workspace: 1. 235 on page 274).11 or higher) 277 . and release the mouse button. The standard TPD4 toolbars cannot be deleted. 3. Alternatively. Open the menu to which you want to add a command. 2. Alternatively. you can simply right-click on any menu item to open the Command context menu. 241). Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab. 5. Customizing the Menus Adding Commands To Existing Menus 1. The command/icon is placed as a new option in the menu. Click to highlight a command/icon (under Commands). 3. Position the command/icon right where you want to drop it in the menu. Open the Customize dialog. 241 Customize dialog .

2. Open the Customize dialog. Select a command category (under Categories) to display a set of commands (under Commands). Type the name for the new menu in the Button Text field and press OK. Release the mouse button to place the selected command in the new menu. 242 Customize dialog . 235 on page 274). 278 TPDesign4 (v2. This opens the Button Appearance dialog.11 or higher) . 243). to the Commands tab (FIG. and select Button Appearance. FIG. While holding the mouse button down. FIG. 3. drag the New Menu icon to a location within the Menu Bar (FIG. Select New Menu from the Categories list. 6. Add commands to the new menu by clicking and dragging commands from the Commands list to the new menu (FIG. 244 Creating the New (Empty) Menu At the Cursor Location 5. 7. 245). 244). FIG. FIG. To name the new menu. This places the "New Menu" entry in the Commands list (FIG. right-click on the menu to open the New Command context menu. 245 Dragging the New Menu Icon To a Location Within the Menu Bar 8.Creating a New Custom Menu This item represents a new "empty" menu.Program Preferences Creating a New Custom Menu 1. 243 Dragging the New Menu Icon To a Location Within the Menu Bar 4. 242). Release the mouse button to create the new (empty) menu at the cursor location (FIG.

New (Insert) button FIG. 246 Customize dialog .Toolbars tab 2. click the browse button (. Enter a name for the application.) to locate and select the application's. Next to the Command field. The directory path is displayed in the Command text box.. 7. Specify any Arguments. Specify an Initial Directory. Click the New (Insert) button to create an empty text field in the Menu Contents list.11 or higher) 279 . 3.EXE file in the Open dialog. if necessary. The new shortcut should appear at the bottom of the Tools menu. 5. if necessary. Click Close to close the Customize dialog.Program Preferences Adding a Shortcut To an Application In the Tools Menu Use the options in the Tools tab of the Customize dialog to add/remove shortcuts to external applications in the Tools menu: 1. 4. 246). as you want it to appear in the Tools menu. 6. Open the Customize dialog to the Tools tab (FIG. TPDesign4 (v2..

To reset all hotkey assignments to their default settings. but only the first one will be displayed next to the item in the menu after this type of change. or to modify existing ones (FIG.Keyboard tab 1. then highlight the command's hotkey assignment in the Current Keys list. click Reset All. Choose a command in the Commands list. If you assign the minus key (-).11 or higher) . 4. sometimes referred to as "Keyboard Accelerators" (such as CTRL+C for the "Copy" command) can be customized in TPD4. select the command in the Commands list. 3. To remove a hotkey assignment. always use the number pad on your keyboard. Enter the new Hotkeys) in the Select New Shortcut Key field. to the Keyboard tab. 2. 280 TPDesign4 (v2. Multiple hotkeys can be assigned to the same command. Choose a command category in the Category drop-down menu. 247): FIG. 5. and click Remove.Program Preferences Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators) Hotkeys. You can view all of the current hotkey assignments in the Help Keyboard dialog (Help > Keyboard Map). The information in this dialog is read-only. 247 Customize dialog . Click Assign to assign the key(s) to the selected menu item. Open the Customize dialog. Setting Custom Hotkeys Use the Keyboard tab of the Customize dialog to create new Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators). as opposed to the minus key in the main key set.

Program Preferences TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 281 .

8000 • 469-624-7153 fax • 800.com 9/09 ©2009 AMX. All rights reserved. TX 75082 USA • 800.222.932. AMX reserves the right to alter specifications without notice at any time. RICHARDSON.6993 technical support • www.Take Control™ 3000 RESEARCH DRIVE. .It’s Your World . AMX and the AMX logo are registered trademarks of AMX.624.0193 • 469.amx.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful